Nathan katalog 2016

Page 1

Learning Materials 2016 N U R S E RY S C H O O L S • K I N D E R G A RT E N S • D AY C A R E C E N T R E S • S P E C I A L N E E D S

H E L P I N G Y O U P R E PA R E T H E F U T U R E


HELPING YOU PREPARE THE FUTURE

This year’s top picks! Nathan offers a wide range of educational and discovery games, workshops, learning tools and original solutions for creating living spaces and classroom spaces. All our products are designed so that at every stage in their development, children can make discoveries, experience new things and develop their capacity for learning and succeeding! • In language, pupils are encouraged to develop their verbal skills with a variety of approaches and materials. New products we would like to highlight include: Zoom - The Plant Kingdom (p. 16), Expression Games (p. 19) and Say it in Words (p. 21). • To encourage discovery of numbers, shapes and sizes, discover our range of tactile games and workshops, expanded with several new products this year: Zigomaths - Set 1 & 2 (p. 31), Discolud - Colours & Shapes (p. 79) and 1, 2, 3 - Sizes (p. 80). • For younger children, our range of sensory educational games and early tactile games has been expanded this year with several new products: Activity House - Peek-a-boo (p. 97), Nesting Actibaskets (p. 109) and Manipano Activity - House (p. 100). • Little ones will enjoy discovering the Passage Partition (p. 215) in their Clorofile space and taking off on motivational motor skills exploration paths with Actimousse® modules in new citrus colours (p. 278). • For group spaces, Compartment Storage and Changing Units (p. 239) supplement our dedicated reception range. And for your play spaces, a Playing Table on Casters (p. 170) makes it easy to set up play areas adapted to meet the children’s needs. Together we can ensure that all children reach their full potential.

THE EDITORIAL TEAM

Visit our website:

www.nathan.fr/learningmaterials

Printed in France by printing Pollina 85407 Luçon

Photos 2016 : © NATHAN : RENÉ BRASSART - JEAN-PIERRE DELAGARDE - CHRISTOPHE GRUNER - MARC MOITESSIER - LAURENCE MOUTON - GILLES PIAT - RÉMI ROBERT - SYLVA VILLEROT / © CORBIS : ÉRIC AUDRAS / © FOTOLIA : ENDOSTOCK - YURIY POZNUKHOV - CANAKRIS - HALLGERD - CH’LU - MONIKA ADAMCZYK - CHANTALS - FRANZ PFLUEGL - CHRISTIAN LARUE - MICHAEL KEMPF / © GETTY IMAGES : CHRIS RYAN - PANDO HALL / © ISTOCK PHOTOS : BART COENDERS / © SHUTTERSTOCK : BRIAN CHASE - THOMAS M. PERKINS Images 3D : ©ARCHITEXTE SYLVAINE GUILLOU ET FANNY LUSTIN. The greatest care is taken to ensure that the catalogue descriptions and illustrations are accurate. However colours and product details may vary from those presented.


olor

Abac

do

olore

Logic

Our Values and Commitments


Nathan, education partner for longer than we can remember! Learning: our profession • Nathan has been in education for more than a century, imagining, designing and publishing educational materials and resources to encourage children to bloom and succeed - this is the “heart” of our business. • Nathan has always defended its educational values with conviction: fostering discovery, learning and sharing knowledge through the pleasure of discovery. Starting children’s education off through sensory methods, Nathan is the leading publisher in the distribution of the “fun learning” concept in schools.

Nathan in schools • Nathan is a renowned, favourite partner to education professionals. Our products are designed and created alongside teachers and education experts to meet both your needs and those of children to the fullest possible extent. • Nathan offers a wide range of educational resources and equipment for all types of institutions that work with small children. Nathan Learning Materials currently has over 1000 different items, and over a hundred more are added every year.

Nathan across the world • A world-renowned publisher, Nathan is a truly international company. We support education policy on five continents. We have a network of local partners who share our philosophy and our involvement in pre-school education.

II


Educational excellence • Nathan

3gTuhaeraNnatethean

Learning Material s offers over 1000 products • All our products to support your are guaranteed education methods: educati for 2 years for quality and fau onal play, mater lts occurring du ial for discovery and lea ring normal, correct usage. rning, furniture for crèches, leisure facilities and nursery sch • All our articles ools. are tested and ch • We subscribe to ecked upon receipt from the the idea that the manufacturers (qu nu rse ry school is a place in which ality of the str uc ture and materials the early learning , operation, durab of language, oral understandin ility and reliability) to guara g, introductory rea ntee optimum qu ding and counting build the ality levels. necessary found ati on s in the first years and giv e the child the be st possible opportunities at school. Our in-ho use design team works in clo se cooperation wit h teachers, researchers and specialists. Choo sing Nathan’s educational value We have set up and quality mean partnerships with s investing local in the future of ou companies for the r children. distribution of ou r products. These partners en • All our products sure that you are are tested under provided with instructions on genuine user conditions by ch how to use our ildren and adults products, and provide you with prior to being released for sale. unrivalled quality of service.

4oQfusaelirvtyice

2

Compliance wit safety standard h s and quality • Na

than attaches en ormous importa nce to ensuring that its products are co mpliant with safety standard s. They are a de termining factor from the initial developme nt phases and are complie d with throughou t the product manufacturing an d supply process. • In addition to their educational value, all our products are de veloped with the greatest attention to the quality of raw ma terials, the manufacturing pro cess and safety requirements to ensure that the y are suitable for intensive use by children for many years. • In collaboration with manufactur ers and distributors aroun d the world, we are able to offer materials tha t meet the dema nding, highquality criteria req uired by teachers .

5

Environmental responsibility

We design and choose environ mentallyfriendly products by favouring the use of environmentallyfriendly material s: wood and paper from susta inably managed forests, recyclable and bio degradable plasti cs, etc. • We take partic ular care over the manufacturing processes used by our suppliers: reduced energy consumpti on, waste proce ssing and the use of solve nt-free paints an d varnish at comparable qu ality levels. • We constantly take care to red uce our logistics environmental foo tprint: we give pri ority to sea freight for ou r supplies, optim ised delivery turnarounds and lorry refilling, ne w packaging solutions, recyc led packaging, etc . • Our products are designed to las t: - Nathan’s expe rtise and quality is well known among education professionals; - Modular equip ment that you ca n add to and grow; - Keeping our pro ducts up over the years, with the option of res upplies and the provision of certain parts. Please see page s VI

and VII for more information.

III


Nathan at your side As a long-standing partner of pre-school education, Nathan has always been able to rely on the expertise and creativity of teachers to design high-quality, innovative educational products.

How are our products made? The release of a new Nathan product is the result of close collaboration between specialists in many different areas. Publishers, teachers, educators, psychologists, illustrators, designers and manufacturers work together to meet all your requirements to the fullest possible extent. Our aim is to provide you with a high-quality long-lasting product, designed for intensive communal use and which allows children to develop their full potential. This is the know-how that Nathan is able to offer you!

Product 6. Submission to test laboratories

6

7 5 4

2. Examination of the project or manuscript by the publisher

2

5. Testing performed by Nathan in nursery schools

4. Prototype production

3 1

7. Start of production

3. Presentation of the entire project to the Publishing Committee

1. Rafting of educational specifications and objectives by the publisher, incorporating environmental aspects from the design stage

Project

Do you have some interesting ideas? We can make them a reality... • Some of your colleagues already help us create innovative new products. You can join us. Do you have ideas for activities or educational games based on your day-to-day experience? We can bring them to life. • Draw up your ideas and send them to us. If your idea is chosen, it can be published and you’ll become one of our co-authors. Please send your ideas to: Nathan Matériel Éducatif - Comité Éditorial 25, avenue Pierre de Coubertin 75211 Paris Cedex 13 - France

IV


Compliance with standards and regulations

Material for Motor Skills

Nathan attaches enormous importance to ensuring that its products are compliant with health and safety standards. We work in close collaboration with independent accredited professional bodies whose role is to confirm the compliance of our products with applicable French and European standards.

Health

The compliance testing of our products is generally performed in two stages: during the product design phase and during the manufacturing phase.

REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals) is an EU regulation aimed at improving awareness of the chemicals used in industry in order to restrict their impact on health and the environment. This regulation entered into force on 1 June 2007, but the recording and authorisation procedures are being gradually introduced over a ten-year period. • The materials of our modules, foam mats and play mats bear the Oeko-Tex 100 "Textile Confidence" Label. This internationally recognised label guarantees that the products contain no chemicals harmful to health and skin (formaldehyde, heavy metals, phthalates, benzene, etc.).

Safety All our products covered by European standards bear the CE mark. The CE mark is obligatory for all products subject to one or more European Directives dealing with safety, public health and consumer protection. It appears on the product itself, on the packaging or the supplied documentation.

Toys • European Directive 2009/48/EC on the safety of toys: this new directive entered into force twice on 20 July 2011 for standards EN 71-1 and EN 71-2 (Mechanical and Flammability) and on 20 July 2013 for standard EN 71-3 (Chemicals). All our products classed as toys shall henceforth fully meet the obligations set out in this directive. • European standard EN 71 on the safety of toys: tests on physical properties (stability, shock resistance, fall resistance and traction resistance under the least favourable conditions of use), flammability tests, chemical tests etc. CE compliance statements for our products are available upon request.

Furniture • European standard EN 1729-1 and 2 for school furniture: equipment durability and usability, and user body types. • European standard EN 16121: 2014 on nondomestic storage furniture. • European standard EN 1021-1 and 2: flammability of upholstered furniture and seating.

Upholstered furniture and seating • European standard EN 1021-1 and 2: flammability of upholstered furniture and seating.

• French standard NF S 54-300 on Educational Material for Motor Skills: checking solidity, stability and the absence of trapping hazards for children aged between 0 and 12. • French and European standard NF-EN 12503-1-4-5-6 on gym mats.

• Our products comply with European regulations regarding health. • Our products comply with the REACH regulation that imposes manufacturing, trade and usage restrictions applicable to certain substances with the aim of protecting human health and the environment.

We constantly analyse the raw materials listed in the REACH appendix in relevant products in order to guarantee that their levels of azo dyes, phthalates, cadmium and PCP are well within the statutory limits. Azo dyes make up a sizable amount of colourings and are widely used in fabric items. The pigments of azo dyes are chemically produced and can release certain aromatic amines that are deemed to be carcinogenic. Phthalates are regularly used in plastics (especially PVC) to make them flexible. Their use in toys has been drastically reduced in Europe due to their toxicity and the potential environmental impact.

Air quality • Moving forward with our health and environment initiatives, we analyse the formaldehyde levels in our wood-based materials in order to ensure that they are kept to a minimum (E1 classification of our materials). Formaldehyde is a volatile organic compound (VOC) which is harmful to human health. It is a solvent used in many synthetic materials, in particular glues and resins used in wooden panels. Since 2002, the E1 standard has guaranteed strict formaldehyde thresholds. • French Decree No. 2011-1728 of 2 December 2011, concerning the monitoring of air quality in nurseries and infant schools, came into force on 1 January 2015. All the materials we select comply with this regulatory provision.

V


: sibility n o p s e l R sely? Sociap e t a reci r o t p itude Cor what is i tive att a proac

ble ) is y (CSR ustaina nsibilit rinciples of s d to take into o p s e R l ep igne ny te Socia on of th cale. It is des compa s Corpora the promoti acts of u te s p th ra o im d g l n rp in a ent. involv on a co environmenta le practices nvironm pment e ib d s n lo e s a e o th l v p e ia g t d c n s o e ti s c b e e te t th t th and pro accoun o as to adop society s roving p activity im ute to contrib

Nathan and sustainable development Our approach • At Nathan, our commitment to CSR is nothing new. For many years now, our activity and our relations with our partners (suppliers, customers, service providers, employees, public institutions, etc.) have incorporated social, environmental and economic prerogatives.

Today, we are pursuing and intensifying our commitment:

WE SUPPORT

- With our official endorsement, in June 2012, of the United Nations Global Compact, the objective of which is to promote 10 universal principles concerning human rights, labour rights, environmental protection and anticorruption. - With the implementation of a Corporate Social and Environmental Steering Committee responsible for its deployment in the company. Our CSR commitment revolves around three principles: - Reducing the impact of our activity on the environment. - Acting to ensure greater equality and fulfilment in the workplace. - Making our business reflect our social commitment.

Preserving the environment Offering sustainable, environmentally-friendly products • Nathan has always been committed to the idea that “socially-responsible” quality is by its very nature made to last: - We are developing products using environmentally-friendly materials and new materials that are harder-wearing and lighter, so as to reduce the impact on the environment and to optimise the serviceable life of our products. - We perform checks at key stages of the manufacturing process in order to guarantee optimal quality and finish. - The woods used in the manufacturing process for our furniture mainly come from environmentally-managed forests

VI

and we are against the use of wood taken from illegal logging.

- Our paper comes from environmentallymanaged forests and is elemental chlorine free (ECF). ECF bleaching has been recognised by the European Commission and the US Environmental Protection Agency as the “best available technology”.

- Depending on the intended use of our materials, we concentrate on environmentally-friendly, water-based paints. These water-soluble paints are guaranteed solvent-free.


Promoting responsible purchasing policies

TS

MITME

N

CO

M

- We favour reliable manufacturers and partners who provide excellent quality and are committed to the environment: reduced energy consumption, processing and re-use of waste (wood, paper, gloss paints, etc). - We carefully select our suppliers based on ethical criteria: respect for ILO (International Labour Organisation) conventions regarding forced child labour, respect for basic human rights and inspection of working conditions. Our ICTI (International Council of Toy Industries) certified toy suppliers are subject to inspection audits every year, according to very strict criteria.

Reduced use of packaging and reduced paper consumption - Our boxes and other waste (paper, plastic materials) are all collected and recycled. We have reduced the paper requirements of our catalogues by 30% over 5 years.

Streamlining our logistics and the impact on the environment In an effort to reduce CO2 emissions relating to the transportation of our raw materials and products, we are constantly seeking to optimise our logistics and to reduce our energy consumption. Three priority areas: - Proximity to production locations: over 80% of our production is made in Europe. - Outside Europe, our supplies are mainly delivered via sea freight in order to reduce their carbon footprint. - We provide flat-pack furniture in order to optimise packaging requirements.

Raising awareness of sustainable development among our staff A number of initiatives have been undertaken at Nathan to promote sustainable development in the everyday activities of our employees: - the use of energy-saving lights in our premises - the recycling of office paper, ink cartridges, light bulbs and batteries - the provision of drinking fountains connected to the mains water supply - a purchasing policy favouring ecological products (envelopes, paper, etc.)

Acting as a socially-responsible company • Contributing to think tanks on environmental and social issues Editis-Éditions Nathan is a member of Comité 21, which works in favour of sustainable and fair corporate development. • Acting to respect human rights and rights of the child, especially the basic right to education - Nathan is a partner of Unicef, working to raise awareness among young people of the rights of the child, international solidarity and citizenship. - Nathan is developing special schemes to combat illiteracy and to help the insertion of young people and adults in difficult circumstances into the world of work. • Education about sustainable development Our role as publisher of education resources also creates the responsibility to act alongside children and teachers to raise awareness of “living together” and respect for the environment.

VII


Sc ho ol te ac he r, tu to r, ex pe rt in pe da th ei r ca re er go gy or in pa th an d fie a va rie ty of ld of sp ec ia pe da go gi ca ot he r di sc ip lis at io n, th ey l exce lle nce, lin es ... W ha al l sh are th e th e ch ild re n’ au th or s w ith teve r sa m e am bi tio s en joym en a pl ace of ho t an d su pp or n to co m bi ne no ur th is ye t fo r th e te ar ! ac he r. M ee t ou r

André

Jacquart her training sor at a teac matics profes arily on the pedagogy he at m er im ving. A form problem-sol now works pr college who nursery school and on ench Ministerial in Fr e ics th at of m r he be at mem of m rresponding p on Toys. He was a co Grou

tions

Main publica

Valérie Barry

ths p. 47 • Colour Leng eness Sets ar Aw l ia at • Sp p. 54 p. 57 • Geocolor o p. 84 • Quantissim

rs Set p. 26 • First Numbe hs p. 30 at • The Zigom ble Sets p. 33, Ta • Quadriludi 45, 51 3 Sets p. 41-4 • Acromaths Lengths p. 46 g in er ov sc Di •

n Senior lecturer in educatio mathematics. and associate professor in s She specialises in special need r. tuto learning and is a University

Publications

p. 16 • Zoom - The Plant Kingdom p. 16 dom • Zoom - The Animal King • 1, 2, 3 - Sizes p. 45

Françoise

Eriksen

Schooling p tutor, her rogramme super vi w phonolog ork centres on langsor and former ic of the alp al learning and ac uage situations, quisition habetic p rinciple.

Main publi

ca

tions • From Pic tu (in collab res to Words or Fournier ation with Myriam • The Rig Dulac) p. 6 ht Order of Picture p. 11 s

adec Hervé Le M r (specialising in

che Specialist schooltea larly bances). He is particu psychological distur rch for pedagogical interested in the sea ed children responses for troubl of running s and in the component a class group.

Main publications

Awareness p. 82 • Fingercards - Spatial ers p. 83 • Fingercards - Numb 87 • 16 Little Frogs p.

VIII


2

P.

178

Early Learning

Artistic Activities

Learning Language .......................................... p. 4 Discovering Writing ......................................... p. 23 Discovering Maths ............................................ p. 26 Discovering the World .................................... p. 59

Music ..................................................................... p. 180 Arts and Crafts ................................................. p. 182

P.

64

P.

Educational Games Learning Games ................................................. p. 66 Educational Games .......................................... p. 84

P.

Furniture Living Areas ....................................................... p. 212 Communal Areas ............................................. p. 236 Storage Units..................................................... p. 246 Library Furniture.............................................. p. 259 Activity Equipment ........................................ p. 266

90

Skills Development and Early Motor Activities Sensory Skills Development........................ p. 92 Fine Motor Skills ............................................... p. 98 Construction ....................................................... p. 112 Jigsaws and Puzzles ....................................... p. 120 Early Learning .................................................... p. 136

P.

210

P.

272

Physical Activities Adventure Course Units............................... p. 274 Balance, Coordination and Agility .......... p. 288 Indoor and Outdoor Equipment .............. p. 293

142

CONTENTS

P.

Pretend Play Kitchen Corner .................................................. p. 144 Grocery Corner.................................................. p. 153 House Corner ..................................................... p. 155 Theatre Corner .................................................. p. 164 Pretend Group Play ......................................... p. 166 Play Corners........................................................ p. 167

Index .............................................................p. 296 1


2


To discover... N EW

Early Learning Say It In Words

P.21 N EW

O

ur underlying commitment is to provide learning materials suited to young and older children alike. Designed jointly with educational professionals, our products encourage progressive learning of oral and written language, and the discovery of the world. These innovative products can be used in workshops and small groups, and can be adapted to the child’s progress. Most include a teacher’s leaflet.

Learning Language First steps in Communication

p.

4

Understanding and Learning

p.

6

Starting to Think about Language

p. 14

Discovering Writing Preparing to Learn to Write

Zigomaths Sets

P.31 N EW

p. 23

Discovering Maths First Look at Numbers

p. 26

Discovering Shapes, Sizes and Colours

p. 34

Counting, Sorting, Measuring

p. 48

Spatial Awareness

p. 50

Geometry

p. 57

Discovering the World Time Awareness

p. 59

Nature and Environment

p. 61

Balanced Diet

p. 62

Sorting Set • Materials

P.62 3


Learning Language

First Steps in Communication Puppets • An intermediary object to encourage children to talk in a group and promote the pleasure of communicating. • Children express themselves actively and work to make sure others understand them.

NEW Puppets of the World 4 puppets with which children can identify. An ideal resource for language activities and time spent in groups. The school bag is detachable. • Polyester and cotton velvet, machine washable at 30°C. Allow to dry gently at room temperature. • H: 32 cm.

Awa

Kim

Tom

Mani

313 309 352 500 0

313 309 352 498 0

313 309 352 497 3

313 309 352 499 7

Ulysses the Puppet Ulysses the globe-trotter helps children discover the world. He encourages storytelling and questions, all on travel-related themes.

4

• H.: 42 cm. 313 309 342 177 7


Learning Language

Large Images • Great springboards for oral activities in groups and workshops. • The rich illustrations assist the discovery of vocabulary. • For each poster, the guide provides activities for the exploration and analysis of the image.

On each poster, there are 20 actions and behaviours to analyse. 13 posters

4 YEARS +

Large Images - Living Together Mireille Perret and Michèle Granier

The folder contains: • 13 posters in 52 x 40 cm format. • 1 printable guide on CD (PDF format). 313 309 337 139 3

40 cm

Learn to express ideas and communicate about situations related to the classroom and the world of children. 13 posters depict the daily life of a class of 26 children. Each illustration shows a situation in which more than 20 different actions and behaviours are represented. Observation of the characters and their actions progressively encourages children to develop their critical faculties and think about how to “live together”: • At school: In the playground - In the classroom - In the school canteen - In the games room - In the swimming pool. • In the family: In the children’s bedroom - The birthday The family bike ride. • In society: The coach trip - At the zoo - At the farm Visit to the castle.

1 printable guide on CD

52 cm

2 YEARS +

Images for Building On A. Popet 12 large-format scenes of everyday life

40 cm

A diverse, original language support using large-size pictures. A set of pictures featuring scenes of everyday life: a garden, a kitchen, a bathroom, a birthday party, a bedroom, a car, a classroom, a street, a supermarket, a shop cash desk, a merry-goround, a swimming pool. The folder contains: • 12 large colour pictures (52 x 40 cm), • 12 large-format black and white background scenes (52 x 40 cm), • 12 large decor pictures for photocopying (29.7 x 21 cm), • 1 teacher’s leaflet. • Comes in a large transparent folder. 313 309 388 027 7

52 cm

POINT A black and white background scene corresponds to each picture for use in memory and imagination activities.

5


Learning Language

Understanding and Learning POINT The format of the game boards and size of magnetic counters make it easy to set up workshops either in small groups or with half a class. MAGNETIC

3 YEARS + PIECES

From Pictures to Words Françoise Eriksen and Myriam Fournier Dulac

Specially designed to create language situations in small groups, this teaching pack is organised into 5 successive steps building up from words to sentences. The comprehensive and varied material encourages a great many activities to promote communication: acquiring vocabulary, comparing, explaining choices, describing, etc.

22 character cards

80 magnetic counters

The box contains: • 5 double-sided magnetic game boards (i.e. 10 different boards) - 50 x 35 cm. • 80 magnetic counters. • 1 set of 22 character cards. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 137 9 1 blank board for sorting and categorising activities

3 boards depicting scenes from everyday life

2 character boards (boy and girl) for widening the vocabulary and dressing up parts of the body

4 photo-boards on specific themes

Pictures

POINT

Categorised in 3 families: characters, places and objects. The wealth of illustrations stimulates the imagination, speech and discussion between children. • Format suitable for group or workshop use. • 32 character cards: heroes, likeable characters, a friend or an enemy. • 23 place cards: initial location, background location, an obstacle and ultimate locations. • 17 object cards: “hero’s wish” object, a magical or evil object.

Scenes can be customised by teachers using the magnetic tokens.

4 YEARS +

72 PICTURES

Making up Fairy Tales

16.5 cm

16.5 cm

A. Mauffrey and I. Cohen

A set of 72 picture cards to invent a variety of stories and to broaden descriptive language. The box contains: • 72 picture cards (16.5 x 16.5 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 238 3

Teacher’s leaflet

6

This details the educational procedure, presents various story backdrops, an example of use and further activities to move from oral to written work. 32 character cards

23 location cards

17 object cards


Tales to Tell Nathalie Lepouder

Teacher’s leaflet • Presents the objectives, the materials and how the activities progress. • Summarises the main elements of each story (period in history, places, characters, objects) and the associated action verbs. • Suggests an extra activity involving creating stories based on the poster.

72 cm

The background landscapes and the magnetic panels • 6 background landscapes to be placed on the magnetic panels: a forest, a house in a forest, a castle in the clouds, an ogre’s house, a castle and a boulder, a farm with a village in the distance. Depending on the stories, there can be 1 to 4 background landscapes. • Once open, each of the 2 panels can hold 2 backgrounds. Placed side by side, they highlight the different moments of transition and make it easy to move the shapes around. 35 cm 6 background landscapes to be placed on 2 large format magnetic panels

25.5 cm

The box contains: • 2 large format magnetic panels (72 x 26 cm). • 6 background landscapes (35 x 25.5 cm). • 43 magnetic shapes: 23 characters, 20 objects. • 1 poster for creating a "story mix" (42 x 60 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 160 7

26 cm

This workshop uses an active, fun approach to familiarise children with the elements that make up a story and the narrative structure of a tale. The children move the magnetic shapes around on the background landscapes to make the stories their own, then are encouraged to reproduce them orally in a dynamic dramatisation. The workshop provides an effective medium for speaking up and for verbal communication. 4 traditional tales: The Wolf and the Seven Young Goats, Hop-o’-My-Thumb, Snow White, Jack and the Beanstalk.

Learning Language

MAGNETIC

4 YEARS + PIECES

42 cm

The magnetic shapes 60 cm

43 shapes corresponding to the 23 characters and 20 objects in the 4 stories presented.

The poster • This gives an overview of the worlds of the 4 stories covered. • Using the magnetic shapes, the children can create a new story.

The cards represent the key events of a story to help grasp narrative structure.

3 YEARS +

55 CARDS

Fairy Tales Set D. Chauvel

9 Traditional tales on 55 cards: Goldilocks, The Little Red Hen, The 3 Little Pigs, The Adventures of the Little Mouse, Little Red Riding Hood, Snow White, Cinderella, Sleeping Beauty and Tom Thumb. The box contains: • 55 cards (12 x 8 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 008 2

7


Learning Language

Listening Sets • To encourage children to describe and explain scenes illustrated using sound and images.

2 photo formats for group and individual games

1 CD lasting 54 minutes

21 cm

2 YEARS + 8.5 cm

29.7 cm

12 cm

2X30 PHOTOS

Audio Flashcards Everyday Sounds An audio CD and 60 photos in 2 formats to name, play and understand the environment. 6 themes relating to children’s everyday life: animals, music, objects, transport, facial expressions and leisure activities. The 30 large format photos are for use in observing and describing an image. The inclusion of 30 card format photos helps with handling by small hands and enables word games to be set up. The audio CD contains sounds associated with each image. The box contains: • 30 colour large format photos (L/W: 29.7 x 21 cm). • 30 card format photos (L/W: 12 x 8.5 cm). • 1 audio CD lasting 54 minutes. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 219 4

21 cm

2 image formats for group and individual games

8.5 cm

29.7 cm

12 cm 1 CD lasting 66 minutes

2 YEARS +

2X30 PHOTOS

Audio Flashcards - Animals This comprehensive collection is perfect for young children, enriching their vocabulary about all types of animals, finding out what noises they make and how they live. The large images help legibility and descriptive activities. The same images are included in small format for use in games. The CD is for use in listening and language sessions. The box contains: • 1 CD lasting 66 minutes. • 30 colour photos (29.7 x 21 cm) and 30 card photos (12 x 8.5 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 212 5

8


a n d

L e a r n i n g

22.7 cm

33 cm

Learning Language

U n d e r s t a n d i n g

6 large-format boards

2 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

My First Sound Situations Lotto Listening and language material that can be used in group sequences or lotto games. The children must identify 30 sounds corresponding to the sound situations illustrated in scenes of everyday life: kitchen, dining room, bedroom, bathroom, in the street and at the park. For learning to observe and describe scenes, developing discrimination and aural memory, encouraging dialogue and enhancing vocabulary. • The box contains: 6 laminated boards in thick cardboard, 30 plastic tokens, 1 CD lasting 32 minutes and 1 teacher's leaflet. • L/W of board: 33 x 22.7 cm. • Ø of token: 3.5 cm. 313 309 337 143 0

30 tokens

1 CD lasting 32 minutes

1 CD lasting 45 minutes 8 large scene cards

24 illustrated cards

3 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Listening to Stories 1 D. Lévy

8 stories featuring Splash the Dog, illustrated in one main picture, and in three cards depicting isolated sounds. Each sequence is recorded twice in its entirety and twice in a row with isolated sounds. • L/W card: 24 x 18 / 14 x 9.5 cm. • The box contains: 1 CD lasting 45 minutes, 24 illustrated cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 132 4

9


16 photo boards

Language game

24 cm

Lotto games

18 cm

Learning Language

18 cm

6 lotto boards

4 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Musical Instruments Audio Games For setting up activities around spoken language, listening and discovery of the world on the theme of musical instruments. • Language game: by looking at the photo boards, children learn to recognise different instruments, their family (strings, wind, percussion, etc.), what they are made of (wood, brass, metal, plastic, etc.), their origin, their sound and so on, and acquire an accurate vocabulary. • Audio lotto games: several activities with progressively increasing difficulties around 36 different sounds, to develop listening, discrimination and aural memory.

24 cm

• The box contains: 16 cardboard photo boards, 6 cardboard lotto boards, 36 plastic tokens, 1 40-minute CD and 1 teacher's leaflet. • L/W of photo boards and lotto boards: 24 x 18 cm. • Ø token: 3.5 cm. 313 309 337 226 0

1 CD lasting 40 minutes 36 tokens

1 CD lasting 54 minutes

22 cm

6 scene cards

4 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Sound Situations Lotto 48 sounds matching the situations illustrated on 6 scene cards: garden, kitchen, street, square, forest and beach. When they hear a sound, children place a counter on the matching item on the scene card. 6 sequences are recorded in a row, the first scene-by-scene, the others in random orders.

10

• L/W card: 33 x 22 cm. • Ø counter: 3 cm. • The box contains: 1 CD lasting 54 minutes, 6 rigid cardboard scene cards, 60 plastic counters and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 131 7

33 cm

60 plastic counters


a n d

L e a r n i n g

Image Sequences • A variety of concepts to encourage children to describe a scene and focus on a chronological sequence of events.

Learning Language

U n d e r s t a n d i n g

3 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

The Right Order of Pictures Françoise Eriksen

This material proposes a step-by-step progression to encourage children to identify the chronological order of series of 2 to 4 sequential images. At first, children will work on a series of sheets with a pre-printed picture to build on the "before", "after", "middle" concepts; then they will put the pictures in the correct order on blank sheets. • L/W activity sheets: 23 / 33 / 46 x 13 cm. • L/W image card: 10 x 10 cm. The box contains: • 24 activity sheets of 2, 3 or 4 squares, with or without a printed image, 52 picture cards divided into 5 sets and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 280 4

52 PICTURES

24

52 image cards

SHEETS

POINT • Series of 2, 3 and 4 images • Large uncluttered illustrations to make it easy for children to pick up clues.

24 activity sheets: 12 sheets with a printed image, 12 blank sheets

Teacher’s leaflet

• Find the image that goes "next", the first one is provided.

• Find the image that goes "before" and "after", the middle one is provided.

• Presents objectives, material, progression and step-by-step activity procedure. • Includes a table with chronological sequences and corresponding stories. • Suggests ideas for assessment and a vocabulary guide (actions/verbs, spatial concepts/adverbs. • Make a series of 4 images on a blank sheet.

11


12 cm

Learning Language

14 cm

2 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

52 PICTURES

Ploum Chronological Series 14 series of 3, 4 and 5 pictures depicting Ploum in scenes that are familiar and amusing. These sequential pictures enable young children to place an action in time and evolve towards narrative language and story-telling logic. • L/W card: 14 x 12 cm. • The box contains: 52 hard cardboard pictures with rounded corners and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 349 0

5 YEARS +

82 PICTURES

Chronological Sequences Annick Mauffrey and Isdey Cohen

Teacher’s leaflet

Stories to make up to develop language skills. This material includes 82 pictures that enable 11 stories to be made up (with 2 “odd one out” cards per story). The supplied story backgrounds delight children and encourage them to express themselves: The scooter race, The train trip, The rubber ball, etc. The box contains: • 82 cards (16.5 x 16.5 cm) that make up 11 stories; • 5 series of 6 cards, with 2 “odd one out” cards per story; • 6 series of 5 cards, with 2 “odd one out” cards per story; • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 239 0

The teacher’s leaflet details: - the procedure and the aims; - recommendations for group, individual and workshop use; - oral activities to do (7 ways for each series of pictures); - interchangeable activity methods: place events on a timescale, place characters and objects in a space, write a short story (dictated to the adult).

16.5 cm

16.5 cm

The linked illustrations encourage children to pick up clues, make guesses and work together as a group.

2 “odd one out” cards to be eliminated in reference to an episode in the story.

How to use Chronological Sequences? Examples of Chronological Sequences: A lot of language activities can be performed using each series of pictures: building up a story, eliminating “odd one out” cards, justifying points of view, choosing a title, completing the story, imagining another ending, etc. “odd one out” cards “The wasp’s sting”

12


a n d

L e a r n i n g 15 cm

POINTS • Four-stage stories. • Large dimension pictures.

52

21 cm

3 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

PHOTOS

Photo Sequence Set 1 13 series of 4 photos: birthday, bath, orange juice, slide, hairdresser, tricycle, construction game, bear, washing hands, gift, ice-cream and banana. • L/W photo: 21 x 15 cm. • The box contains: 52 cardboard photographs and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 978 209 337 009 3

Game 1: 5 cards to put in order

4 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Learning Language

U n d e r s t a n d i n g

35 CARDS

Scenario - Chronological Sequences Two packs of cards for making logical sequences offering two levels of difficulty and a variety of themes. Game 1: 7 sets of 5 cards to put in order. Game 2: 6 sets of 6 cards with one odd card out. • L/W card: 12 x 8 cm. • The box contains: 2 packs of 35 and 36 cards. 313 309 337 230 7 Odd card out

36 CARDS

Game 2: 6 cards with one odd card out

4 YEARS +

40 PHOTOS

Image Sequences Sands of Time

15 cm

12 cm

Photo flashcards chosen to help the child understand the concept of time. The photos are used as a basis for identifying a chronology by looking at the concepts of succession (before, now, after) or simultaneousness (at the same time). The 40 colour photographs provide a rich and original resource for the development of language and the acquisition of new vocabulary. The image collection is organised into eight themes, each comprising five photographs that can be used individually or as a set, depending on the child’s level: growing up, life stages, from hatching to first flight, making a mask, planting flowers, from flower to fruit, building a house, a sailing boat leaving the harbour. • L/W photo: 15 x 12 cm. • The box contains: 40 colour photos, plastic dividers for filing families of photos and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 195 1

13


Broaden vocabulary Image banks: • Enhance children’s vocabulary. • Encourage grouping and classification of objects. • Large size pictures: 15 x 12 cm or maxi-format: 21 x 15 cm.

15 cm

12 cm

Learning Language

Starting to Think about Language

2 YEARS +

105 PHOTOS

Photo Box - Food 3 series of 35 photo flashcards: fruit and vegetables, meat and fish and desserts. The box contains: • 105 photos (15 x 12 cm). • Plastic dividers for filing families of photos. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 343 8

15 cm

2 YEARS +

105 PHOTOS

12 cm

Photo Box - Animals 6 series of photo flashcards of animals in their natural environment: mammals, birds, amphibians and reptiles, fish, insects and spiders and a series of diverse species. The plastic box contains: • 105 photos (15 x 12 cm). • Plastic dividers for filing families of photos. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 346 9

8.5 cm

12 cm

2 YEARS +

48 PHOTOS

Photo Box - Everyday Life 48 photos to enrich the child’s vocabulary of everyday life. 6 topics are included: toys, clothes, hygiene, forms of transport, farm animals and musical instruments.

14

• The box contains: 48 photos (12 x 8.5 cm). 313 309 342 220 0


Learning Language

21 cm

2 YEARS +

50 PHOTOS

The aim of this collection is to learn a specific lexicon, and also to encourage the re-use of this vocabulary in dialogue situations during play. The chosen theme helps instil a number of language-related situations from the easiest to more complex: • naming and recognising different items of clothing, • associating each item with a part of the body, • sorting them by season, weather or time of day, • identifying the different ways of finding the different parts of the clothes, etc.

15 cm

Photo Box - Clothing

The box contains: • 50 colour photographs (21 x 15 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 142 3

21 cm

POINT

2 YEARS +

50

15 cm

Large size pictures to enable group activities.

PHOTOS

Photo Box - Household Items Especially suitable for language-learning, this collection can enrich the vocabulary relating to children’s everyday environment. The card format is particularly suitable for small group workshops and helps to describe each object pictured. The box contains: • 50 photos (21 x 15 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet.

313 309 337 150 8

21 cm

50 PHOTOS

Photo Box - Objects from School The 50 photographs enable children to name various objects around the classroom and explore infant activities: • manual activities, • motor skill activities, • musical instruments, • games, • learning materials, • classroom furniture. The box contains: • 50 colour photographs (21 x 15 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 371 1

15 cm

2 YEARS +

15


POINT

Double-sided

Stunning large-format photos

21 cm

28.7 cm

Learning Language

NEW

3 YEARS +

80 PHOTOS

Zoom - The Plant Kingdom Valérie Barry

On the front: observation of part of the plant with a magnifying glass.

• Nutrition and health

On the back: identification of the plant. Plant shapes

5 sets of 8 large-format double-sided photos for discovering themes connected to plant life and life cycle: plant shapes, the cycle of the seasons, roots and movement, growth and reproduction, and nutrition and health. On the front: observation of one or more details through a magnifying glass; on the back: identification of the plant. • The box contains: 40 double-sided colour photo boards (21 x 28.7 cm) and 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 342 296 5

• Growth and reproduction

POINT Various high-quality large-format photo boards

Double-sided

28.7 cm

21 cm

3 YEARS +

128 PHOTOS

Zoom - The Animal Kingdom V. Barry

On the front: observation of part of the animal with a magnifying glass.

• How the body works

On the back: identification of the whole animal. Physical appearance

• Reproduction

10 cm

8 sets of 16 large-format double-sided photo boards for discovering themes around animal life: physical appearance, the five senses, locomotion, how the body works, growth, reproduction, nutrition, health and hygiene. On the front: observation of one or more details with a magnifying glass; on the back: identification of the whole animal. • The box contains: 64 double-sided colour photo boards (21 x 28.7 cm) and 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 342 300 9

18 MONTHS +

Animages A practical, easy-to-handle collection for naming, recognising and comparing adult animals and their young.

16

Animages - Pets

Animages - Wild Animals

313 309 342 273 6

313 309 342 272 9

• 22 pages of tear-proof paper (Ø: 10 cm), connected by a plastic ring. • Set of 2.


t o

T h i n k

a b o u t

L a n g u a g e

Prepositions

4 YEARS +

96

In front of

Behind

Learning Language

S t a r t i n g

In front of and behind

PHOTOS

Words in Photos

Adjectives

Jacqueline Rioult and Sylvie Demetz

To enhance basic vocabulary and communicate with others, 3 series of photo flashcards illustrating 3 categories of words: - prepositions: 20 photos (below, above, far from, near to, etc.); - qualifying adjectives: 36 photos (light, dark, full, empty, etc.); - action verbs: 40 photos (stroke, garden, whisper, etc.). 5 photos show complex scenes for using terms learnt separately. They encourage children to re-use vocabulary, and facilitate evaluation. Photos based on themes familiar to children: - can be grouped together to tell a story; - can be opposed or worked on individually.

Heavy

Light

Verbs

The box contains: • 96 photos (15 x 12 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 179 0

Heavy and light

Scene photos

Gardening

12 cm

15 cm

4 YEARS +

40 PHOTOS

Photo Box The Seasons This series of photo flashcards allows the child to discover the cyclical pattern of the weather. For this purpose, the child associates clues, sorts, classes, associates and corrects. The image collection is organised into 6 themes: types of clothing, plants and fruit, animals, landscapes, types of manual work and leisure activities. The landscape theme comprises four sub-themes: the countryside, the sea, the city and the mountains. The box contains: • 40 photos (15 x 12 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 196 8

17


53 cm

32.5 cm

Learning Language

Learning How to Make Sentences

MAGNETIC 3 YEARS + PIECES

Everyday Safety

25 cards

4 scenes in large format in magnetic cardboard

40 magnetic tokens

Explore and discuss daily situations to help spot and avoid various domestic dangers. As part of our safety education programme, this resource includes linguistic activities using everyday situations that enable children to identify and avoid the various dangers. 4 posters illustrate scenes of everyday life: the kitchen, lounge, bathroom and garden. The teacher facilitates and encourages communication on the illustrated situations using magnetic tokens and cards that represent dangerous actions. These activities provide children with an awareness of household dangers and their prevention. • L/W poster: 53 x 32.5 cm. • L/W token: 4.25 x 4.25 cm / 4.25 x 2.55 cm. • L/W card: 12 x 8 cm. • The folder contains: 4 posters, 40 tokens in magnetic cardboard, 25 cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 135 5

1 language game

4 YEARS + 5 CHILDREN

35 photo boards

Food Games 3 types of activities about food are offered to encourage knowledge, language, discussion and sensory enjoyment. •A language game: children learn to recognise the different foods and their origins, and describe a dish, by looking at the photo boards. • A sorting game: the 5 round counters represent 5 food groups and allow the photos to be sorted by flavour, colour, type of meal, etc. • 2 lotto games: "1 food group" lotto or "5 food groups" lotto.

1 sorting game 5 "food groups" counters

• L/W boards: 24 x 18 cm. • L/W photo cards: 8 x 7 cm. • Ø counters: 6 cm. • The box contains: 35 photo boards, 5 double-sided lotto boards, 5 illustrated round counters, 25 photo cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 032 8 5 lotto boards

7 cm

2 lotto games 8 cm

18

25 photo cards

On the front, "1 food group" lotto

On the back, "5 food group" lotto


t o

T h i n k

1 language game

a b o u t

L a n g u a g e

NEW

1 sorting game

30 photo boards

24 cm

6 expression counters Front Back

2 lotto games 30 photo cards

3 YEARS +

1-6 CHILDREN

Expression Games

18 cm

Front Back

4 games in 1 for discovering facial expressions and thinking about what they mean, from the child’s own expression and others’ expressions. Children learn to recognise, name, interpret and reproduce 6 facial expressions: smiling, laughing, sadness, anger, disgust and surprise. In the process, they expand their vocabulary and become aware that the face is an essential element of expression and non-verbal communication. • A language game: the photo boards are the starting point for numerous activities involving observation, description, comparison, riddles, mime, etc. • A sorting game: sort the photos based on their expression and match them with the corresponding symbol counters; sort by type of feeling (happiness/unhappiness). • 2 lotto games: 1 expression lotto or 6 expression lotto.

6 lotto boards

18 cm

• L/W board: 24 x 18 cm. • L/W card: 8 x 6 cm. • Ø counter: 6 cm. • The box contains: 30 cardboard photo boards, 6 illustrated expression counters in cardboard, 6 double-sided cardboard lotto boards, 30 cardboard photo cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 332 010 0

Front / Back

Learning Language

S t a r t i n g

24 cm

1 language game

18 cm

24 cm

4 YEARS + 5 CHILDREN

The 5 Senses Games Games for discovering the 5 senses and their function, for developing language and knowledge of the environment. 3 games in 1 to explore the 5 senses. • A language game: using large photos, the children observe, describe the sensations, identify the organs concerned, compare their sensory experiences etc. • A sorting game: sort the photos by sense and associate them with the matching counter-symbols; match by type of sensation, etc. • 2 lotto games: “1 sense” lotto or “5 senses” lotto.

35 photo boards

1 sorting game

5 counters

The box contains: • 35 photo boards (24 x 18 cm). • 5 double-sided lotto boards (24 x 18 cm). • 25 photo cards (8 x 7 cm). • 5 round counters (Ø: 6 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 031 1 24 cm

2 lotto games

18 cm

8 cm

7 cm

25 photo cards

On the back “5 senses” lotto

On the front “1 sense” lotto

19


Learning Language

24 model sheets to put on the back of the lectern

Front/Back

POINT 4 landscape sheets to place on the lectern

2 large format lecterns with 1 magnetic face.

MAGNETIC 4 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN PIECES

Topoprimo 2 lecterns with 1 magnetic face

16 magnetic shapes

Communication activities for acquiring and structuring spatial concepts through language. Example activities: • discovery: describing landscapes, identifying and naming characters, objects and animals; • memorisation: observing then describing, answering questions or solving riddles; • placing shapes: following verbal instructions, with an odd one out, missing piece, etc. The box contains: • 2 lecterns with 1 magnetic green face (33 x 23 cm). • 4 landscape sheets: an orchard, the countryside, a house, a beach (32.5 x 22.7 cm). • 16 magnetic shapes (4 per landscape): 4 characters, 3 objects, 9 animals. • 24 model sheets (21 x 18.5 cm). • 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 342 867 7

2 packs of 48 playing cards

4 card holders

4 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Language Game 2 This game encourages the construction of simple sentences to describe and identify a picture. Using model cards and corresponding cards, the children describe the picture in turn. Without looking at the cards, the other children must recognise it and complete their own card. Other games are suggested using the cards alone.

12 model cards

20

• L/W model card: 25 x 10 cm. • L/W playing card: 8.5 x 5.5 cm. • The box contains: 4 strong cardboard activity cards to hold the playing cards, 12 model cards (3 sets of 4) representing the situations to be described, 2 identical packs of 48 playing cards, 8 transparent studs to vertically insert the model cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 991 8


t o

T h i n k

a b o u t

L a n g u a g e

NEW

4 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Say It In Words Georges Rémond

48 cards

Fun, entertaining kit for creating two-child language situations and encouraging pupils to dialogue in a spirit of play and helping each other. The children progressively enrich their vocabulary and enunciate more and more precisely and completely, going from a single word to a sentence.

• The cards are split into 8 themes: food, clothes, school, around the house, animals, the body and hygiene, transport, and the garden. • Each theme consists of 6 cards that work in pairs.

Learning Language

S t a r t i n g

For each theme, the dialogues are organised into 3 successive steps: Step 1: Enrich vocabulary for garden objects.

The box contains: • 48 cards split into 8 themes (21 x 15 cm). • 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 388 083 3

Teacher’s leaflet

Step 2: Introduce the concept of prepositions around animals (above, below, etc.).

• Presents the organisation and content of the activities. • Describes the different ways of using the materials: discovery activities based on labels for download, two-child language activities with the cards. • Proposes example formulations for use by the teacher.

Step 3: Produce simple sentences using action verbs.

8 themes • Animals • Transport

• The body and hygiene • Food

• Clothes • The garden

• Around the house • School

15 cm

21 cm

21


Learning Language

S t a r t i n g

t o

T h i n k

a b o u t

L a n g u a g e

4 YEARS +

2-8 CHILDREN

Lexico The cards in the family are shown at the top

The cards in the family are broken down into 4 parts

Game 1: Eight 6-card families depicting families of objects (clothing, kitchen utensils, bathroom items, chairs, DIY tools, school materials, dishes, first aid).

Game 2: Twelve 4-card families depict an object or an animal broken down into 4 parts (house, turtle, bicycle, computer, shoe, boat, flower, anorak, elephant, cockerel, piece of furniture, face).

These two 48-card “Happy Families” games develop language skills by building children’s active vocabulary. • L/W card: 12 x 8 cm. • The box contains: 2 packs of 48 playing cards. 313 309 337 236 9

"I would like the card with the dog under the table"

5 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

The Word Family Game This variant of the 7 families game helps children construct their first simple phrases. To collect the 6 cards indicated on the instruction panel, the child must ask for the cards with a precision that will help construct simple phrases. The box contains: • 36 playing cards with colour illustrations (12 x 8 cm). • 18 instruction panels. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 18 instruction panels

978 209 337 176 2

How to use the Questions-Answers Set?

60 magnetic answer counters

Activity 1: discovering the material, associating, making links. Activity 2: the teacher asks a question, the child answers.

12 pink question boards

"What colour is the lemon?" "The lemon is yellow." MAGNETIC 5 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN PIECES

12 green association boards

Questions-Answers Set This workshop has been designed to create two main types of situations: learning situations and game-playing situations. The learning situations place children in activities that involve observation and reasoning based on the association of images, and in activities that involve oral language and communication. The game-playing situations help children consolidate skills and develop self-sufficiency when they play alone.

22

The box contains: • 12 green question boards: each has five photographs printed in a column on the left. Each photo prompts a question. • 60 magnetic answer counters to indicate the answers. These counters are to be placed in the empty boxes on the right-hand side of the green boards. • 12 pink question boards: each has the same photographs and a question mark. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 375 120 1

Activity 3: one child asks a question, another child answers.

"What animal produces wool?" "The sheep produces wool."


NEW

3 YEARS +

Discovering Writing

Preparing to Learn to Write

Graphic Stencils - Capital Letters This wooden kit allows children to work on recognising the 26 letters by touch from the space. A mark at the bottom-right of the square indicates the direction of the letter. Vowels are in red and consonants in blue. The letters are put away vertically in the case.

Pencils - Set of 8

• In varnished wood. • L/W/D letter: 7.4 x 7.4 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 211 6

• In varnished wood. • L/Ø: 8 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 212 3

These 8 pencils provide a complementary approach to recognition of the letters alongside touch.

Tracing Stencils • An original way to practise tracing the basic shapes used in writing. • The child follows each stencil route without lifting the pencil and takes into account the direction of the writing. • The child progressively gains familiarity, fluidity and control of their movements. • An adult can correct a position, how the pencil is being held and the direction of tracing. The pencil stores away in the base

Start on the left

Diagonals • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 35 x 10 x 1.5 cm. • L/Ø pencil: 8 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 204 8

Bridges

Crenels

• In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 35 x 10 x 1.5 cm. • L/Ø pencil: 8 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 207 9

• In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 35 x 10 x 1.5 cm. • L/Ø pencil: 8 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 206 2

Loops

Waves

• In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 35 x 10 x 1.5 cm. • L/Ø pencil: 8 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 208 6

• In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 35 x 10 x 1.5 cm. • L/Ø pencil: 8 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 205 5

23


Discovering Writing

Indication of the starting point and tracing direction

Repeat tracing without instructions

4 YEARS +

Fingertip Letters

Indication of the starting point and tracing direction

Nathalie Lepouder

Clever, practical equipment specially designed to encourage children to memorise writing strokes and recognise the different letters of the alphabet. Used as an activity support, a directory and a memory aid, Fingertip Letters can be used on its own or as an added extra, whatever the educational approach.

Fingertip Numbers

Fingertip Letters - Cursive Letters

Nathalie Lepouder

The child traces the shape of numbers 0 to 9 individually, with the same rigour as that applied to letters. The child can follow the numerical order, name the previous or next number and also look for a number dictated by the teacher. The non-tear pages are bound with a ring to allow easy storage and to allow "log books" to be added for free access classes.

• 54 pages of non-tear paper, bound using a plastic ring (Ø: 10 cm). • Set of 2. 313 309 379 095 8

• 11 pages of non-tear paper (10 x 7.5 cm), bound with a plastic ring. • Set of 4. 313 309 342 260 6

Fingertip Letters Capital Letters • 54 pages of non-tear paper, bound using a plastic ring (Ø: 10 cm). • Set of 2. 313 309 379 096 5

30 progressive activity cards

4 YEARS +

Graphics Training Activity Cards Marie Sirica Routtierr

This set comes with 5 sets of 6 cards of varying difficulty, providing children with the opportunity to practise with the graphical areas, lines and shapes necessary for writing. It is very important that children become familiar and accustomed to graphical drawing in order to encourage pleasure in writing. The illustrations provide situations where characters are motivated towards a goal. Then shapes are presented out of context. Tracing development: slanting lines, long straight lines, straight lines, large line spacing, letter writing shapes. • 30 cards (30 x 20.5 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 217 0

Erasable transparent plastic slates for coloured pencils and water-based felt-tip markers. Lines can be erased using an eraser or damp cloth. • L/W slate: 30 x 21 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 305 105 9

Whiteboard Markers • L.: 12 cm; Ø tip: 4.5 mm. • Set of 8.

24

Graphic Slates

313 309 351 810 1

Fine Board Markers • 8 assorted colours. • L: 14 cm; Ø tip: 3 mm. • Set of 8. 313 309 387 102 2


t o

L e a r n

t o

W r i t e

3 YEARS +

Alphabet Magnatab

MAGNETIC

2 YEARS + PIECES

Unusual lightweight play tablet for learning to recognise and trace the letters of the alphabet. Children use the magnetic pen and their own writing movements to make the metal balls appear. They can erase their writing and make the balls disappear with a touch.

Magnetic Erasable Whiteboards Whiteboards that can be written on and/or have magnetic items put on them. For everyday classroom activities. For use with felt tip pens that are erasable with water.

• Plastic and metal. • L/W/thickness of tablet: 29.2 x 23.5 x 1.3 cm. • L of pen: 10 cm. 313 309 342 285 9

• Plastic and metal. • L/W: 33 x 24 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 375 149 2

A

Discovering Writing

P r e p a r i n g

B

C A

Extra Letters

Extra letters to snap onto the sticks. 160 plastic letters (63 capital letters, 94 lower-case printed letters with and without accents, 3 blank letter tiles). • L/W/H letter counter: 3.5 x 3.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 379 090 3

MAGNETIC

4 YEARS + PIECES

Magnetic Cursive Letters 174 magnetic cursive letter tokens based on a frequency scale.

B

Uppercase Letters

63 capital letters.

• H: 6 cm. 313 309 388 066 6

313 309 379 094 1

C

Extra Grids

• Set of 8. 313 309 343 118 9

MAGNETIC

PIECES

Magnetic Board and Letters 2 lined magnetic cardboard boards and 2 magnetic cardboard boards for sorting letters; 89 magnetic cardboard letters. • L/W board: 33 x 11.5 cm. • L/W letter: 2.8 x 1.7 cm. 313 309 379 089 7

Front and back of stickers

Alphabet Simplis 5 series of 60 pre-cut letters in strong cardboard. On the front: writing in typewritten lowercase letters; on the back: cursive writing. • Letter L/W: 4.5 x 2.5 cm. • Set of 300. 313 309 336 066 3

Capital Letter Stamps Writing Aid This soft plastic writing aid fits over the pencil to help children learn or improve finger positioning. 5 colours. • Set of 15. 313 309 342 058 9

26 stamps of the 26 capital letters of the alphabet. A large colourful knob makes letters easy to handle. Not suitable for children under 36 months. • Av. H. of stamped letter: 5 cm. • Set of 26. 313 309 385 018 8

25


Discovering Maths

First Look at Numbers First Numbers Set • Specially designed to introduce toddlers to numbers 1 to 5.

MAGNETIC 2 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN PIECES

First Numbers Set André Jacquart

Specially designed to introduce toddlers to numbers 1-5. The boards and magnetic counters are used for activities based on counting, sorting, sequencing and making collections. The magnetic pieces, attractive illustrations and easyto-use counters encourage young children to play with the workshop. The 18 double-sided activity boards are organised into 6 sets. The first ones deal with numbers 1 to 3 and then 1 to 5. Each board is designed to make a collection of a given amount. The box contains: • 18 magnetic game boards measuring 36 x 18 cm. • 72 large-size magnetic wooden counters: 4.5 x 4.5 cm (12 dogs, 12 frogs, 12 sheep, 12 rabbits, 12 mice, 12 cows). • 1 teacher’s leaflet with 7 cards that can be photocopied. 313 309 388 409 1

18 double-sided activity boards

72 counters

illustrations

Teacher’s leaflet To make a collection of a given amount.

The teacher’s leaflet includes 7 cards that can be photocopied

dots on a dice Sets 1, 2 and 3: numbers 1 to 3.

First Numbers Set – Additional Counters

26

• Format: 4.5 x 4.5 cm. • 72 counters. 313 309 388 410 7

a written digit

Sets 4, 5 and 6: numbers 1 to 5.


Discovering Maths

5 YEARS +

3-6 CHILDREN

Number Box Set J.-L. Brégeon

Self-correcting material that leads children to handle counters to answer numerical questions and introduce them to making calculations. Each child has one instruction card and one or two number boxes, depending on the activity. They should follow the instructions given on the card by placing counters in the boxes.

Teacher’s leaflet Number boxes How to use them? • 6 boxes including 10 compartments each (representing tens). • Counters are placed on one of the cells, completing column-by-column (from top to bottom and left to right). • 2 colour counters to work with complements of 10, numbers over 10 and addition. 6 plastic boxes

• Presents objectives, the procedure and the progression of the cards. • Describes the activities to be performed for each set of cards and gives recommendations for tackling the following concepts: - tens (role and breakdown into the number 10 + n), - complements of 10, - addition and subtraction of two numbers, - odd and even numbers.

The box contains: • 48 instruction cards (L/W: 23 x 13.7 cm). • 5 answer cards. • 6 plastic Number Boxes (L/W: 23 x 11.6 cm). • 60 red tokens, 60 blue tokens (Ø: 3 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 407 7

POINT Self-correction material for concrete representation of units of ten.

60 blue tokens

60 red tokens

The boxes can be clipped together for numbers over 10.

Instruction cards 48 instruction cards divided into 5 sets of progressive difficulty of different colours. Pink series: associating numbers up to 10

Red series: subtraction

Blue series: numerical components of 10

Orange series: associating numbers over 10

Green series: adding numbers, using doubles

Extra Number Boxes

Answer sheets

6 boxes with 10 squares each. 60 red tokens and 60 blue tokens.

The required layout and corresponding entries are given on the 5 self-correction sheets.

313 309 388 408 4

27


Discovering Maths

Counting Box Sets 2 plastic counting boxes 43 round plastic counters

36 instruction cards

A

40 wooden animal counters

3 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Counting Box Set 1 André Jacquart

Teacher’s leaflets

A workshop to set up basic numerical activities from 1 to 5. By playing with wooden animals (figurative objects) and counters (symbols), children learn to count, make collections and recognise the numbers 1 to 5. The Set can be used for children to work in pairs. Each child has a counting box containing an instruction card. With the use of the corresponding counters, they have to fill the boxes following each instruction. The pictures on the 36 instruction cards represent a reference collection (animals), dots on a dice or a written number. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

• Present objectives, procedure and progression of the instruction cards. • The 7 or 8 photocopy sheets in the teacher’s leaflet extend the activities performed with this equipment and enable individual skills assessment. Work is done by reproduction using the printed and cutout elements provided in each appendix.

Teacher’s leaflets include 7 or 8 cards that can be printed out.

The box contains: • 36 instruction cards in 6 sets (L/W: 25.5 x 8.5 cm). • 2 plastic counting boxes (L/W: 27 x 12 cm). • 40 wooden counters (15 elephants, 5 penguins, 5 tigers, 15 bear cubs). • 43 round plastic counters. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD. 313 309 388 417 6

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

A B

+

This material adds to the Counting Boxes Set 1 and enables an additional two children to join in. • 2 plastic counting boxes (L/W: 27 x 12 cm). • 18 wooden counters (5 elephants, 4 penguins, 4 tigers, 5 bear cubs). • 35 round plastic counters. 313 309 388 418 3

28

1x

1x

2 Child Extension Pack

1x

A

+

B

2x

B


L o o k

a t

N u m b e r s 38 card counters

A 65 round plastic counters

4 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Counting Box Set 2 André Jacquart

Children discover numbers 1 to 10 through handling dots on a dice counters, number counters and counters whose quantity is represented by visual elements. The Set can be used for children to work in pairs. Each child has a counting box containing an instruction card. With the use of the corresponding counters, they have to fill the boxes following each of the 5 instructions given on the card. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

The box contains: • 24 instruction cards organised into 4 sets of 6 cards (L/W: 25.5 x 8.5 cm). • 2 plastic counting boxes (L/W: 27 x 12 cm). • 38 cardboard counters (5.5 x 4.5 cm). • 65 round plastic counters. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD. 313 309 388 415 2

B

2 Child Extension Pack

This material adds to the Counting Box Set 2 and enables an additional two children to join in.

24 instruction cards

2 plastic counting boxes

Discovering Maths

F i r s t

6 CHILDREN

1x A

+

1x

+

B

1x

A

B

2x

• 2 plastic counting boxes (L/W: 27 x 12 cm). • 30 round plastic counters. 313 309 388 416 9

A 40 card counters

5 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Counting Box Set 3 André Jacquart 2 plastic counting boxes

Similar to the Counting Box Set 2, this workshop helps develop counting skills for numbers 8 to 25. The Set can be used for children to work in pairs. Each child has a counting box containing an instruction card. With the use of the corresponding counters, they have to fill the boxes following each of the 5 instructions given on the card. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

24 instruction cards

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

The box contains: • 24 instruction cards organised into 4 sets of 6 cards (L/W: 25.5 x 8.5 cm). • 2 plastic counting boxes (L/W: 27 x 12 cm). • 40 cardboard counters (5.5 x 4.5 cm). • 150 round plastic counters. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD. 313 309 388 419 0

B

150 round plastic counters

6 CHILDREN

1x A

+

1x

+

B

A

B

2 Child Extension Pack

This material adds to the Counting Box Set 3 and enables an additional two children to join in. • 2 plastic counting boxes (L/W: 27 x 12 cm). • 50 round plastic counters. 313 309 388 420 6

1x

2x 29


Discovering Maths

The Zigomaths

MAGNETIC 4 YEARS + PIECES

The Zigomaths André Jacquart

Specially designed for carrying out directed activities, this highly comprehensive, fully magnetic set allows children to work on all numeracy skills. The Zigomaths are characters that work with and motivate children while they are learning. Easy to use and handle material, teachers can introduce a range of situations for each skillset being taught, from easy to more complex ones, and the equipment can be adapted to the progress made by the children. The box contains: • 3 double-sided magnetic boards (i.e. 6 sides) - 50 x 35 cm. • 104 magnetic Zigomaths counters distributed as follows: - 62 Zigomaths counters x 1 character (4 x 2.7 cm); - 30 Zigomaths counters x 2 characters (5.4 x 4 cm); - 12 Zigomaths counters x 5 characters (13.5 x 4 cm); - 31 magnetic numbered writing counters (6 x 6 cm), - 20 magnetic constellation counters (6 x 6 cm), - 20 magnetic quantities counters (6 x 6 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet.

Magnetic counters

175 PIECES

62 Zigomaths counters (x 1 character)

313 309 388 050 5

Teacher’s leaflet An essential addition, it shows the procedure and the goals; it gives specific examples of situations to give to children for each skillset.

Illustrated world boards 5 illustrated worlds on 3 double-sided boards (i.e. 6 sides). Each board shows one or two work spaces.

30 Zigomaths counters (x 2 characters) 31 writing counters numbered 1 to 31

12 Zigomaths counters (x 5 characters) 20 constellation counters from 1 to 6

20 quantities counters from 1 to 5

Instruction space

50 cm

35 cm

Blank space for free usage

• One instruction space and a workspace to build up a collection.

• Two workspaces to compare or build up a collection from a reference collection.

POINTS • Large format supports for group activities. • All numerical skills. • A very flexible tool that can be adapted to the pace of each group.

30

• A single workspace to count, build up a collection and solve operations problems.


L o o k

a t

N u m b e r s

NEW

Zigomaths Sets André Jacquart

2 sets for learning about how numbers are assembled and broken down. Children have to assemble collections using the Zigomaths counters. They encounter numbers in the different ways they are represented: representative collection, fingers, quantity, dots, written figures. The Set can be used for children to work in pairs. For 2,4 to 6 extra children, just get 1, 2 or 3 Extension Packs.

25.5 cm

21.7 cm

2 metal boards

Discovering Maths

F i r s t

24 activity sheets

20.5 cm

Counters for assembling collections Quantity asked for

Assembly area 25 cm

2.7 cm

Magnetic counters

1.8 cm 6 or 8 counters with 1 Zigomath

4 YEARS +

6 or 8 counters with 2 Zigomaths

2 or 4 counters with 5 Zigomaths

5 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

2 CHILDREN

MAGNETIC

MAGNETIC

PIECES

PIECES

Zigomaths Set 1

Zigomaths Set 2

The numbers 3 to 6: assembling and breaking down quantities.

The numbers 7 to 12: assembling and breaking down quantities

The box contains: • 24 activity sheets split into 6 sets of 4 sheets (25 x 20.5 cm). • 2 metal boards (25.5 x 21.7 cm). • 14 magnetic counters (side: 2.7 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 072 7

The box contains: • 36 activity sheets split into 6 sets of 6 sheets (25 x 20.5 cm). • 2 metal boards (25.5 x 21.7 cm). • 20 magnetic counters (side: 2.7 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 074 1

2 Child Extension Pack

2 Child Extension Pack

This material adds to Zigomaths Set 1 and enables an additional 2 children to join in.

This material adds to Zigomaths Set 2 and enables an additional 2 children to join in.

• 2 metal boards (25.5 x 21.7 cm). • 14 magnetic counters: 6 counters with 1 Zigomath, 6 counters with 2 Zigomaths, 2 counters with 5 Zigomaths. 313 309 388 073 4

• 2 metal boards (25.5 x 21.7 cm). • 20 magnetic counters: 8 counters with 1 Zigomath, 8 counters with 2 Zigomaths, 4 counters with 5 Zigomaths. 313 309 388 075 8

31


Discovering Maths

Counting Games • Children practise counting as they play simple familiar games. • Features different difficulty levels.

MAGNETIC

3 YEARS + PIECES

POINT

Magnetic Number Line

• Progressive construction of the line 5 by 5. • Display as a frieze or a table.

A group toy for children to handle to help them learn the set of numbers from 0 to 31 and carry out daily number-based activities: calendar, counting those present, counting out loud, etc. Children progressively learn to: • memorise the set of numbers; • locate the numbers in relation to each other; • associate the name of numbers with how they are written in digits; • recognise different representations of the number (written digits, fingers, combinations, collections, dominos, dot cards); • count and compare quantities. Depending on the point in the year, the level of the children or the activity carried out, the teacher can decide to display all or part of the line. 2 detachable cards, "0" and "31"

The box contains: • 8 wall elements: 6 wall strips and 2 detachable number cards, "0" and "31". • 31 magnetic label holders. • 132 labels: 31 number labels; 15 finger labels; 10 combination labels; 25 collection labels; 20 domino labels; 31 dot card labels. • 1 magnetic cover to hide the 0. • 3 magnetic arrows. • 1 teacher's leaflet. • Total L/W Line: 288 x 17 cm. • 96 number labels (capitals, cursive, printed) to download. 313 309 388 067 3 3 magnetic arrows for awareness activities: date, number present/absent

6 strips of 5 numbers

45 cm

1 magnetic cover to hide the 0

132 cardboard labels and 31 magnetic label holders

MAGNETIC

PIECES

SEE ALSO Attendance Board

Magnetic Label Holders p. 60

20 label holders to customise for the activities carried out with the children. • 20 magnetic label holders. • L/W: 8 x 5 cm. 313 309 379 069 9

POINT 5 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

• 4 sets of boards of varying difficulty. • Learn to recognise and name numbers between 1 and 30.

Bingo For 6 players. This traditional game has been adapted for young children. The counters are numbered 1 to 30. Six children can play together by choosing a board, each in a colour corresponding to a level of difficulty. The child leading the game pulls a counter out of the bag.The first child to fill his or her board wins! • L/W board: 26.5 x 11 cm. • Ø/D counter: 2.5 x 0.5 cm. • The box contains: 24 cardboard game boards (4 sets of 6 boards), 60 wooden counters numbered from 1 to 30 (there are 2 counters for each number), 1 fabric bag and 1 set of rules.

32

313 309 336 000 7

20 magnetic label holders


3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

L o o k

a t

N u m b e r s

MAGNETIC

PIECES

1, 2, 3 - I Can Count Basic and fun-to-use playing materials for learning to count up to 6. Each child completes his or her game board using coloured counters following instructions on the dice (spots and colours).

4 magnetic game boards 2 dice 84 magnetic counters

• L/W board: 33 x 23 cm. • Ø counter: 3.3 cm. • Dice side: 2.5 cm. • The box contains: 4 magnetic game boards, 84 coloured magnetic counters, 2 wooden dice (with colours and spots) and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 310 0

4 YEARS +

Discovering Maths

F i r s t

2-8 CHILDREN

1, 2, 3 - Happy Families Games These two 50-card Happy Families games can be used by children to learn and practise the numbers from 1 to 10. Game 1 has ten 5-card families: on each card a number from 1 to 10 is shown in one of five different ways (objects, dots, counting cubes, fingers or numbers). Game 2 has five 10-card families: on each card there is a collection of 1 to 10 objects (penguins, robots, flowers, fruit or elephants). A number strip on each card helps children make connections. • L/W card: 12 x 8 cm. • The box contains: 2 packs of 50 playing cards. 313 309 337 234 5

Reminder of the different representations of the same number on each card

Number bar on each card

Game 1: has ten 5-card families: on each card a number from 1 to 10 is shown in one of five different ways (objects, dots, counting cubes, fingers or numbers).

Game 2: has five 10-card families: on each card there is a collection of 1 to 10 objects (penguins, robots, flowers, fruit or elephants). A number bar on each card helps children make connections.

50

50

CARDS

CARDS

SEE ALSO Quantissimo

p. 84 Sample family: 3

Sample family: fruits

18 activity cards to insert in the grids

5 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Quadriludi Table - Numbers André Jacquart

Activities relating to numbering can be performed based around different depictions of numbers (dots, fingers of the hand or structured representation: flowers). The situations deal with the numbers 1 to 10. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs.

2 grid holders

The box contains: • 18 activity boards split into 3 sets (L/W: 24.5 x 23 cm). • 2 plastic support grids (grid side: 26 cm). • 96 strong card counters (side: 4 cm). • 6 plastic bags for storing counters. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD (includes 8 cards that can be printed out). 313 309 342 225 5

2 Child Extension Pack • 2 plastic support grids. • L/W: 25 x 23 cm. 313 309 342 199 9

Each set is identified by a coloured tab

96 card counters for positioning in grids

33


Discovering Maths

Discovering Shapes, Sizes and Colours • • • •

Recognising basic shapes: circle, square, triangle. Selecting a part of a whole based on its colour and shape. Sorting, classifying and storing away based on shape, colour, order and number of pieces. Stating simple, repetitive algorithms.

Classification Sets

50 illustrated card counters

2 boxes

34 instruction cards

A

Teacher’s leaflet

2 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Presents the objectives, equipment and instructions for use: free use, in a directed workshop or work alone. Presents ideas for activities, games and extensions to activities.

Sorting Set A logic workshop designed for first steps in sorting and term-for-term matching. The 34 activity cards are divided into 5 sets. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. Once they have moved the card to the box slot, the child rebuilds models by putting the counters matching the instruction into the right box. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 34 activity boards split into 5 sets (L/W: 25.5 x 8.5 cm). • 50 illustrated card counters (Counter L/W: 5.5 x 4.5 cm). • 2 plastic sorting boxes (L/W: 27 x 12 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 305 171 4

Build your set 6 CHILDREN

4 CHILDREN A

A

1x

1x

B

+ 2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Sorting Workshop and enables an additional 2 children to join in. • Set of 2. 313 309 305 162 2

34

1x

+

B

2x

B


Discovering Maths

4 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Sorting Set - Animals A set for setting up sorting and classifying activities based on animals. By looking at and handling illustrated tokens, children learn to recognise different animals, identify their shared characteristics and group them by their family. They learn to: • Exercise their visual discrimination skills; • Classify animals based on given categories (parts of the body, methods of locomotion, number of legs, physical appearance); • Acquire a specific descriptive vocabulary. The box contains: • 20 activity sheets divided into 5 sets of 4 sheets (25.5 x 8.5 cm). • 50 illustrated cardboard tokens (5.5 x 4.5 cm). • 4 plastic sorting trays (27 x 12 cm). • 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 305 180 6

Handling materials Each child has a sorting tray into which an activity sheet is placed. They must complete each compartment in the tray according to the classification scheme on the sheet by placing one token in each compartment. They are encouraged to explain their choices.

4 sorting trays

50 animal tokens

20 activity sheets

Activity sheets The 20 activity sheets are structured in 5 sets of 4 sheets. Each sheet has a classification scheme illustrated with pictograms.

Animal tokens The 50 tokens form an excellent basis for learning to name and describe animals.

• Blue set: identify parts of the body (tail, feet, fins, horns, beak).

• Yellow set: recognise methods of locomotion (swimming, jumping, crawling, running, flying).

• Pink set: recognise the physical appearance (fur and tail, scales, feathers, etc.).

• Green set: identify and count the number of feet.

• Orange set: identify parts of the body based on two characteristics (scales and no feet, 2 wings and 2 feet, etc.).

35


Discovering Maths

2 abacuses with 5 rods

A

3 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

24 model sheets

Abacus Set 1

100 beads (5 shapes in 5 colours)

Equipment for use in multiple combinations to create sorting, logic and also counting activities. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. By handling the equipment, children experiment with different ways to organise information. Using an abacus, the aim is to reproduce the arrangement of beads shown on 24 model cards of gradually increasing difficulty, distributed on 4 sets of 6 cards (sort by colour and/ or shape). For 4 to 8 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

Teacher’s leaflet • Presents objectives, procedure and progression of the activities. • Presents ideas for extending activities (oral instructions, counting activities, more complex algorithms, etc.) and sheets to photocopy for individual assessment. • Each photocopy sheet assesses a specific skill. Children cut, glue, and perhaps colour the attached shapes.

The box contains: • 24 model cards. • 100 beads in 5 shapes and 5 colours. • 2 plastic abacuses. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD. • Abacus L/W/H: 26 x 8 x 12 cm; Bead Ø: 4 cm; Card L/W: 19 x 13 cm. 313 309 305 166 0

The teacher’s leaflet includes 9 cards that can be printed out.

Build your set 10 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

A B

1x

1x

+

4 Child Extension Pack

A

+

B

This material adds to the Abacus Set 1 and enables an additional 4 children to join in. • 4 plastic abacuses. • 47 plastic beads in 5 shapes and 5 colours. 313 309 305 167 7

1x

2x

26 cm

3 YEARS +

Sorting Abacus 2 large-scale abacuses comprising 5 pins onto which children slip beads in 10 shapes and 10 assorted colours. For introducing the basic concepts of sorting through manipulation. • L/W/H abacus: 26 x 8 x 12 cm; Ø bead: 4 cm. • The set includes: 2 five-pin abacuses in plastic, 100 beads in 10 shapes, 10 assorted colours and 1 teacher’s leaflet. • 2 abacuses and 100 beads. 313 309 305 119 6 2 abacuses

36

• 4 abacuses without beads. 313 309 305 139 4

The abacuses fit together to form a series of 10

100 sorting beads

B


Shapes,

Sizes

and

Colours

2 abacuses with 5 rods

Discovering Maths

Discovering

A

87 beads (10 shapes) in 10 colours

42 activity cards

4 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Abacus Set 2 Continuing on from the Abacus Set 1, this set offers sorting, logic and numeracy activities. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. By handling, children gradually experiment with increasingly complex ways of reading and organising information. 42 activity cards of increasing difficulty, distributed in 7 sets of 6. For 4 to 8 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 42 activity cards. • 2 plastic abacuses. • 87 beads in 10 shapes and 10 colours. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD. • Abacus L/W/H: 26 x 8 x 12 cm; Bead Ø: 4 cm; Card L/W: 24.5 x 3 cm. 313 309 305 172 1

Build your set 6 CHILDREN

10 CHILDREN

A B

1x

A

1x

+

+

B

B

4 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Abacus Set 2 and enables an additional 4 children to join in. • 4 plastic abacuses. • 54 beads in 10 shapes and 10 colours. 313 309 305 173 8

1x

2x

3 YEARS + 2 YEARS +

Sorting Beads

Sorting Beads for Young Children

100 beads in 10 colours and 10 different shapes.

100 beads in 10 colours and 5 shapes.

• Ø bead: 4 cm. 313 309 305 121 9

313 309 305 007 6

37


Discovering Maths

2 sticks

A

36 pieces

3 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

30 activity cards

Logicoloredo Logic activities for introducing children to basic concepts of rhythm and algorithm. Children snap play pieces of 3 shapes and 4 different colours onto a transparent 6 stud stick, following the model card instructions. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. The sticks clip onto one another to make more complex rhythms. For 4 to 8 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

Teacher’s leaflet

The box contains: • 30 activity cards. • 2 transparent plastic sticks with 6 studs. • 36 plastic counters: 3 shapes, 4 colours. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. • Activity card L/W: 23 x 4 cm; Stick L/W: 23 x 4 cm; Round counter Ø: 3.3 cm. 313 309 343 130 1

• Presents objectives, procedure and progression of the activity cards. • The 7 photocopy sheets in the teacher’s leaflet extend the play activities and enable individual assessment.

Build your set 10 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

B

A

1x

1x

+

4 Child Extension Pack

A

+

B

B

This material adds to Logicoloredo and enables an additional 4 children to join in. • 4 transparent plastic sticks with 6 studs. • 12 plastic counters: 1 round in 4 colours; 4 square (3 red and 1 green); 4 triangles (3 green and 1 red). 313 309 343 131 8

1x

2x

3 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Ritmo These logic activities help children to select and order objects according to their shape, size and colour. The 24 activity cards propose 72 simple algorithm exercises (2 or 3 elements). An initial model is presented to start each exercise. The children then continue the algorithm by correctly positioning the corresponding counters. The activity cards are organised in 4 series of 6 cards of increasing difficulty.

38

• L/W activity card: 33 x 11.5 cm. • L/W counter: 3.2 x 3.2 cm. • The box contains: 24 cardboard activity cards, 320 illustrated counters in reinforced cardboard and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 343 123 3

24 cards of varying difficulty

72 simple algorithm exercises 320 illustrated counters


Shapes,

Sizes

and

Colours

32 plastic beads

3.5 cm 2 sticks with stopper to hold the beads and a handle for holding

Discovering Maths

Discovering

A

24 activity cards

2 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Set indicator

Mini-patterns and Maxi-beads Set Fun, attractive sets of beads also help with motor skills. Children learn to decipher and reproduce a model, then build it at their own pace. The cards can be reproduced flat or vertically: 2 directions for reading and rhythm analysis. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. For 4 to 8 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 24 activity cards. • 32 plastic beads: 4 shapes, 2 colours, in 4 copies (sphere, cube, cylinder, pyramid). • 2 sticks with 2 end pieces. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. • Stick L: 36 cm; Handle L: 5 cm; Card L/W: 34 x 6 cm. 313 309 388 054 3

Build your set 10 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

A

A

B

1x

1x

+

4 Child Extension Pack

+

B

B

This material adds to the Mini-patterns and Maxi-beads Set and enables an additional 4 children to join in. • 24 plastic beads: 4 shapes, 2 colours, in 4 copies (sphere, cube, cylinder, pyramid). • 4 sticks with 4 end pieces. 313 309 388 055 0

1x

2x 39


Discovering Maths

A

78 wood beads: 4 colours, 3 shapes, 2 sizes

4 wooden sticks in 2 lengths

4 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN 1.4 cm

In the same vein as the Mini-Patterns and MaxiBeads Set, this workshop teaches children to decipher, reproduce and compose more complex rhythms. The cards can be reproduced flat or vertically: 2 directions for reading and rhythm analysis. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. For 4 to 8 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

1.7 cm

Patterns and Beads Set

24 activity cards 78 wood beads

The box contains: • 24 activity cards. • 78 wood beads: 3 shapes (cube, cylinder, sphere), 4 colours, 2 sizes. • 4 wooden sticks. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. • Stick L: 18 /25 cm; Sphere and cylinder Ø: 17 /14 mm; cube sides: 17/14 mm. 313 309 343 135 6

Build your set 10 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

B

A

1x 4 Child Extension Pack

+

This material adds to the Patterns and Beads Set and enables an additional 4 children to join in. • 8 wooden sticks. • 33 wood beads: 3 shapes, 4 colours, 2 sizes. 313 309 343 136 3

40

1x

A

1x

+

B

2x

B


Shapes,

Sizes

and

Colours

Acromaths Sets and Activity Cards André Jacquart

• A comprehensive, fun collection for introducing early learning in mathematics from toddlers to older children. • The clown figures and colourful shapes create a motivating, appealing dimension for children. • The cards show the properties of shape, colour and size and encourage logical reasoning. The spatial location sheet also tackles the concepts of orientation and relative position of objects.

Discovering Maths

Discovering

Activity sheets The 24 activity sheets are structured in 6 sets of increasing difficulty. For the first 3 sets, children can use perforated strips positioned on the bases as an aide, indicating the colour of the pieces to placed on each platform.

A

2 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

First Acromaths Set This set trains pupils to move from overall visual recognition of elements to analysis of their spatial organisation. Children reproduce a model by fitting pieces onto a base with platforms. They learn to: • Identify and differentiate between colours and shapes; • Identify spatial organisations; • Identify alternates. The materials for handling The materials in the set are intended for 4 children to participate. To include 4 more children, simply add 1 extension pack of 24 clowns, 24 balance bases and 4 bases.

24 activity sheets of increasing difficulty

• 24 activity sheets divided into 6 sets of 4 sheets (L/W: 25.5 x 13 cm). • 24 clowns in 1 size and 4 colours (H: 3.9 cm). • 24 balance bases in 2 shapes and 4 colours (H: 2.7 cm; Ø: 3.3 cm). • 4 transparent plastic bases with 6 platforms (L/W/H: 23 x 4 x 1 cm). • 12 perforated strips to place on the bases (L/W: 22.4 x 3.6 cm). • 8 supports to keep the activity sheets upright. • 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 342 270 5

Clowns and balance bases 24 balance bases: 2 shapes and 4 colours 24 clowns: 1 size and 4 colours

12 perforated strips to place on the bases

Bases, strips and supports 4 bases

Build your set B

8 CHILDREN

4 Child Extension Pack

This pack supplements the First Acromaths Set with materials for 4 additional children. • 24 clowns in 1 size and 4 colours (H: 3.9 cm). • 24 balance bases in 2 shapes and 4 colours (H: 2.7 cm; Ø: 3.3 cm). • 4 transparent plastic bases with 6 platforms (L/W/H: 23 x 4 x 1 cm). 313 309 342 271 2

1x

A

1x

B

+ 41


Discovering Maths

24 problem cards

• Set 1: The "paths" of the properties The child rebuilds 4 stacks whose elements are provided on a path to be followed.

4 YEARS +

Acromaths Activity Cards - Shapes, Colours, Sizes • Differentiate objects according to colour, size or shape. • Identify the properties of an object. • Identify an object whose properties are provided. • Follow a given path and conduct logical reasoning. The pack contains: • 24 problem cards in 2 sets (21 x 29.7 cm). • 1 fabric bag to store the pieces that will be used. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD includes solution cards that can be printed out. 313 309 340 280 6

• Set 2: "Everything in place!" The child places 4 elements (single clown or stacked) in the correct place on each card, respecting the properties attributed to each part.

24 problem cards

5 YEARS +

Acromaths Activity Cards Spatial Awareness • • • •

• Set 1: The table of properties The child places either 4 clowns with different colours and sizes taking into account their orientation, that is, he rebuilds 4 stacks whose elements and relative positions are given.

Differentiate objects according to colour, size or shape. Identify the orientation of an object (front, back). Identify the relative position of the objects (above, below, between). Read a table of properties and conduct logical reasoning.

The pack contains: • 24 problem cards in 2 sets (21 x 29.7 cm). • 1 fabric bag to store the pieces that will be used. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD with solution cards that can be printed out. 313 309 340 281 3

• Set 2: "Everything in place!" The child places 4 elements (single clown or stacked) in the correct place on each card, respecting the properties attributed to each part.

Supplement required for the Activity Cards Acromaths Material 24 white plastic parts for use with Acromaths Cards. This material enables 2 children to work on 2 problem cards, regardless of the cards. For 2, 4, 6 or 8 children, just get 1, 2, 3 or 4 additional cards.

42

• 8 clowns in 2 sizes and 2 colours (H: 5.4 and 3.9 cm; Ø: 3.3 cm). • 16 balance parts in 4 shapes and 2 colours (H: 2.7 cm; Ø: 3.3 cm). 313 309 342 259 0


Shapes,

Sizes

and

Colours

5 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Acromaths Set In non-directed workshops, children solve problems of spatial representation (alignment, stacks, grid positioning), patterns, logical and transformational organisation. The box contains: • 24 clowns of 2 sizes (H.: 5.5 cm and 4.4 cm) and 2 colours (red and green). • 48 stacking pieces in 4 shapes (H.: 2.2 cm) and 2 colours (yellow and blue). • 48 activity cards divided into 5 series of 6 cards and 1 series of 18 cards. • 8 answer cards for series 2, 5 and 6. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 119 7

Discovering Maths

Discovering

48 activity cards of varying difficulty organised into 6 series

Series 2: Recognise patterns and position objects on a grid

Series 3: Properties tables

Series 4: Flow charts

Series 5: Transformation

Teacher’s leaflet • Presents the objectives, the progression of activities and the instruction cards. • The 7 photocopy sheets in the teacher’s leaflet extend the activities performed with this equipment and enable individual skill assessment.

Series 6: Identifying series

48 stacking pieces in 4 shapes and 2 colours

24 clowns in 2 sizes and 2 colours

43


Discovering Maths

3 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Logical Identification 1 M. Touyarot and M.-L. Vieil

Sorting tables for extra observation and logical association games. Each child completes their sheet using counters, using their own reasoning. Participants in the same workshop can confer, ask questions, swap counters, etc. • L/W board: 21 x 15.5 / 31 x 21 / 31 x 10.5 cm. • L/W counter: 4 x 4 cm. • The box contains: 24 illustrated activity boards in cardboard, 116 cardboard counters representing 4 sets of different animals and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 343 121 9

24 illustrated activity sheets (4 sets of increasing difficulty).

Children sort the counters into identical sets

116 counters (4 different animals per set)

Game material 24 activity sheets of increasing difficulty organised into 4 sets. Set 1: Line reading • 1 criterion: colour (uniform or two-tone)

Set 2: Line reading • 2 criteria: colour/size or colour/ accessory

Set 3: First tables • 1 subject and 1 criterion: colour

Set 4: Double entry tables • 1 subject and 1 criterion: size, colour or accessory

2 YEARS +

Logic Puzzles Puzzles based on the principle of the double entry table.

Logic Puzzle - Numbers Logic Puzzle - Sizes An introduction to the concept of size in the company of 3 Bears.

44

Introducing the concepts of the numbers from 1 to 5: digits, fingers, dots and collections.

• 12 pieces and a base of varnished wood. • Base L/W/thickness: 21 x 21 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 161 9

• 25 pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 23.5 x 23.5 x 0.7 cm.

Logic Puzzle - Spatial Recognition

Logic Puzzle - Geometric Shapes

An entertaining puzzle to introduce the basic concepts of spatial awareness: in front of/behind/on/under.

Introducing the concepts of geometric shapes: circle, square, triangle and rectangle.

• 16 pieces and a base of varnished wood. • Base L/W/thickness: 21 x 21 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 162 6

• 16 pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 21 x 21 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 169 5

313 309 387 170 1


Shapes,

Sizes

and

Colours

NEW 15 strips to place on the boards

15 boards On the front: fruits in sizes 1 to 3

2 YEARS +

1-8 CHILDREN

Front / Back

Discovering Maths

Discovering

On the back: 3 circles in equivalent sizes Children check their choice by turning over the strip

1, 2, 3 - Sizes Valérie Barry

10 fun activities for stimulating comparative logic and organising knowledge about living things. Children learn to recognise 5 different fruits, differentiate them by size, match them up and put them in order according to different criteria. Example activities: match a fruit with a shape of the same size, put 3 fruits in order (increasing/decreasing size), match different fruits of the same size, etc.

45 counters to place on the boards or strips

• L/W board: 22 x 15 cm. • L/W cardboard strip: 22 x 7.5 cm. • L counter: 6.5 cm. • The box contains: 15 board games each showing 3 circles in sizes 1 to 3, 15 double-sided cardboard strips (on the front: 3 fruits in sizes 1 to 3; on the back: 3 circles in equivalent sizes), 45 double-sided counters (on the front: 1 fruit; on the back: 1 circle in the equivalent size) and 1 teacher’s leaflet.

Doublesided On the front: 1 fruit

313 309 343 150 9

On the back: 1 circle in the equivalent size

18 activity cards to insert in the grids

5 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Quadriludi Table - Shapes André Jacquart Different activities are available based around the recognition of figurative and geometric shapes. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. The box contains : • 18 activity boards split into 3 sets (L/W: 24.5 x 23 cm). • 2 plastic support grids (grid side: 26 cm). • 96 strong card counters (side: 4 cm). • 6 plastic bags for storing counters. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD (includes 8 cards that can be printed out). 313 309 342 226 2

2 grid holders Each set is identified by a coloured tab

96 card counters for positioning in grids

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Quadriludi Tables Sets and enables an additional 2 children to join in. • 2 plastic support grids. • L/W: 25 x 23 cm. 313 309 342 199 9

45


Discovering Maths

3 YEARS +

4-8 CHILDREN

MAGNETIC

PIECES

Discovering Lengths André Jacquart

This workshop allows the idea of dimensions to be tackled by considering the height, length or size of a well-known animal. The child moves magnetic pieces around on illustrated boards to learn to: • compare lengths; • identify a given length; • sort up to 4 elements in order of increasing or decreasing size; • progressively use appropriate comparison vocabulary: "bigger, smaller, taller, longer...". • L/W board: 27 x 18 cm. The box contains: • 12 double-sided boards, i.e. 24 activity sheets grouped into 6 sets of 4 sheets. • 32 magnetic pieces: 8 animals (giraffe, frog, basset hound, caterpillar, fish, bird, cat, cow) in 4 sizes and 4 colours. • 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 342 266 8

Teacher's leaflet

The materials The 24 activity sheets are grouped into 6 sets of increasing difficulty. Children put magnetic pieces in the right place on their sheet so that the sizes match up. The spatial layout and the colour, where there is one, can be used to guide them. The workshop materials allow for 8 children to use the first 4 sets of sheets and 4 children to use the last 2 sets. For 4 extra children, just get 1 additional Animals Set.

Presents the objectives, the progression of activities and the grouping of sheets by difficulty level. Precisely describes the activities to be carried out at each stage: • unstructured discovery of the materials, • activities guided by the teacher, • collective activities then individual activities with the sheets.

12 double-sided activity boards

• Yellow and blue set: 1 animal in 4 sizes; 1 element identifiable by colour. • Green and pink set: 1 animal in 4 sizes; no colour element.

• Orange and purple set: 2 animals in 2 sizes; no colour element.

Discovering Lengths - Additional Animals 32 magnetic pieces: 8 animals (giraffe, frog, basset hound, caterpillar, fish, bird, cat, cow) in 4 sizes and 4 colours.

46

313 309 342 267 5

32 magnetic pieces: 8 animals in 4 sizes and 4 colours


Shapes,

Sizes

and

Colours

A

MAGNETIC

4 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN PIECES

Colour Lengths André Jacquart

A workshop devised for a first approach to the concepts of length and size. Through handling, children compare lengths and are encouraged to look for equivalences: • according to the length and colour of the sticks; • according to the number of blocks (becoming familiar with the concept of size); • according to order of arrangement. The proposed problem situations progressively encourage them to use more complex solving procedures. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. For 2 to 4 additional children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

Discovering Maths

Discovering

24 activity cards

The box contains: • 24 activity cards organised into 6 series of 4 cards (29 x 14 cm). • 2 metal holders (30 x 15 cm). • 100 magnetic sticks of different colours and different lengths (50 sticks with studs, 50 sticks without studs). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 261 3

2 metal holders

B

5 lengths, each one related to 1 colour

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to Colour Lengths and enables an additional two children to join in. • 2 metal holders (30 x 15 cm). • 100 colour magnetic sticks with different colours (50 sticks with studs, 50 sticks without studs). 313 309 342 262 0

50 sticks with studs

50 sticks without studs

Build your set Teacher's leaflet Presents objectives, activity progress and distribution of cards by level of difficulty. It accurately describes the activities for each step: - getting started with the material, - activities oriented by the teacher, - group and individual activities with cards.

SEE ALSO Sorting boxes

p. 48

4 CHILDREN A

1x

+ 1x

6 CHILDREN A

1x

+

B

B

2x 47


Discovering Maths

Counting, Sorting, Measuring

Multidice Game of dice, with dice in 2 sizes and 4 colours. The magnetic surface is suitable for use with washable markers or magnetic cards.

Large Multidice

Small Multidice

2 large dice in 2 colours.

6 dice in 3 colours.

• Side of cube: 12 cm. 313 309 342 187 6

• Side of cube: 5 cm. 313 309 342 188 3

Dice

Maxi Dice

Euro Coins

Assortment of 4 colour dice, 4 number dice, 4 spot dice, 4 ten-sided dice and 4 blank dice ready for marking.

Assortment of large dice including 2 number dice, 2 spot dice, 2 colour dice and 4 blank dice ready for marking.

An assortment of realistic, high-quality Euro coins to help familiarise children with the European currency

• Edge: 1.8 cm. • Set of 20. 313 309 342 039 8

• Edge: 2.5 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 342 036 7

• 200 plastic coins: 2 euros, 1 euro, 50 cents, 20 cents, 10 cents, 5 cents, 2 cents and 1 cent. 313 309 350 000 7

Slide cubes

Base 10

200 stackable cubes in 10 assorted colours.

Made of a flexible plastic, sets of cubes in 10 colours to stack.

Handling material to discover the decimal number system and the relationship between units, tens and hundreds up to 1000.

• Edge of cube: 2 cm. • Set of 200. 313 309 333 306 3

• Dice side: 1.8 cm. • Packet of 100. 313 309 342 035 0

• Each box contains: 100 cubes, 10 sticks, 10 panels and 1 block. 313 309 342 161 6

• Set of 2. 313 309 305 162 2

Large Transparent Blue Plastic Tokens

Plastic Tokens

• Set of 8. 313 309 305 118 9

• Ø: 3.5 cm. • Set of 200. 313 309 330 128 4

• Ø: 3.5 cm. • Set of 200. 313 309 330 127 7

Multicubes

Sorting Boxes Boxes with 5 compartments and one groove for holding instruction cards. • L/W box: 27 x 12 cm.

48

200 tokens in 4 colours.


10 transparent pockets with a zip closure for decoration with felt-tip pens or stickers. Can also be used to store pencils, beads, game pieces, etc.

Sorting Bears 108 fruits in soft plastic: 6 shapes, 6 colours.

Made of hard plastic in 3 different sizes (24 large, 24 medium and 48 small models) and 6 colours.

• Transparent flexible plastic. • L/W: 25 x 15 cm. 313 309 304 995 7

• L. banana: 6 cm / Ø orange: 2.3 cm. • Set of 108. 313 309 388 375 9

• L.: 3.5/3/2.5 cm. • Set of 96. 313 309 379 061 3

Sorting Animals

Sorting Vehicles

Connecting People

Made of soft plastic in 2 different sizes, 6 assorted shapes and 6 colours.

Made of soft plastic in 6 assorted shapes and 6 colours.

Made of hard plastic in 3 sizes, both sexes and 4 colours.

• L.: 4.5/4/3.5 cm. • Set of 72. 313 309 388 325 4

• L.: 5/4.5/3.5 cm. • Set of 108. 313 309 388 324 7

• H.: 5.2/4.5/3.5 cm. • Set of 96. 313 309 379 050 7

Fruit Counters

Discovering Maths

Zippered Pockets Set of 10

Simple Scales Counting Animals

Magnetic Storage Pocket

60 large wooden animals: 15 elephants, 15 tigers, 15 bears and 15 penguins.

Pocket is attached to a metal surface and used to store small items. In transparent plastic with a gusset for easy access.

• H: 4 cm. • Set of 60. 313 309 388 406 0

• Magnetic pocket in transparent plastic. • L/W: 24 x 20 cm. 313 309 388 064 2

These easy-to-use scales illustrate the concept of balance using 5 to 200 g weights. The pans can also hold up to 1 litre of liquid. • H/W: 29 x 39 cm. • 1 pair of scales. • Five 5-gram weights. • Five 10-gram weights. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 156 2

NEW

Weight Balls - Set of 3 Measuring Cups 3 very strong transparent plastic receptacles with handle and pourer. Scale of 250, 500 and 1000 ml to introduce the concept of volume via practical handling. • H.: 14/11/9 cm; Ø: 12/10/8 cm. 313 309 305 178 3

Abacus Wooden abacus made up of 10 rods and 100 beads in 2 colours for easy visualisation. • L/W: 21 x 17 cm; Base L: 5.5 cm. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 305 078 6

Weighted balls for comparing different weights and encouraging fine motor skills. Texture pleasant to the touch and easy to grip. • Soft, thick red plastic. • Supplied inflated. • Ø: 6.5 cm; weight: 30, 50 and 70 g. 313 309 380 074 9

49


Discovering Maths

Spatial Awareness 24 model sheets

A

2 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

Toporama Michel and Marie-Hélène Chevillon

This equipment provides the first steps to learning how to structure in three-dimensional spaces, such as relevant positioning (in front, behind, next to, etc.) or different planes. The pieces are figurative in order to increase children’s motivation. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

14 figurines

2 grooved wooden supports

6 transparent bases

Teacher’s leaflet Presents the objectives, equipment and possible usages: - without the cards, for freely discovering and handling the figurines: naming, sorting, experiencing the first notions of spatial organisation; - with the cards, in order to introduce progressively topological concepts and the associated vocabulary.

• Base L/W: 24 x 9 cm; Photo L/W: 19 x 13 cm; Figurines H: 12/10/7 cm. The box contains: • 24 model cards. • 14 wooden figurines (houses, trees, boys, girls, cats, chickens, fences). • 2 grooved wooden supports. • 6 transparent bases. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 863 9

Build your set 4 CHILDREN B

1x

A

+

2 Child Extension Pack

6 CHILDREN

1x

A

+

B

B

This material adds to Toporama and enables an additional two children to join in. • 11 wooden figurines (2 houses, 2 trees, 1 boy, 1 girl, 2 cats, 2 chickens, 1 fence). • 2 grooved wooden supports. 313 309 342 864 6

1x

NEW

2x

6 sets of 8 cards One concept and one question per set

3 YEARS +

Fingercards Spatial Awareness Hervé Le Madec

48 cards (6 series of 8 self-correction cards) for understanding the concept of: - Under/on top, - In front/behind, - Inside/outside. The box contains: • 48 double-sided cards (10 x 10 cm), • 5 divided inserts. • 1 teacher’s leaflet including 1 evaluation sheet. 313 309 388 070 3

50

Which one is inside?

Which one is in front?

Which one is on top?


2 large format lecterns with 1 magnetic face.

MAGNETIC 4 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN PIECES

Topoprimo Communication activities for acquiring and structuring spatial concepts through language. Example activities: • discovery: describing landscapes, identifying and naming characters, objects and animals; • memorisation: observing then describing, answering questions or solving riddles; • placing shapes: following verbal instructions, with an odd one out, missing piece, etc.

24 model sheets to put on the back of the lectern

4 landscape sheets to place on the lectern

Front/Back

The box contains: • 2 lecterns with 1 magnetic green face (33 x 23 cm). • 4 landscape sheets: an orchard, the countryside, a house, a beach (32.5 x 22.7 cm). • 16 magnetic shapes (4 per landscape): 4 characters, 3 objects, 9 animals. • 24 model sheets (21 x 18.5 cm). • 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 342 867 7

Discovering Maths

POINT

2 lecterns with 1 magnetic face

16 magnetic shapes

5 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Quadriludi Table Spatial Awareness

2 grid holders

André Jacquart Different activities are available based around recognition of spatial relationships. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. The box contains: • 18 activity boards split into 3 sets (L/W: 24.5 x 23 cm). • 2 plastic support grids (grid side: 26 cm). • 96 strong card counters (side: 4 cm). • 6 plastic bags for storing counters. • 1 teacher’s leaflet on CD (includes 8 cards that can be printed out). 313 309 342 224 8

18 activity cards to insert in the grids Each set is identified by a coloured tab.

96 card counters for positioning in grids

2 Child Extension Pack • 2 plastic support grids. • L/W: 25 x 23 cm. 313 309 342 199 9

51


Discovering Maths

10 wooden pieces

2 game boards 6 plastic bases

A 18 model sheets

2 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Topology Set 1 M. Cathala and D. Vanhove

Particularly suitable for young children, this equipment develops children’s observation and spatial awareness skills. It establishes the match between the threedimensional space and its representation in two dimensions. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. After studying the model card and identifying the relative position of the given elements, children reproduce the same configuration on the game board. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 18 model cards (L/W: 19 x 13 cm). • 10 painted wooden objects (2 dogs standing up, 2 dogs lying down, 2 red roofs, 2 kennels, 2 trees). • 2 game boards (L/W: 32 x 22 cm). • 6 plastic bases. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 231 6

B

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN A

1x

A

1x

+

+

B

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Topology Set 1 and enables an additional two children to join in. • 10 wooden pieces. • 2 game boards (L/W: 32 x 22 cm). 313 309 342 232 3

52

1x

2x

B


A w a r e n e s s 28 wooden pieces

Discovering Maths

S p a t i a l

A

2 game boards

18 model sheets

6 plastic bases

4 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Topology Set 2 M. Cathala and D. Vanhove

The Topology Set 2 develops observational and spatial awareness skills. Offering increasingly complex situations in which several spatial concepts come into play, it enables children to match these concepts in three-dimensional space with their two-dimensional representation. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. After studying the model card and identifying the relative position of the given elements, children reproduce the same configuration on the game board. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 18 model cards (L/W: 19 x 13 cm). • 28 painted wooden objects (8 fences, 4 yellow cube houses, 2 red roofs, 4 large fir trees, 2 little men, 2 brown horses, 2 orange cows, 2 white sheep, 2 yellow chickens). • 2 game boards (L/W: 32 x 22 cm). • 6 plastic bases. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 233 0

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

A B

1x

2 Child Extension Pack • 28 painted wooden objects (8 fences, 4 yellow cube houses, 2 red roofs, 4 large fir trees, 2 little men, 2 brown horses, 2 orange cows, 2 white sheep, 2 yellow chickens).

1x

+

This material adds to the Topology Set 2 and enables an additional two children to join in.

1x

A

+

B

B

2x

• 2 game boards (L/W: 32 x 22 cm). 313 309 342 234 7

53


Discovering Maths

A

3 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Spatial Awareness Set 1 André Jacquart

Stacking and building games for logic and spatial awareness activities. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. The cards represent constructions to be reproduced in 3D, taking into account the pieces' position, orientation and colour. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 24 instruction cards in 4 sets (L/W: 20 x 13 cm). • 18 plastic pieces of 3 types (roof, upper floor, ground floor) in 3 colours (red, yellow, blue). • 6 plastic bases. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 227 9

18 plastic pieces (3 types - roof, floor, ground floor) 6 plastic bases

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

1x

1x A

B

+

A

+

B

B

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Spatial Awareness Set 1 and enables an additional two children to join in. • 18 plastic pieces of 3 types (roof, upper floor, ground floor) in 3 colours (red, yellow, blue). 313 309 342 228 6

1x

2x

24 plastic pieces (3 types - 4 colours)

A

4 YEARS +

2 CHILDREN

Spatial Awareness Set 2 André Jacquart

This workshop introduces two modes of spatial representation: - front views; - perspective views. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. The 24 cards, with a progressive level of difficulty, represent pieces shown from in front or from an angle. Using this equipment, children can reproduce each configuration while identifying the orientation and colour of each piece. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 24 instruction cards in 4 sets of 6 (L/W: 17 x 17 cm and 21 x 21 cm). • 24 plastic pieces of 3 types (roof, upper floor, ground floor) in 4 colours (red, green, yellow and blue). • 2 boards in hard plastic. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 222 4

2 plastic boards

24 instruction cards

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

1x

B

6 CHILDREN A

+

1x

+

B

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Spatial Awareness Set 2 and enables an additional two children to join in.

54

• 24 plastic pieces (3 types - 4 colours). • 2 boards in hard plastic. 313 309 342 223 1

1x

A

2x

B


A w a r e n e s s

6 transparent bases

A

Discovering Maths

S p a t i a l

3 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Organicubes Through the use of observational skills, this wooden equipment enables the construction and study of perspective views. The 18 model cards, arranged in a ladder cube, offer different arrangements of increasing difficulty. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs. The box contains: • 18 colour model cards. • 28 wood cubes in 4 colours. • 6 transparent bases. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. • L/W model card: 21 x 15 cm; cube side: 3 cm. 313 309 343 137 0

28 wooden cubes 4 colours 18 colour model cards

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN

1x

1x

A

A

B

+

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to Organicubes and enables an additional two children to join in. • 26 wooden cubes in 4 colours (6 blue, 6 green, 7 yellow and 7 red). 313 309 343 138 7

+

B

1x

B

2x

90 model cards

5 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Structuro André Clavel

This game guides children’s first steps towards abstraction. It involves reproducing 3-dimensional cube structures as shown in perspective on progressively difficult full-colour model cards. • L/W card: 13 x 10 cm; edge of cube: 2.5 cm. • The box contains: 64 plastic cubes, 90 cardboard model cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 343 096 0

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to Structuro and enables an additional two children to join in. • 64 plastic cubes. 313 309 343 097 7

64 cubes

55


Discovering Maths 3 YEARS + 4 YEARS +

Logic Blocks 60 hard plastic pieces in 5 geometric shapes (square, rectangle, triangle, circle, hexagon), in 3 colours, 2 sizes and 2 thicknesses. • Side of large square: 5.5 cm. • Set of 60. 313 309 342 208 8

5 YEARS +

Plastic Tangrams • Plastic Tangrams side: 10 cm. • The bag contains: 4 seven-piece plastic Tangrams in 4 different colours (blue, red, green, yellow). 313 309 342 084 8

4 YEARS +

Plastic Shape Tracer Set

Geoplans

This set allows children to familiarise themselves with geometric shapes. 5 geometric shapes in transparent plastic for tracing figures, patterns and tiles.

Simple transparent peg boards to trace, transform or create figurative or geometric shapes. Pattern cards are included to slip beneath the transparent plates.

• The set includes: 5 plastic geometric shapes in 2 sizes and 3 different colours (1 rectangle, 1 hexagon, 1 equilateral triangle, 1 square, 1 circle). • L of square edge: 3 and 5 cm.

• L/W: 25.5 x 15 cm. • The box contains: 4 Geoplans, 16 pattern cards, 1 bag of elastic bands (assorted lengths and colours) and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 077 0

313 309 342 290 3

NEW 8 cm

4 YEARS +

Solids 4 lightweight solid shapes (cube, cylinder, pyramid and ball) with rounded corners. By handling them, children learn to recognise and name them. • Plastic. • Cube H: 8 cm; cylinder L: 7.8 cm; pyramid H: 8.8 cm; ball Ø: 8 cm. 313 309 342 288 0

56


Discovering Maths

Geometry A

MAGNETIC

3 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN PIECES

Geocolor André Jacquart

This workshop introduces the recognition of simple geometric shapes: square, rectangle, triangle and circle. The child reproduces or creates semi-representational models using magnetic pieces in a variety of shapes and colours. The activity cards are grouped into 6 sets of increasing difficulty. • Sets 1 and 2: individual shapes shown as solids. • Sets 3 and 4: individual shapes shown hollow. • Sets 5 and 6: individual or assembled shapes shown as solids. For 2, 4 to 6 extra children, just get 1, 2 or 3 Extension Packs. • L/W sheet: 30 x 21 cm. • The box contains: 12 double-sided activity cards grouped into 6 sets, 40 magnetic shape counters in 5 different shapes and 4 different colours, and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 345 114 9

40 magnetic shape counters

12 double-sided activity cards, i.e. 24 models to reproduce

Build your set B

4 CHILDREN

1x

2 Child Extension Pack • 40 magnetic shape counters in 4 different colours, i.e. 10 shape counters (square, rectangle, triangle, circle, semi-circle) per colour. 313 309 345 115 6

A

+

This material adds to Geocolor and enables an additional two children to join in.

6 CHILDREN

1x

+

B

1x

A

B

2x

48 pattern cards

6 plastic cut-out trays

3 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Geometrix F. Hardy and G. Zimmermann

Wooden geometric pieces in 3 colours for creating a wide variety of designs. The shapes fit into plastic trays using actual-size or scaled-down, colour, black and white or outlined patterns. • Ø circle: 5 cm. L/W tray: 28 x 21 cm. • The box contains: 132 geometric pieces: circles, semi-circles, large and small triangles, large and small squares, 6 plastic trays, 48 printed pattern cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 343 102 8

57


Discovering Maths

G e o m e t r y Actual-size reproduction of model cards

5 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Organicolor J. Dubosson Develop abstraction skills

Develops observation, organisation and reasoning skills. Using coloured wooden chips, children reproduce complex designs based either on models or simply using their imagination. • L/W model card: 23 x 13 cm / 23 x 23 cm / 26 x 12.5 cm. • The box contains: 96 chips (4 colours), 28 model cards in colour or black and white and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 038 9

12 model sheets

25 pieces, 5 shapes, 5 colours

3 YEARS +

Equiliwood A balancing game for building a tower with five levels, from the child’s imagination or based on the model sheets. The game develops dexterity, recognition and matching of shapes and colours, and spatial awareness, and introduces children to reading instructions. • The set includes: 25 pieces in varnished wood (5 shapes, 5 colours), 5 supports and 12 thick cardboard model sheets. • Ø/thickness of support: 11.4 x 0.8 cm. • Side of square piece: 2.8 cm. • L/W of model sheet: 9 x 9 cm. 313 309 399 442 4

3 YEARS +

22 wooden pieces, 9 shapes, 6 colours

Geoblocks A wooden construction game consisting of colourful wooden semicircles for creating different figures, flat or 3D. They can be created from the imagination or taking inspiration from the model cards, in increasing levels of difficulty, which suggest a variety of representative and abstract shapes. 48 model cards

58

• The set includes: 22 wooden blocks in 9 shapes and 6 colours, and 48 model cards with the front in colour and the back in black and white. • L/W/H large semi-circle: 18.8 x 9.3 x 2 cm. • L/W/H small semi-circle: 3.4 x 1.7 x 2 cm. • L/W of model card: 11.5 x 8.5 cm. 313 309 333 325 4


4 YEARS +

Discovering the World

Time Awareness 40 PHOTOS

Image Sequences - Sands of Time Photo flashcards chosen to help the child understand the concept of time. The photos are used as a basis for identifying a chronology by looking at the concepts of succession (before, now, after) or simultaneousness (at the same time). The 40 colour photographs provide a rich and original resource for the development of language and the acquisition of new vocabulary. The image collection is organised into eight themes, each comprising five photographs that can be used individually or as a set, depending on the child’s level: growing up, life stages, from hatching to first flight, making a mask, planting flowers, from flower to fruit, building a house, a sailing boat leaving the harbour. • L/W photo: 15 x 12 cm. • The box contains: 40 colour photos, plastic dividers for filing families of photos and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 195 1

15 cm

POINT 4 YEARS +

40 PHOTOS

Photo Box - The Seasons

12 cm

Delayed-effect sticking action.

This series of photo flashcards allows the child to discover the cyclical pattern of the weather. For this purpose, the child associates clues, sorts, classes, associates and corrects. The image collection is organised into 6 themes: types of clothing, plants and fruit, animals, landscapes, types of manual work and leisure activities. The landscape theme comprises four sub-themes: the countryside, the sea, the city and the mountains. The box contains: • 40 photos (15 x 12 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 196 8

Hourglasses

14.5 cm

To measure time via the flow of sand. 5 flow speeds (30 s, 1, 3, 5 and 10 min), each corresponding to a different colour.

Thermometer SET OF

5 Large Hourglasses 1 set of 5 hourglasses, in a case. • H: 14.5 cm. 313 309 342 179 1

Clocks Set of 10 plastic clocks with 2 different coloured hands. • Flexible plastic. • L/W: 11.7 x 11.7 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 305 165 3

A large plastic thermometer for indoor or outdoor use. Glass tube with kerosene. Shows the temperature in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit (- 40°C to + 50°C). • W/H: 7.5 x 39 cm. 313 309 332 656 0

59


Rituals

A w a r e n e s s Little Bear to be dressed to suit the season.

Chronology reference bar Weather roulette

MAGNETIC 3 YEARS + PIECES

Weather for Children An amusing, attractive resource to introduce the weather and foster awareness of the concept of the passage of time. The children are invited to: - observe the weather; - use the roulette wheel and symbol counters to make a weather forecast; - dress Little Bear to suit the forecast. Using a practical, everyday situation, they gradually acquire the appropriate vocabulary (weather vocabulary, the language of clothes and the seasons) and are introduced to the concept of chronology (yesterday, today, tomorrow).

40 cm

Discovering the World

T i m e

• The complete set includes: 1 magnetic panel (56 x 40 cm) with 2 mounting eyelets; 24 clothing pieces; 24 weather counters; 4 season counters; 4 arrows and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 305 164 6 56 cm

4 season counters

Temperature reference bar

24 clothing pieces

24 weather counters

Those present

3 YEARS +

Those absent

MAGNETIC

PIECES

Attendance Board Laurence Jossomme

Group material that is extremely useful for encouraging numeracy. Using this material every day also helps to: - naturally broaden children’s vocabulary (colours, shapes, organising into groups, etc.); - create spatial and time awareness activities; - create problem solving activities relating to amounts. Large board (92 x 77.5 cm) for group activities. The board is made up of three sections: one section with a blue background to identify children present, one section with a yellow background to identify children absent, a number bar on a green background to display the counting results. • The complete set includes: 1 magnetic plastic board, 36 reversible magnetic wooden frames, 40 first name labels (20 orange and 20 green: one colour for girls and one for boys), 6 white magnetic labels (to be filled in), 1 green magnetic counter (to hide the number 0 on the number bar), 6 triangular magnetic counters (to be placed on the number bar to enumerate those present and absent), 6 magnetic counters in geometric shapes (to identify the groups of children on the board), 2 strips of stickers in geometric shapes (to identify the groups of children in the wooden frames) and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 305 158 5

Number bar 1 green magnetic counter to hide the 0

6 triangular magnetic counters to count out the children present and those absent (girls, boys, girls & boys)

Additional Frames and Counters 2 Additional Labels 1

60

• 40 children’s name labels (20 green and 20 orange). • 2 strips of stickers (to identify the groups). 313 309 305 160 8

• 5 magnetic wooden frames. • 13 magnetic counters: - 6 to identify the groups; - 6 to count; - 1 to hide the zero; • 6 white labels on a magnetic base. 313 309 305 161 5

SEE ALSO Magnetic Number Line p. 32


NEW

4 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Sorting Set - Materials A first steps set for children to practise identifying, differentiating and classifying substances and materials. They also learn to: • Practise visual discrimination; • Understand and use suitable, specific vocabulary; • Know the different types of waste bin and their colours. The box contains: • 2 plastic sorting boxes (27 x 12 cm). • 12 instruction sheets split into 2 sets of 6 sheets (25.5 x 8.5 cm). • 60 cardboard photo counters (4.5 x 5.5 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 276 7

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to the Sorting Set and enables an additional 2 children to join in. • 2 sorting boxes. 313 309 305 162 2

Discovering the World

• Material for observing the living world, discovering the five senses and learning to respect the environment.

The instruction sheets 12 instruction sheets split into two sets: • 6 sheets for identifying and differentiating between substances and materials; • 6 sheets for knowing the different types of waste bin and their colours.

The counters and the sorting containers • 60 cardboard photo counters; • 2 plastic sorting containers. Each child has a sorting container into which an instruction sheet is placed. Using the corresponding counters, the child has to complete the compartments in the container, following all the instructions.

12 materials sorting sheets

12 rubbish sorting sheets

2 sorting containers 60 photo counters

I Sort Out My Waste A box to help children learn about sorting waste. Children put the painted counter in the slot for one of 5 compartments: paper, metal, plastic, glass and organic waste. Children should identify each compartment using the written word, the design or the colour. • Box L/W/H: 31 x 9.5 x 13.5 cm. • Slot L/W: 6 x 0.8 cm. • 1 solid wood box and 30 painted counters. 313 309 379 068 2

61


48 animal counters

23 cm

Discovering the World

33 cm

6 large activity boards

4 YEARS +

Sorting for the Planet

4 YEARS +

Lucienne Brive

Nature Games Language and observation games to learn about 6 natural environments: the vegetable garden, the countryside, the pond, the river, the seaside and the sea-bed. Using illustrated boards, the children learn to distinguish landscapes, recognise and memorise animal and vegetable species, make comparisons between different living environments, extend their vocabulary etc. Each board represents what can be seen above / on / below. The lotto game encourages the child to follow clues and to "search for the tiny animal" to complete each board. • Board L/W: 33 x 23 cm; counter size: 7 cm. • The box contains: 6 cardboard activity boards, 48 cardboard animal counters and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 198 1

A route game for raising children’s awareness of environmental protection by sorting waste so that it can be recycled. The aim of this game is to be the first to unload 4 dustbins sorted by type of waste (household waste, glass, cardboard, plastic and metal) in the 2 recycling plants along the route. • L/W board: 39 x 39 cm. • L/W sorting card: 4 x 3 cm. • H/L/D lorry counter: 2 x 3 x 1 cm. • The box contains: 1 cardboard game board representing a route, 4 cardboard bin lorries in which the child places his or her bins filled with 5 same-type cards, 92 sorting cards, 16 cardboard bins in 4 colours, 4 wooden lorries for moving forward, 1 dice, 1 fabric bag containing the stack, 1 summary card of the waste to sort and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 180 6

Maxi-magnifying Glass

Magnifying Jars 6 transparent magnifying jars, each with a lid providing 2 scales of magnification (x 2 and x 4). Perfect for observing small items or living creatures. The lids are punched with air holes. • Ø/H jar: 6 x 7.5 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 305 090 8

2-4 CHILDREN

10 magnifying glasses: x 3 and x 6.

Large, hand-held magnifying glass for easy observation. Highly practical with its wide, anti-slip handle that can be easily held by children.

• L/Ø: 11.5 x 4.5 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 305 128 8

• Diameter 100 mm magnification x 2. • Diameter 20 mm magnification x 3 and x 4. 313 309 305 168 4

Magnifying Glasses

1 language game

4 YEARS + 5 CHILDREN

Food Games 3 types of activities about food are offered to encourage knowledge, 1 sorting game language, discussion and sensory enjoyment. • A language game: children learn to recognise the different foods and their origins, and describe a dish, by looking at the photo boards. • A sorting game: the 5 round counters represent 5 food groups and allow the photos to be sorted by flavour, colour, type of meal, etc. • 2 lotto games: "1 food group" lotto or "5 food groups" lotto.

62

• L/W boards: 24 x 18 cm. • L/W photo cards: 8 x 7 cm. • Ø counters: 6 cm. • The box contains: 35 photo boards, 5 double-sided lotto boards, 5 illustrated round counters, 25 photo cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 032 8

35 photo boards

5 «food groups» counters


9.5 cm

Front Back

3 YEARS +

1-6 CHILDREN

Maximemo Food A memory game consisting of 28 photo counters on the theme of food to develop language, observation, concentration and memory. • L/W counter: 9.5 x 9.5 cm. • The box contains: 28 cardboard counters. 313 309 375 158 4

2 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Discovering the World

NEW

9.5 cm

36 counters

Maxilotto Food Lotto designed around food. Each food group is represented by a board: Fruits and Vegetables, Cereals and Cereal Products, Dairy Products, Meat, Fish and Eggs, Fats, Herbs and Spices. Children learn to name foods and understand the rules of nutrition. • L/W board: 33 x 22.7 cm. • L/W counter: 10 x 10 cm. • The box contains: 6 game boards and 36 cardboard counters. 313 309 336 557 6 6 game boards

4 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Bon Appétit! Françoise Rastoin-Faugeron

Come and eat! An entertaining way of making children aware of the importance of a balanced diet for their health and development. • L/W board: 60 x 32 cm. • L/W meal tray: 23 x 13.5 cm. • L/W counter: 4 x 4 cm. • The box contains: 1 game board and 4 cardboard meal trays, 48 photograph food counters, 4 wooden game pieces, 1 dice, 1 fabric bag and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 187 5

4 meal trays

63


64


To discover... NEW

Educational Games Expression Games

P.75

O

ur underlying commitment is to provide educational games, designed jointly with educational professionals, that are suited to young and older children alike. These innovative products can be used in small groups and can be adapted to the child’s progress. Most include a set of game rules.

Learning Games N EW

1, 2, 3 - Sizes

P.80

Sensory Games Maxilottos

p. 66 p. 68

Lottos, Dominos, Memory

p. 70

Language Games

p. 74

Sound Association Games

p. 76

Association Games

p. 79

Logic Games

p. 80

Counting Games

p. 81

Self-correction Games

p. 82

Educational Games Card Games

p. 84

Board Games

p. 86

N EW

Treasure Hunt

P.89 65


Learning Games

Sensory Games

6 lotto boards

18 counters

2 YEARS +

1-6 CHILDREN

Tactiludi Animals 2 games about tactile recognition. • Lotto game. 6 illustrated boards each with 3 embedded material sections. 9 different materials appear twice across all the boards. Without looking, each player must find the counters in the bag with the same materials as the ones on the player’s board. • Concentration-style game. You play with the 18 counters embedded with 9 different materials. • L/W of board: 28 x 21 cm. • Side of counter: 6.5 cm. • The box contains: 6 lotto boards, 18 counters and a fabric bag. 313 309 337 134 8

3 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

Tactidominos 24 wooden dominos, covered in 8 different textures to be recognised by touching. • L/W/D piece: 7 x 3.5 x 1.5 cm. • The box contains: 24 wooden dominos covered in 8 textures. 313 309 337 136 2 24 wooden dominos

POINT Touch recognitition of textures textures.

5 game boards

25 pieces in varnished wood

4 YEARS +

2-5 CHILDREN

Tactilo® 25 shapes in varnished wood hidden in a bag and which children have to recognise by touch and place them on a lotto card. • H. piece: 3.5 cm. • L/W card: 21 x 13.5 cm. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 037 2

66

35 mm


1-6 CHILDREN

Learning Games

2 YEARS +

Tactiloto 24 wooden pieces to teach how to recognise shapes by touch. Each shape is drawn onto a cardboard counter so that children can familiarise themselves with the pieces, and play lotto. Then the pieces are hidden in a bag and, in turn, children have to identify each shape by touch and place it on the corresponding counter. • L/W counter: 8 x 8 cm. • H/W/D fish: 6.5 x 4.5 x 0.9 cm. The box contains: 24 coloured pieces in varnished wood, 24 counters in strong cardboard, 1 cloth bag and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 133 1

POINTS • Free standing wooden w pieces. • Activity A ti it off varying difficulty.

2 lotto games

24 cm

7 cm

8 cm

18 cm

25 photo cards On the front “1 sense” lotto On the back “5 senses” lotto

1 sorting game 5 counters

4 YEARS + 5 CHILDREN

The 5 Senses Games Games for discovering the 5 senses and their function, for developing language and knowledge of the environment. 3 games in 1 to explore the 5 senses. • A language game: using large photos, the children observe, describe the sensations, identify the organs concerned, compare their sensory experiences etc. • A sorting game: sort the photos by sense and associate them with the matching counter-symbols; match by type of sensation, etc. • 2 lotto games: “1 sense” lotto or “5 senses” lotto.

18 cm

24 cm

The box contains: • 35 photo boards (24 x 18 cm). • 5 double-sided lotto boards (24 x 18 cm). • 25 photo cards (8 x 7 cm). • 5 round counters (Ø: 6 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 031 1

1 language game

35 photo boards

67


Learning Games

Maxilottos 4 game boards

24 counters

2 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Maxilotto Animals 4 game boards to complete by matching photographed animals. • L/W board: 33 x 23 cm. • L/W counter: 10.5 x 10 cm. • The box contains: 4 game boards and 24 sturdy laminated cardboard counters. 313 309 387 016 2

12 game boards

2 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

Maxilotto Colours C. Baraja

36 counters

This lotto game introduces children to colours (3 primary and 3 complementary), through observation and play. The counters are cut in the shape of the photographed objects and are placed on the singlecolour game boards or on the black and white boards (containing 1 object from each coloured board). • L/W board: 33 x 23 cm. • H/D counter : 8 x 0.3 cm. • The box contains: 12 cardboard game boards (6 coloured boards and 6 black and white boards), 36 rigid cardboard counters with colour photos and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 580 4

6 game boards

2 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Maxilotto Food 36 counters

Lotto designed around food. Each food group is represented by a board: Fruits and Vegetables, Cereals and Cereal Products, Dairy Products, Meat, Fish and Eggs, Fats, Herbs and Spices. Children learn to name foods and understand the rules of nutrition. • L/W board: 33 x 22.7 cm. • L/W counter: 10 x 10 cm. • The box contains: 6 game boards and 36 cardboard counters. 313 309 336 557 6

68


2 YEARS +

Learning Games

NEW 36 counters

1-6 CHILDREN

Maxilotto - Clothing A lotto game closely related to children’s experiences. Each game board has photos related to the theme of clothing and accessories.

6 boards

• L/W board: 33 x 23 cm. • L/W counter: 10 x 10 cm. • The box contains: 6 game boards and 36 cardboard counters. 313 309 336 556 9

6 game boards

POINT Photographs of obbjects.

2 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

Everyday Life Lotto Lotto that reflects the world of young children. 36 photos of highly familiar objects placed on 6 game boards. Each board is based on a theme in the home: bathroom, food, the kitchen, clothing, toys and objects. • L/W board: 33 x 23 cm. • L/W counter: 10 x 10 cm. • The box contains : 6 game boards and 36 cardboard object counters. 313 309 336 558 3

36 object counters

SEE ALSO Food games

32 counters

3 YEARS +

p. 62

2-8 CHILDREN

Opposites Lotto A lotto game to help children describe objects precisely. 16 objects presented in two contrasting situations (dirty/clean; front/behind). The child has to describe the image needed to complete his/her game board. • L/W board: 22 x 22 cm. • L/W counter: 10 x 10 cm. • The box contains: 8 illustrated cardboard boards, 32 counters representing the objects and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 990 1

8 illustrated boards

69


Learning Games

Lottos, Dominos, Memory

Front / Back

4 YEARS +

2-5 CHILDREN

Lotto - From 1 to 10 A lotto game to learn about the numbers 1 to 10. The quantities illustrated by the small animals on the boards must be matched with numbers (one side of the counter) or dots on a dice (the other side of the counter). • Board L/W: 16.8 x 11.5 cm. • Counter L/W: 7.5 x 4.9 cm. • The box contains: 5 game boards and 20 illustrated double-sided cardboard counters. 313 309 332 018 6

2 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

2 YEARS +

Lotto - Colours A lotto game on the theme of colours: blue, yellow, red and green. 4 game boards and 6 counters to reposition per board. • Board L/W: 16.8 x 11.5 cm. • Counter side: 4.8 cm. • The box contains: 4 game boards and 24 illustrated card counters. 313 309 332 021 6

3 YEARS +

Lotto - Objects A lotto game on the theme of everyday objects: school, the home, toys and vehicles. • Board L/W: 16.8 x 11.5 cm. • Counter side: 4.8 cm. • The box contains: 4 game boards and 24 illustrated card counters. 313 309 332 022 3

2-4 CHILDREN

2-6 CHILDREN

Domino - Numbers A game of 29 dominos for the discovery of numbers and dots on a dice from 0 to 6. • Piece L/W: 10 x 5 cm. • The box contains: 29 illustrated card dominos. 313 309 332 023 0

36 cards

3 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

Memo - Farm A 36-piece memory game on a farming theme.

70

• Counter side: 5 cm. • The box contains: 36 illustrated card counters. 313 309 332 020 9


Learning Games

NEW

9.5 cm

9.5 cm

Front/ Back

3 YEARS +

1-6 CHILDREN

Maximemo Food A memory game consisting of 28 photo counters on the theme of food to develop language, observation, concentration and memory. • L/W counter: 9.5 x 9.5 cm. • The box contains: 28 cardboard counters. 313 309 375 158 4

1-6 CHILDREN

10 cm

2 YEARS +

Maxidomino - Animals A game of 28 photo dominos on the theme of animals. • L/W domino: 20 x 10 cm. • The box contains: 28 illustrated cardboard dominos. 313 309 336 578 1 20 cm

1 fabric bag

2 YEARS +

1-4 CHILDREN

12 cubes with inlaid gems

Sound Discovery Blocks Audio memory game to develop recognition and aural memory. 12 wooden sound cubes. When shaking the cubes, children should recognise and associate two identical sounds to form 6 pairs. Self-correcting game due to the gems in different colours inlaid on one side. • 12 wooden cubes with inlaid gems in plastic and 1 fabric bag with a tie cord. • Cube side: 4 cm. • L/W of bag: 32 x 27 cm. 313 309 398 353 4

71


Learning Games

Quadrimemo • A wide variety of memory concepts for developing observation skills and spatial awareness.

24 wooden vehicles

2 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

3D Quadrimemo - Vehicles Wooden vehicles to be hidden under caps to make pairs based on memory games. 3 sets of rules for the game are provided. For use with the Quadrimemo grid sold separately. • L/W minimum: 3 x 3.5 cm. • The box contains: 24 varnished wooden vehicles, 8 types (car, motorbike, truck, locomotive, aeroplane, hot air balloon, sailing boat, cruise liner). 313 309 375 142 3

24 wooden animals

2 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

3D Quadrimemo - Animals Wooden animals to hide under caps to build up pairs based on memory games. For use with the Quadrimemo grid sold separately. There are three sets of game rules. • Animal H/W: 3 x 3.5 cm. • The box contains: 24 wooden animals in 8 different shapes and 8 different colours (tortoise, frog, snail, butterfly, fish, chick, bear and hedgehog). 313 309 375 133 1

16 caps

Quadrimemo - Shapes Grid 1 grid and 16 plastic caps. For use with the 3D Quadrimemo or Activity Cards Quadrimemo (sold separately). • 1 grid and 16 plastic caps. • H/W grid: 26 x 26 cm. • H. cover: 5 cm. 313 309 375 103 4 1 grid

72


D o m i n o s ,

M e m o r y

How to use Quadrimemo? Step 1 Put down the grid without the caps on.

Step 2 Select a game board and slide it into the slot in the base of the grid. Let the children see the images.

Step 3 Put the caps on the grid. The game can then start with 2 to 4 players at the same time.

Learning Games

L o t t o s ,

10 photo boards

2 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Quadrimemo - Animals 10 photo boards of increasing difficulty on the subject of the animal kingdom (pets, wild animals, sea animals, insects, etc.). Based on the principle of the game of Memory, children associate animals with each other based on their colour, their outline, their physical appearance, their food, etc. For use with Quadrimemo 3D. • 10 photo boards and 1 set of game instructions. • L/W of board: 25 x 23 cm. 313 309 375 148 5

10 boards

3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Quadrimemo - Shapes and Colours 10 painted sheets for playing with shapes and colours. For use with the Quadrimemo - Shapes Grid sold separately. • Board L/W: 25 x 23 cm. • 10 illustrated boards. 313 309 375 131 7

10 photo boards

3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Quadrimemo - Everyday life 10 photo boards on the themes of: animals, objects, plants and food. For use with the Quadrimemo - Shapes grid sold separately. • Board L/W: 25 x 23 cm. • 10 photo boards. 313 309 375 132 4

73


4 YEARS + 5 CHILDREN

Food Games 24 cm

18 cm

Learning Games

Language Games

5 "food groups" counters 24 cm

3 types of activities about food are offered to encourage knowledge, language, discussion and sensory enjoyment. • A language game: children learn to recognise the different foods and their origins, and describe a dish, by looking at the photo boards. • A sorting game: the 5 round counters represent 5 food groups and allow the photos to be sorted by flavour, colour, type of meal, etc. • 2 lotto games: "1 food group" lotto or "5 food groups" lotto.

18 cm

• L/W boards: 24 x 18 cm. • L/W photo cards: 8 x 7 cm. • Ø counters: 6 cm. • The box contains: 35 photo boards, 5 double-sided lotto boards, 5 illustrated round counters, 25 photo cards and 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 336 032 8

18 cm

24 cm

4 YEARS + 5 CHILDREN

The 5 Senses Games

35 photo boards

24 cm

5 counters 18 cm

Games for discovering the 5 senses and their function, for developing language and knowledge of the environment. 3 games in 1 to explore the 5 senses. • A language game: using large photos, the children observe, describe the sensations, identify the organs concerned, compare their sensory experiences etc. • A sorting game: sort the photos by sense and associate them with the matching countersymbols; match by type of sensation, etc. • 2 lotto games: “1 sense” lotto or “5 senses” lotto. The box contains: • 35 photo boards (24 x 18 cm). • 5 double-sided lotto boards (24 x 18 cm). • 25 photo cards (8 x 7 cm). • 5 round counters (Ø: 6 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 031 1

4 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Language Game 2

2 packs of 48 playing cards

4 card holders

74

12 model cards

This game encourages the construction of simple sentences to describe and identify a picture. Using model cards and corresponding cards, the children describe the picture in turn. Without looking at the cards, the other children must recognise it and complete their own card. Other games are suggested using the cards alone. • L/W model card: 25 x 10 cm. • L/W playing card: 8.5 x 5.5 cm. • The box contains: 4 strong cardboard activity cards to hold the playing cards, 12 model cards (3 sets of 4) representing the situations to be described, 2 identical packs of 48 playing cards, 8 transparent studs to vertically insert the model cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 336 991 8


30 photo boards

24 cm

Front / Back

Learning Games

NEW

1 language game

18 cm

1 sorting game 6 expression counters

3 YEARS +

1-6 CHILDREN

Expression Games 4 games in 1 for discovering facial expressions and thinking about what they mean, from the child’s own expression and others’ expressions. Children learn to recognise, name, interpret and reproduce 6 facial expressions: smiling, laughing, sadness, anger, disgust and surprise. In the process, they expand their vocabulary and become aware that the face is an essential element of expression and non-verbal communication. • A language game: the photo boards are the starting point for numerous activities involving observation, description, comparison, riddles, mime, etc. • A sorting game: sort the photos based on their expression and match them with the corresponding symbol counters; sort by type of feeling (happiness/unhappiness). • 2 lotto games: 1 expression lotto or 6 expression lotto.

6 cm

8 cm

Front Back

30 photo cards

6 lotto boards

18 cm

• L/W board: 24 x 18 cm. • L/W card: 8 x 6 cm. • Ø counter: 6 cm. • The box contains: 30 cardboard photo boards, 6 illustrated expression counters in cardboard, 6 double-sided cardboard lotto boards, 30 cardboard photo cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 332 010 0

2 lotto games Front / Back

24 cm

33 cm

23 cm

4 YEARS +

Nature Games Language and observation games to learn about 6 natural environments: the vegetable garden, the countryside, the pond, the river, the seaside and the sea-bed. Using illustrated boards, the children learn to distinguish landscapes, recognise and memorise animal and vegetable species, make comparisons between different living environments, extend their vocabulary etc. Each board represents what can be seen above / on / below. The lotto game encourages the child to follow clues and to "search for the tiny animal" to complete each board. • Board L/W: 33 x 23 cm; counter size: 7 cm. • The box contains: 6 cardboard activity boards, 48 cardboard animal counters and 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 336 198 1

48 animal counters

6 large activity boards

75


Learning Games

Sound Association Games 1 CD lasting 36 minutes

2 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Sound Lotto of Everyday Sounds 40 plastic counters

A listening game for identifying everyday sounds. The children listen to one of the familiar sounds and place a counter on the corresponding picture on their activity board. 36 environmental sounds are recorded 4 times in different orders to maintain the children’s interest. • L/W board: 25 x 9.5 cm. Ø counter: 3.5 cm. • The box contains: 1 CD lasting 36 minutes, 12 cardboard activity boards with a photo of the objects, 40 plastic counters and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 223 9

12 game boards

40 plastic counters

1 CD lasting 52 minutes

6 game boards

3 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Animal Sounds Lotto A game for identifying 36 animal calls. The sounds are recorded 6 times in different orders. The game boards list animals according to habitat. The CD includes 1 recording per card and 5 random recordings. • L/W board: 25 x 19 cm. • Ø counter: 3.5 cm. • The box contains: 1 CD lasting 52 minutes, 6 rigid cardboard game boards with 6 different photos, 40 plastic counters and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 222 2

1 CD lasting 66 minutes

2 image formats for group and individual games

2 YEARS +

2X30 PHOTOS

8.5 cm

21 cm

Audio Flashcards - Animals

29.7 cm

76

12 cm

This comprehensive collection is perfect for young children, enriching their vocabulary about all types of animals, finding out what noises they make and how they live. The large images help legibility and descriptive activities. The same images are included in small format for use in games. The CD is for use in listening and language sessions. The box contains: • 1 CD lasting 66 minutes. • 30 colour photos (29.7 x 21 cm) and 30 card photos (12 x 8.5 cm). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 212 5


18 cm

24 cm

16 photo boards

Lotto games

Learning Games

Language game

18 cm

6 lotto boards

4 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Musical Instruments Audio Games For setting up activities around spoken language, listening and discovery of the world on the theme of musical instruments. • Language game: by looking at the photo boards, children learn to recognise different instruments, their family (strings, wind, percussion, etc.), what they are made of (wood, brass, metal, plastic, etc.), their origin, their sound and so on, and acquire an accurate vocabulary. • Audio lotto games: several activities with progressively increasing difficulties around 36 different sounds, to develop listening, discrimination and aural memory. • The box contains: 16 cardboard photo boards, 6 cardboard lotto boards, 36 plastic tokens, 1 40-minute CD and 1 teacher's leaflet. • L/W of photo boards and lotto boards: 24 x 18 cm. • Ø token: 3.5 cm. 313 309 337 226 0

24 cm

1 CD lasting 40 minutes 36 tokens

1 CD lasting 54 minutes

2 YEARS +

2X30 PHOTOS

The box contains: • 30 colour large format photos (L/W: 29.7 x 21 cm). • 30 card format photos (L/W: 12 x 8.5 cm). • 1 audio CD lasting 54 minutes. • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 342 219 4

8.5 cm

An audio CD and 60 photos in 2 formats to name, play and understand the environment. 6 themes relating to children’s everyday life: animals, music, objects, transport, facial expressions and leisure activities. The 30 large format photos are for use in observing and describing an image. The inclusion of 30 card format photos helps with handling by small hands and enables word games to be set up. The audio CD contains sounds associated with each image.

21 cm

Audio Flashcards - Everyday Sounds

29.7 cm

12 cm

77


Learning Games

S o u n d

A s s o c i a t i o n

G a m e s

22.7 cm

33 cm

6 large-format boards

2 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

My First Sound Situations Lotto Listening and language material that can be used in group sequences or lotto games. The children must identify 30 sounds corresponding to the sound situations illustrated in scenes of everyday life: kitchen, dining room, bedroom, bathroom, in the street and at the park. For learning to observe and describe scenes, developing discrimination and aural memory, encouraging dialogue and enhancing vocabulary.

30 tokens

1 CD lasting 32 minutes

• The box contains: 6 laminated boards in thick cardboard, 30 plastic tokens, 1 CD lasting 32 minutes and 1 teacher's leaflet. • L/W of board: 33 x 22.7 cm. • Ø of token: 3.5 cm. 313 309 337 143 0

1 CD lasting 54 minutes

22 cm

60 plastic counters

33 cm

4 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Sound Situations Lotto 6 scene cards

78

48 sounds matching the situations illustrated on 6 scene cards: garden, kitchen, street, square, forest and beach. When they hear a sound, children place a counter on the matching item on the scene card. 6 sequences are recorded in a row, the first scene-by-scene, the others in random orders. • L/W card: 33 x 22 cm. • Ø counter: 3 cm. • The box contains: 1 CD lasting 54 minutes, 6 rigid cardboard scene cards, 60 plastic counters and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 131 7


Learning Games

Association Games Discolud 3 YEARS +

POINT

2-6 CHILDREN

Hands-on fun.

Gilit Metuki and Ronnie Manor

• A new concept matching game using a wheel and attractive illustrations. • Many activities of varying difficulties: observation, visual discrimination and mathematics. • The winner is the player who gets the most pairs!

Discolud - Wheel Loads of fun, thanks to the central section which turns around, allowing for a large number of association games. The different boxes of counters enable various educational concepts to be used. • Plastic. • Ø: 34 cm. 313 309 388 386 5

NEW

Match up colours and shapes Match pieces based on shape, graphical representation or size

Discolud - Colours & Shapes

Discolud - Geometric Shapes

Gilit Metuki and Ronnie Manor

3 matching games for recognising geometric shapes (circle, square, triangle, rectangle, oval and hexagon), graphical representations (outline drawings, block drawings, negatives, 3D, in photos) and in 2 sizes (small or large). For use with the Discolud wheel, sold separately.

3 matching games based on colour (blue, yellow, red, green, pink, violet, orange and brown) and shape (coloured circle, animal, plant, fruit/vegetable, hat, shoe and toy vehicle) with 2 sizes (small or large). For use with the Discolud wheel, sold separately.

• Ø token: 4 and 5 cm. • The box contains: 120 illustrated cardboard counters in 2 sizes and 1 teacher's leaflet. 313 309 388 376 6

• Ø token: 4 and 5 cm. • The box contains: 120 illustrated cardboard counters in 2 sizes and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 372 8

Match by number, dots on a dice or collection

Discolud - Numbers & Quantities: 1 to 6

Association by number, combination or number of fingers on the hand

Discolud - Numbers & Quantities: 5 to 10

3 association games on numbers, constellation and dots on a dice from 1 to 6. For use with the Discolud wheel, sold separately.

3 association games about the number of fingers on each hand, dice combinations and the numbers from 5 to 10. For use with the Discolud wheel, sold separately.

• Ø counter: 4 and 5 cm. • The box contains: 120 illustrated cardboard counters in 2 sizes and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 379 7

• Ø counter: 4 and 5 cm. • The box contains: 120 illustrated cardboard counters in 2 sizes and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 377 3

79


Learning Games

Logic Games NEW

15 strips to place on the boards

On the front: fruits in sizes 1 to 3

Front / Back

2 YEARS +

1-8 CHILDREN

1, 2, 3 - Sizes Valérie Barry On the back: 3 circles in equivalent sizes Children check their choice by turning over the strip

15 boards

45 counters to place on the boards or strips

• L/W board: 22 x 15 cm. • L/W cardboard strip: 22 x 7.5 cm. • L counter: 6.5 cm. • The box contains: 15 boards each showing 3 circles in sizes 1 to 3, 15 doublesided cardboard strips (on the front: 3 fruits in sizes 1 to 3; on the back: 3 circles in equivalent sizes), 45 double-sided counters (on the front: 1 fruit; on the back: 1 circle in the equivalent size) and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 343 150 9

Double-sided On the front: 1 fruit

10 fun activities for stimulating comparative logic and organising knowledge about living things. Children learn to recognise 5 different fruits, differentiate them by size, match them up and put them in order according to different criteria. Example activities: match a fruit with a shape of the same size, put 3 fruits in order (increasing/decreasing size), match different fruits of the same size, etc.

On the back: 1 circle in the equivalent size

Front/Back

POINTS Self-correcting game.

4 YEARS + 8 CHILDREN

Portrait Games This self-correcting game offers a variety of activities involving the face: observation, language, decoding, sorting and connecting clues, imagination and creation of portraits freely or by following instructions. On the front, each sheet shows pictograms to be decoded to reconstruct a portrait and, on the back, the portrait to allow for correction. The sheets are divided into 3 sets of increasing difficulty. The illustrated strips make it possible to reconstruct the faces either by decoding the pictograms or by duplicating the portrait.

16 portrait sheets

• L/W sheet: 13 x 13 cm. • L/W strip: 13 x 3.5 / 4.5 / 5 cm. • The box contains: 16 double-sided cardboard sheets, 48 laminated thick card strips and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 171 3

48 illustrated strips, 3 per portrait

8 instruction pieces 32 animal pieces

POINT Easy to place pieces on the stick. 3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Piolino A board game to develop observation, reflexes and logic skills based around 3 matching criteria: shape, colour and size. The winner is the one who fills their stick with 6 animal pieces. The way this game is played is attractive to young children or for children with motor skill problems.

4 sticks

80

• L/W stick: 23 x 4 cm. • Piece L/W/D: 3.5 x 3.5 x 1 cm. • The box contains: 32 animal pieces, 8 instruction pieces, 4 transparent sticks, 1 cloth bag and 1 set of game instructions. 313 309 379 064 4


3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

MAGNETIC

PIECES

1, 2, 3 - I Can Count 4 magnetic game boards

Basic and fun-to-use playing materials for learning to count up to 6. Each child completes his or her game board using coloured counters following instructions on the dice (spots and colours). • L/W board: 33 x 23 cm. • Ø counter: 3.3 cm. • Dice side: 2.5 cm. • The box contains: 4 magnetic game boards, 84 coloured magnetic counters, 2 wooden dice (with colours and spots) and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 310 0

4 YEARS +

Learning Games

Counting Games

2 dice 84 magnetic counters

2-4 CHILDREN

The Animal Race Based on the traditional game of ludo, players take it in turns to throw the dice and move forward animals of the same colour. A 6 must be thrown to start each game. The winner is the one who brings all his animals back to the starting point. • L/W board: 29 x 29 cm. • H. animal: 2.5 cm. • Dice size: 1.3 x 1.3 cm. • The game comprises: 1 wooden board, 16 wooden animals and 2 dice. 313 309 336 176 9

POINTS • 4 sets of boards of varying difficulty. • Learn to recognise and name numbers between 1 and 30. 5 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

Bingo For 6 players. This traditional game has been adapted for young children. The counters are numbered 1 to 30. Six children can play together by choosing a board, each in a colour corresponding to a level of difficulty. • L/W board: 26.5 x 11 cm. • Ø/D counter: 2.5 x 0.5 cm. • The box contains: 24 cardboard game boards (4 sets of 6 boards), 60 wooden counters numbered from 1 to 30 (there are 2 counters for each number), 1 fabric bag and 1 set of rules. 313 309 336 000 7

NEW 3 YEARS +

1-4 CHILDREN

Magnetic Fishing This fishing game includes 4 fishing rods with magnetic end pieces, and 40 fish numbered on both sides. Children have fun discovering the numbers from 1 to 10 and assembling collections while also developing their fine motor skills.

POINT Develops hand-eye coordination

• Plastic and metal. • L fish: 7 cm. • L fishing rod: 33 cm; L line 25 cm. 313 309 336 200 1

81


Learning Games

Self-correction Games Fingercards Hervé Le Madec

• • • •

A novel tool to teach children to count. Clear and entertaining situations in question/answer format. Self-correction cards encourage independent learning. Fast and easy set-up for support sessions. How to use Fingercards? On the front: Each card has 3 answers

Hold the card over the fingerprint matching the answer

NEW

On the back: without letting go, the child turns the card over The fingers are holding the animal’s tail = right answer

The fingers are not holding the animal’s tail = wrong answer

6 sets of 8 cards

One concept and one question per set

3 YEARS +

Fingercards Spatial Awareness 48 cards (6 series of 8 self-correction cards) for understanding the concept of: - Under/on top, - In front/behind, - Inside/outside.

Which one is inside?

Which one is in front?

The box contains: • 48 double-sided cards (10 x 10 cm), • 5 divided inserts. • 1 teacher’s leaflet including 1 evaluation sheet. Which one is on top?

313 309 388 070 3

6 sets of 12 cards

One concept and one question per set

4 YEARS +

72 CARDS

Fingercards Spatial Awareness This spatial awareness pack encourages spatial awareness through learning activities to help children acquire the following concepts: High/Low - Far/Near - The first/The last. The box contains: • 72 double-sided cards (10 x 10 cm). • 5 divided inserts. • 1 teacher’s leaflet including 1 evaluation sheet. 313 309 388 048 2

Who is the furthest from the red drawing with white dots?

Who is the highest? Who is the first?

82


NEW

3 YEARS +

Fingercards - Numbers 48 cards (6 sets of 8 self-correction cards) for: - Familiarising children with concepts of quantity, - Comparing quantities, - Counting up quantities, - Progressively recognising the numbers from 1 to 5.

Where is there a lot?

The box contains: • 48 double-sided cards (10 x 10 cm). • 5 divided inserts. • 1 teacher’s leaflet including 1 evaluation sheet.

How many are there?

Learning Games

6 sets of 8 cards

One concept and one question per set

Where is there the same amount?

313 309 388 071 0

6 sets of 12 cards

One concept and one question per set

4 YEARS +

72 CARDS

Fingercards - Numbers This counting pack helps children to understand numbers through learning activities with the following objectives: - fostering awareness of numbers, - comparing quantities, - counting quantities, - gradually recognising numbers from 1 to 10. The box contains: • 72 double-sided cards (10 x 10 cm). • 5 divided inserts. • 1 teacher’s leaflet including 1 evaluation sheet. 313 309 388 047 5

Which one has the same number? (depiction of fingers)

What is the missing number? Where are there the least…?

POINTS Self-correction activity. a 6 sets of 8 cards

One concept and one question per set

5 YEARS +

Fingercards - Numbers 48 cards (6 series of 8 self-correction cards) for: - counting amounts, - recognising numbers up to 15, - familiarising the child with number order, - comparing numbers, - adding or subtracting 1. The box contains: • 48 double-sided cards (10 x 10 cm). • 5 inserts. • 1 teacher’s leaflet including an evaluation sheet. 313 309 388 042 0

Add 1: How many will that be…?

How many are there…?

What is the hidden number?

83


Educational Games

Card Games Educards • Familiar game rules: beggar-my-neighbour, happy families, pairs, memory games. • Allow children to practise basic concepts in an entertaining way: vocabulary, counting, logic, phonology etc.

3 YEARS +

2-8 CHILDREN

Quantissimo - Counting Games André Jacquart

2 sets of 36 cards with wheels, comes with 9 different sets of game rules for gradually learning quantities from 1 to 6. These cards can also be used for traditional games such as “Happy Families”, “Beggar-MyNeighbour”, memory games and even “Crazy Eights”. • L/W card: 10 x 7 cm. • The box contains: 2 sets of 36 cards, 3 double-sided wheel supports (2 for the colour, 2 for the animal and 2 for the quantity), 2 detachable wheel pointers and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 195 0

36

36

CARDS

CARDS

Game 1: Countryside animals Children have to find a shared feature indicated by a random wheel instruction (animal, colour, quantities in a line of up to 4) within their set of cards (cards hidden or otherwise). The first child to get rid of all their cards is the winner. The level of difficulty can be increased by introducing a 2nd random wheel spin.

4 YEARS +

ane_

R_.in

dd

19

Game 2: Savannah animals Children have to find a shared feature indicated by random instruction (animal, colour, quantities in a constellation of up to 6) within their set of cards (cards hidden or otherwise).

50

2-8 CHILDREN

/10

28/09

avane R indd

50

CARDS

CARDS

1, 2, 3... Happy Families Games These two 50-card Happy Families games can be used by children to learn and practise the numbers from 1 to 10. • L/W card: 12 x 8 cm. • The box contains: 2 packs of 50 playing cards. 313 309 337 234 5

Reminder of the different representations of the same number on each card

Number bar on each card

Sample family: fruits Sample family: 3

84

Game 1: has ten 5-card families: on each card a number from 1 to 10 is shown in one of five different ways (objects, dots, counting cubes, fingers or numbers).

Game 2: has five 10-card families: on each card there is a collection of 1 to 10 objects (penguins, robots, flowers, fruit or elephants). A number bar on each card helps children make connections.


45 CARDS

4 YEARS +

Game 1: 45 cards - 9 families of 5 illustrated cards about 9 professional fields: health care jobs, food and drinks jobs, building jobs, artistic jobs, sports jobs, emergency service jobs, repair jobs, nature jobs and cleaning jobs. Cards in the same family are shown on the banner.

2-8 CHILDREN

Jobs

Educational Games

The cards in the family are shown at the top

2 Happy Families games for exploring the professional world of adults and improving vocabulary. While playing, children learn to recognise different jobs by analysing their uniforms and equipment. • L/W card: 12 x 8 cm. • The box contains: 1 game of 45 illustrated cards, 1 game of 50 photo cards and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 337 229 1

50 CARDS

Game 2: 50 photo cards - 10 families of 5 cards showing the main equipment for a given profession: doctor, fire fighter, cook, florist, mechanic, sea fisher, farmer, police officer, builder, office worker.

The cards in the family are shown at the top

Game 1: Eight 6-card families depicting families of objects (clothing, kitchen utensils, bathroom items, chairs, DIY tools, school materials, dishes, first aid).

4 YEARS +

2-8 CHILDREN

Lexico These two 48-card “Happy Families” games develop language skills by building children’s active vocabulary. • L/W card: 12 x 8 cm. • The box contains: 2 packs of 48 playing cards. 313 309 337 236 9

Game 2: Twelve 4-card families depict an object or an animal broken down into 4 parts (house, turtle, bicycle, computer, shoe, boat, flower, anorak, elephant, cockerel, piece of furniture, face).

4 transparent plastic holders

Card Holders 4 tabletop supports to hold and display cards. • L/W/H: 26 x 3 x 2.4 cm. • Set of 4 transparent plastic holders. 313 309 388 387 2

POINT Very stable andd capable of holding large ssize cards.

85


Educational Games

Board Games • Games specially designed for children aged from 3 to 6. • Simple and familiar game rules. • Allow children to practise basic concepts in an entertaining way: counting, vocabulary, environment, safety, etc.

3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

My 1st Safari Annick Mauffrey and Isdey Cohen

A basic route game on a safari-photo theme. The aim is to cross the savannah to reach the camp. Two play options are available: - Colour safari: the dice stick shows green - the player moves forward to the next green box; - Animal safari: the dice stick shows 2 - the player moves forward to the next box that has 2 animals.

• Board L/W: 60 x 32 cm. • Piece L/W/D: 4 x 3 x 1.2 cm. • The box contains: 1 game board, 4 pieces, 1 dice stick (4 colours), 1 dots on a dice (from 1 to 3) and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 343 132 5

3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Hen Run Stéphanie Charpiot Desbenoit

A simple and amusing introductory board game for very young children. The aim of the game is to be the first to fill up a nest with 4 eggs. Each child takes turns to throw the dice and turn the wheel the number of eggs shown on the dice (1 to 3). If a player lands on a chick, he or she takes an egg and places it in his or her nest. The other spaces hold lots of surprises: move back, move forward, skip a turn or imitate the noise made by the animal! • L/W board: 26 x 26 cm. • L/W nest: 13 x 12 cm. • H. egg: 3.6 cm. • The box contains: 1 cardboard game board, 4 nests and 16 eggs in varnished wood, and 1 fabric bag. 313 309 336 181 3

3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Birthday Tea Party Ronnie Manor and Gilit Metuki

1, 2, … 5 sweets, for counting from 1 to 5! Using the theme of birthdays which are familiar events and very much celebrated in the classroom, young children learn to count and identify collections of objects. Each player takes it in turn to spin the "sweets" wheel before moving forward the number of squares indicated. By moving around the board, players build up collections of objects (sweets, balloons, gifts) that they then exchange for a candle. The game is won by the first player to put all their candles on their cake. The birthday age, which is the same for everyone during a game, is set by the "candles" wheel at the start of the game. • L/W board: 36.5 x 25.5 cm. • L/W plate: 25 x 18 cm. • Ø game piece: 2.5 cm. • The box contains: 1 game board with 2 wheels, 4 cardboard plates, 80 wooden object counters, 1 fabric bag and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 189 9

86


3 YEARS +

2-6 CHILDREN

Educational Games

6 activity boards

MAGNETIC

PIECES

The Colour Game A game for young children to learn to follow instructions related to shape and colour. The aim of the game is to dress the characters on the boards with magnetic clothing in 6 different colours. The children can either make their own choice or follow the instructions on the dice (colour, clothes). • L/W activity board: 31 x 19 cm. • Dice side: 2.5 cm. • The box contains: 6 activity boards, 36 clothes in magnetic cardboard, 2 wooden dice and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 370 4

POINTS 18 frogs

4 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

• Negotiating a ggrid. • Perception P ti off surfaces.

5 models

16 Little Frogs Hervé Le Madec

Little frogs that want to swim out, but sticks block the way. A strategy and anticipation game for 2 players or teams. Place the sticks on the game board as shown on the model card. Each player takes it in turns to remove a stick corresponding to the colour shown on the dice. But be careful: removing a stick may allow one or more frogs to be released. Each frog released is then won by the opponent. The winner is the player who accumulates the most frogs. To vary the game, 5 models are provided on one card: an actual size model on one side, and 4 others in reduced format on the other. • L/W board: 21 x 21 cm. • H. frog: 3 cm. • The box contains: 1 silk-screen printed wooden board representing the pond with water lilies which mark the grid, 18 frogs, 60 wooden sticks (2 colours), 1 model card and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 188 2

5 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

60 sticks

MAGNETIC

PIECES

A Walk in the Woods Lucienne Brive

Which team – the red riding hoods or the wolves – will be first to reach grandmother’s house to give her as many pots of jam as possible? Split into 2 teams, the children must move through the woods and fill their basket with 10 pieces of fruit. • L/W board: 39 x 39 cm. • L/W basket: 25 x 22 cm. • The box contains: 1 cardboard game board and 2 baskets, 100 pieces of fruit in magnetic cardboard, 58 instruction cards, 10 pots of jam, 1 dice for moving forward, 1 dice for the number of pieces of fruit to gather, 2 wooden counters (red riding hood and wolf) and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 182 0

87


Educational Games

3 YEARS + 1 family of fish

40 magnetic counters

2-4 CHILDREN

MAGNETIC

PIECES

The Lake Monster Sylvain Ménager

Save a family of fish! A strategy and memory game. The aim of the game is to use a fishing rod to save a family of fish and put them in a fish tank before the monster eats them. A family is made up of 2 large and 2 small fish divided into 2 parts. But players have to be careful when fishing as there are surprises in store including a maggot and a shoe which have to be put back in the lake while players remember where they were placed to avoid catching them again. Two game strategies are possible: a cooperative format (everyone against the monster) or an opposition format (everyone has their own fish tank).

4 fish tanks

• L/W board: 39 x 39 cm. • L/H fish tank: 22.5 x 14 cm. • L/W counter: 3.6 x 3.6 cm. • The box contains: 1 game board depicting the lake, 4 fish tanks, 40 magnetic cardboard counters, 1 wooden fishing rod with magnetic hook and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 193 6

3 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

MAGNETIC

PIECES

The Wolf Game An educational board game on the theme of “A walk in the woods”. Simple and convivial game rules that propose 3 different games, always against the wolf. The children have to gather their forest products before the wolf is fully dressed, otherwise… He will eat them! • L/W board: 33 x 33 cm. • H/W wolf: 21.5 x 10 cm; H. leaf: 14 cm. • The box contains: 1 game board, 1 wolf in magnetic cardboard, 5 clothes magnets, 4 leaf-shaped cards, 46 tokens, 1 cloth storage bag and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 300 047 7

5 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Traffico A. Mauffrey, I. Cohen

Board game aimed at helping young children to discover and respect the essential rules of the road. This game puts children into the reallife situation of a journey to school. Each child, depending on whether they are a pedestrian or a car driver, takes a different route, following the instructions given by the dice, the cards and certain squares on the game’s map.

4 wooden counters

88

12 “traffic light” cards

• L/W board: 39 x 39 cm; H. car/pedestrian: 2.4/2.9 cm. • L/W card: 8.5 x 5.5 cm. • Dice side: 2 cm. • The box contains: 1 cardboard game map showing the 2 routes, 4 wooden counters in 4 colours (2 cars, 2 pedestrians), 1 dice with instructions (3 cars/ 3 pedestrians), 1 dice with dots from 1 to 6, 12 “traffic light” cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 388 304 9


G a m e s

NEW 2 dice 4 pirate pieces

4 YEARS +

The pirate treasure

2-4 CHILDREN

Treasure Hunt A first movement-based strategy game on the theme of a treasure hunt. The 2 instruction dice indicate movement on the grid. • L/W board: 34 x 25 cm. • H of piece: 3 cm. • Edge of dice: 2.5 cm. • The box contains: 1 cardboard game board, 4 pieces, 2 dice and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 201 8

Educational Games

B o a r d

Start

Ethics and our environment Manufactured using raw materials from regenerated forests (FSC approved).

4 YEARS +

2-4 CHILDREN

Sorting for the Planet Lucienne Brive

A route game for raising children’s awareness of environmental protection by sorting waste so that it can be recycled. The aim of this game is to be the first to unload 4 dustbins sorted by type of waste (household waste, glass, cardboard, plastic and metal) in the 2 recycling plants along the route. Each child has a bin lorry and 4 empty bins, and takes a waste card from the stack. But watch out for pitfalls along the way: getting a flat tyre, running out of petrol. • L/W board: 39 x 39 cm. • L/W sorting card: 4 x 3 cm. • H/L/D lorry counter: 2 x 3 x 1 cm. • The box contains: 1 cardboard game board representing a route, 4 cardboard bin lorries in which the child places his or her bins filled with 5 same-type cards, 92 sorting cards, 16 cardboard bins in 4 colours, 4 wooden lorries for moving forward, 1 dice, 1 fabric bag containing the stack, 1 summary card of the waste to sort and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 180 6

4 YEARS +

4 bin lorries / 20 types of waste Bin lorries

2-4 CHILDREN

Bon Appétit! Françoise Rastoin-Faugeron

Come and eat! An entertaining way of making children aware of the importance of a balanced diet for their health and development. Foods are organised into 6 groups, each of a different colour. The object of the game is to fill a meal tray with 1 food from each of the 6 food groups. 6 self-service stands are depicted on the game board, representing the 6 food groups. Each player takes it in turn to throw the dice and move forward over the coloured boxes (the same colours as the food groups) and instruction boxes, allowing them to win food counters. • L/W board: 60 x 32 cm. • L/W meal tray: 23 x 13.5 cm. • L/W counter: 4 x 4 cm. • The box contains: 1 game board and 4 cardboard meal trays, 48 photograph food counters, 4 wooden game pieces, 1 dice, 1 fabric bag and 1 set of game rules. 313 309 336 187 5

4 meal trays

POINTS • Photographs of foods. f • Learning L i about b t balanced diet.

4 jokers

89


90


To discover... N NEW

Skills Development and Early Motor Activities

P Activity House - Peek-a-boo

P.97 N NEW

laying, handling, touching… These are all an essential part of children’s early development. Through this variety of activities, free or supervised, children can develop their fine motor skills, as well as improve and coordinate their visual dexterity and body movement. Games allow children to exercise early learning skills. Designed for use in groups, our products are all intended to awaken children’s senses and develop their imagination, thereby allowing them to progress through discovery.

Sensory Skills Development Early Discoveries

p. 92

Fine Motor Skills

Nesting Actibaskets

P.109 NEW N

Move

p. 98

Slide on, Stack up, Screw

p. 102

Lacing

p. 106

Button, Lace up, Attach

p. 108

Magnetic Activities

p. 110

Construction Construction Games

p. 112

Jigsaws and Puzzles Early Lift-out Puzzles Discovery Lift-out Puzzles

p. 120 p. 122

3-D Cut-outs

p. 124

Body Discovery Cut-outs

p. 126

Wooden Puzzles

p. 127

Early Learning Mosaics and Tiling

p. 136

Early Learning Sets

p. 140

Multicoloured Animals

P.134 91


Sensory Skills Development

Early Discoveries

Security Toys 8 security toys that little ones will enjoy discovering. They are very simple, attractive shapes that are very easy to hold for little hands. • 7 fabric animals and 1 house. • Ø cushion: 40 cm. • H. body of zebra: 18 cm. • Fabric washable at 30°C. 313 309 399 377 9

Musical Bear 1 hanging musical soft toy. • Cotton and velvet cotton; surface washable. • L/H: 12 x 18 cm. 313 309 399 444 8

4 MONTHS +

Ding-Dong Ball Soft ball in coloured fabric, pleasant to the touch. Contains a small bell. • Flannel fabric washable at 30°C. • Ø: 17 cm. 313 309 399 446 2

Noise-Making Fabric Rattles 2 fabric rattles. 1 sound made by pressing on the body. • Cotton and velvet cotton; washable at 30°C. • H/Ø: 19 x 4 cm. • Set of 2. 313 309 399 443 1

3 MONTHS +

Sensory Book Bear Musical Mobile Key Teething Rattle 4 large keys to chew on.

92

• Plastic. • H. key: 10 cm. • Ø ring: 7 cm. 313 309 399 395 3

Musical mobile to help babies go to sleep with its gentle, calming music. • Mechanical music box with a start/stop button. • 10 fabric shapes, machine-washable at 30°C. • L of arch: 52 cm; H/W of bear: 15 x 14 cm. • Mobile assembly required. 313 309 399 469 1

Fabric book with sensory effects on each page: rustling sheets of paper, raised materials and embroidered decoration. The book closes with a Velcro® attachment and can be hung up with a fabric loop. • 4 pages in cotton and cotton velvet. • Machine washable at 30°C. • L/W: 14 x 14 cm. 313 309 399 475 2


A large, soft cushion for babies and for older infants to curl up comfortably. The fabric is very comfortable and pleasant to the touch, and is also waterproof. • Interior padding covered in waterproof fabric. • Exterior cover in cotton velvet, attached using elastic. • Machine washable at 30°C. • Green and blue, orange interior. • Ø: 80 cm. • H: 18 cm. 313 309 372 881 4

Easy to move

Sensory Skills Development

3 MONTHS +

Nest Baby Cushion

POINT Elasticated covering very easy to remove!

Spare Cover 313 309 372 889 0

Dring Scratch, scratch Detachable

Nature Activities

3 MONTHS +

Wooden Babygym

3 fabric modules which are deliberately plain so as not to overstimulate with excessive colouring and noise. The butterfly’s wings are in a fabric that gently rustles; the flower’s little bell tinkles.

To stimulate the baby’s senses, a wooden mobile that is stable, easy to transport and modular. 7 openings to suspend any mobile or toy at different heights. Activities can thus be varied, and can change along with the baby’s pace and curiosity. The complete set includes 1 wooden mobile and 3 nature mobiles.

• L. fastener: 22 cm. • Washable at 30°C. • Velcro® fasteners mean they can be attached to any other structure. 313 309 399 345 8

• Velcro® fastener. • L/H mobile: 93 x 59 cm. L/H of opening: 65 x 47 cm. • Mobiles washable at 30°C. 313 309 399 325 0

12 MONTHS +

Basket Quilted cotton basket for holding a doll and toys. Easy to fill, empty and transport with 2 handles. • Washable at 30°C. • L/W/H: 39 x 25.5 x 13 cm. 313 309 399 388 5

93


Sensory Skills Development

Manipano front view

Flick through the book

Working gears and ringing button

Look in the mirror

Make slide and turn the failling star

12 MONTHS +

Manipano Fun activities for developing young children’s dexterity and fine motor skills. Cogs to turn; a mirror to discover; bells to ring; wheels to spin. Play peek-a-boo through the little door. Manipano can be placed on the floor in two different positions so that the different activities can be accessed whilst the toddler is sitting or standing. Its unique shape and design give it a high degree of stability. • In varnished wood, comprising 10 activities. • H/W: 55.5 x 45.5 cm. 313 309 345 100 2

94

Manipano back view


D i s c o v e r i e s POINT Very stable due to its cross shape.

18 MONTHS +

Peek-a-boo Structure Game played on the floor, made up of 4 wooden boards. Each board has 3 small windows (making a total of 12, with sets of mirrors and illustrations). 6 different closing systems are available. Cross design for good stability. 4 children can play together. • In varnished wood. • L/W/H: 70 x 70 x 65 cm. 313 309 345 105 7

6 endearing illustrations that encourage children to speak

65 cm

4 handles allow easy movement

Sensory Skills Development

E a r l y

6 closure systems to develop fine motor skills

4 different angles

Encourages interaction and communication

Windows that open and close

Peek-a-boo game

POINT Hard-wearing and quiet.

Pull Along Penguin

Pull Along Elephant

Made from one piece, this toy is hard-wearing and waddles forward when pulled by its string. Rubberised wheels to reduce noise. Easy to hold.

Made from one piece, this toy is hard-wearing and nods back and forth at the same pace as the child is walking. Rubberised wheels to reduce noise. Easy to hold.

• In varnished wood. • H.: 12.5 cm. 313 309 399 380 9

• In varnished wood. • H.: 12.5 cm. 313 309 399 381 6

Pull Along Dog This little dog waddles along, waggling its head and tail as it moves. • Plastic. • L/W: 25 x 14 cm. 313 309 399 383 0

95


Sensory Skills Development

Bead Frame House Children slide the pieces through doors and windows. Each piece has a different shape and colour.

The Clown

• L/H: 29 x 29 cm. • Thickness piece: 1.2 cm. 313 309 375 127 0

• H. wire trajectory: 35 cm. • Ø/D base: 21 x 2 cm. 313 309 375 086 0

2 YEARS +

12 MONTHS +

12 MONTHS +

Muscle Car

Pick-up Truck

Lightweight car that is easy to roll due to its handle. The rubber wheels are silent.

Truck with easy handling due to its handle. Loading hatch opens and closes. Silent rubber wheels.

• Plastic. • L/W/H: 15 x 9 x 9 cm. 313 309 398 356 5

• Plastic. • L/W/H: 17 x 10 x 10 cm. 313 309 398 357 2

18 MONTHS + 12 MONTHS +

Roller Animals

Maxi Stacking Cups

4 animals that children will love to play with! Pull the animal backwards, let go and it shoots across the floor. Develops young children’s motor skills by encouraging them to chase the animals.

10 wide round cups. Plastic stacking cups in bright colours with or without pictures, in ten sizes. Each cup has a different picture.

• Plastic. • L/H: 9 x 10 cm. 313 309 399 364 9

• Ø biggest: 13.5 cm. • Ø smallest: 4.5 cm. 313 309 399 187 4

Plastic Shape Box

4 happy caterpillars to hit into the apple using either a toy hammer or the child’s own hands. As soon as one caterpillar disappears, another immediately re-appears.

6 pieces in 3 different geometric shapes, 1 colour per shape.The big key attached to the door enables children to unlock the box to get to the pieces, and then lock it again to carry on with the game. Fixed lid.

• Plastic. • H/Ø: 12 x 18 cm. 313 309 399 392 2

• Plastic. • L/W/H: 13 x 13 x 12 cm. 313 309 399 389 2

Apple Hammer Toy

96


D i s c o v e r i e s

NEW POINT • 7 different hand movements • 4 children can play with the set at the same time

Sensory Skills Development

E a r l y

On the front, a disc slide and a shape box

Trying out new hand movements

Developing hand dexterity

Encouraging hand-eye coordination Round window On the back

9 MONTHS +

Activity House - Peek-a-boo

• Set in varnished wood, consisting of 7 activities, supplied with 3 geometric pieces (round, square and triangle) and 2 discs in varnished wood. • L/W/H: 67 x 40 x 65 cm. • Supplied with 1 set of assembly instructions. 313 309 375 192 8

Mirror

Vertical opening 65 cm

Set of 7 different hands-on games to allow young children to practise and develop their fine motor skills, hand-eye coordination and visual discrimination. The common thread running through these games is “appearing, disappearing and reappearing”. • Abacus: 3 different rods to play with. • Shape box: 3 large pieces in 3 simple shapes. • Opening and closing (vertical, horizontal): 2 different hand movements for discovery games (illustrations). • Mirror. • Disc slide: 2 discs to place on the first rail, which then slide down to the container at the bottom by themselves. • Round window allows interactions between children.

Horizontal opening 67 cm

3-rod abacas

97


Fine Motor Skills

Move Mazes • Prepare children for drawing by developing motor control of the wrist. • Develop hand-eye coordination. • Develop observation, spatial awareness and visual discrimination.

NEW

POINT Progressive difficulty levels.

12 model sheets

2 YEARS + 3 YEARS +

Magnetic Maze - Numbers Children guide the balls using the magnetic pencil. The maze allows them to work on precision movements, recognising colours and tackling number skills: recognising the numbers from 1 to 10 and assembling collections. • Varnished wooden board covered with a sheet of plastic and wooden balls in 4 different colours. • Comes with 6 model sheets. • L/W/D: 29.5 x 29.5 x 1.5 cm. 313 309 337 227 7

Wooden Maze This game for toddlers develops the flexibility of their movements, stimulates their hand-eye coordination, and facilitates their recognition of colours and calculations. They each invent their own circuit or follow the proposed model sheets. • 5 colours in varnished wood. • Comes with 12 model sheets. • L/W/H: 29 x 29 x 7 cm. 313 309 333 186 1

POINT Motivational games for 1 or 2 children.

Magnetic balls Ballpoint pencil

Magnetic balls

MAGNETIC

PIECES

98

2 pencils

MAGNETIC

3 YEARS + PIECES

Magnetic Floral Frame

Magnetic Maze

Using a magnetic pencil, children learn to direct a ballpoint pen. Coordination and fine motor skills exercise. This game also helps children to recognise colours and start learning how to count.

1 or 2 children move the magnetic balls using the 2 pencils. They choose a route to reach the final target. They learn to associate their movements with the observed path.

• In wood, with a plastic covering. • Base L/W/thickness: 29 x 29 x 1.5 cm. 313 309 337 224 6

• In wood, with a plastic covering. • L/W/D base: 39 x 34 x 2 cm. 313 309 337 216 1


Fine Motor Skills

Tracing Stencils • An original way to practise tracing the basic shapes used in writing. • The child follows each stencil route without lifting the pencil and takes into account the direction of the writing. • The child progressively gains familiarity, fluidity and control of their movements. • An adult can correct a position, how the pencil is being held and the direction of tracing. The pencil stores away in the base

Start on the left

Diagonals • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 35 x 10 x 1.5 cm. • L/Ø pencil: 8 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 204 8

Bridges

Crenels

• In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 35 x 10 x 1.5 cm. • L/Ø pencil: 8 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 207 9

• In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 35 x 10 x 1.5 cm. • L/Ø pencil: 8 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 206 2

Loops

Waves

• In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 35 x 10 x 1.5 cm. • L/Ø pencil: 8 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 208 6

• In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 35 x 10 x 1.5 cm. • L/Ø pencil: 8 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 205 5

NEW

Graphic Stencils - Capital Letters This wooden kit allows children to work on recognising the 26 letters by touch from the space. A mark at the bottom-right of the square indicates the direction of the letter. Vowels are in red and consonants in blue. The letters are put away vertically in the case.

Pencils - Set of 8 These 8 pencils provide a complementary approach to recognition of the letters alongside touch.

• In varnished wood. • L/W/D letter: 7.4 x 7.4 x 1 cm.

• In varnished wood. • L/Ø: 8 x 1 cm.

313 309 375 211 6

313 309 375 212 3

99


Fine Motor Skills

M o v e

Manipano Activity Panels

• 5 panels, 5 actions, 4 sensory objectives: touch, fine motor skills, sight and hearing. • These panels allow for experimentation and stimulate children’s imaginations. • The wall mounting kit is sold separately.

Manipano - Mounting Kit This kit allows you to mount Manipano products on the wall or on Activity Units. 313 309 373 226 2

NEW

Manipano - House A fun pictorial pathway for experiencing different motions and encouraging fine motor skills.

Manipano - Gestural

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm.

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 199 7

313 309 375 194 2

Manipano - Audio

Manipano - Visual

3 different materials to discover.

The 2 wheels turn to produce two different sounds.

Moving the handle makes two different visual effects appear.

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 198 0

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 197 3

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 196 6

Manipano - Tactile

100

Spiral path for experiencing circular movement.


Fine Motor Skills

Fit Inside

26

30 cm

40 cm

PIECES

3 YEARS +

A, B, C For a first approach to the alphabet. Each piece is slightly raised for an easier grip. Varnished wood cut-out. • L/W/D base: 40 x 30 x 1 cm. • H Letter: 6 cm. 313 309 330 103 1

12 MONTHS +

Mini Stacking Tower 5 wooden rings for stacking in the right order, finishing with the head. • H: 15 cm. Ø small ring: 5 cm. 313 309 399 195 9

3 YEARS +

Puzzle Tray

Flower Puzzle

The child builds the black base composed of 4 sections, then slots the 18 different shapes into the correct shaped holes in the base.

The flower is built up by matching pieces of 3 colours and 6 different geometric shapes.

• 1 varnished natural wood tray, 18 varnished wood pieces in 9 shapes and 6 colours, 4 sections of black wood. • L/W/D base: 22.5 x 22.5 x 3 cm. • Ø/D shape: 5.5 x 2 cm. 313 309 399 197 3

• 18 varnished wooden pieces. • Base L/W/thickness: 18.5 x 14.5 x 1.5 cm. • Piece L/W/thickness: 6 x 5 x 1 cm. 313 309 399 196 6

Geo-Wood

Geo-Shapes

16 pieces in 4 shapes in different sizes and colours for interlocking and classifying on a square base.

16 hollowed pieces numbered from 1 to 4. 4 shapes and colours for threading onto rods.

• 1 varnished wood tray: L/W/D: 16 x 16 x 1.5 cm. • H. piece: 8/7/6/5 cm. 313 309 399 271 0

• 1 varnished wood tray: L/W/D: 17.5 x 17.5 x 1.5 cm. • Square: 6 x 6 cm. 313 309 399 272 7

Multi-Sided Shape Sorter The 5 single shapes slot into the top of the box and the 4 double shapes slot into the sides. The cover lifts up to retrieve the pieces. • 1 box in plain varnished wood. • 9 coloured wooden shapes. • L/W/D: 17 x 17 x 13 cm. 313 309 399 190 4

Plastic Shape Box 6 pieces in 3 different geometric shapes, 1 colour per shape. The big key attached to the door enables children to unlock the box to get to the pieces, and then lock it again to carry on with the game. Fixed lid. • Plastic. • L/W/H: 13 x 13 x 12 cm. 313 309 399 389 2

101


Fine Motor Skills

Slide on, Stack up, Screw

2 bases

SEE ALSO Abacolor Set

20 pieces

p. 140

2 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Abacolor 4 plastic shapes in 4 colours, to be stacked on abacuses consisting of 4 rods of different lengths. The pieces are light, large and easy to handle. • 2 bases and 20 plastic sharpes. • L/W/thick. of abacus: 21 x 6.5 x 2.2 cm. • H of rod: 14 cm. • Ø of shape: 4.5 cm. • Set of 2 plastic abacuses and 20 plastic pieces in 4 shapes and 4 colours. 313 309 304 999 5

4 shapes, 4 colours

Ø 4.5 cm

2 YEARS +

Manipuloo Large, colourful and durable pieces to develop the dexterity of young children. • Abstract shapes and 4 different colours to stimulate the imagination. • All-plastic pieces. • Pin H: 18.2 cm. • Piece L: 5 to 13 cm. • Piece thickness: 1.2 cm. • Screw-on piece diam.: 4 cm.

20 PIECES

Manipuloo

102

30 PIECES

Large Manipuloo

The set comprises 20 pieces: 16 pieces in 4 shapes and 4 colours, 2 single pins, 2 screw-on pieces.

The set comprises 30 pieces in hard plastic: 20 slide-on pieces (5 shapes), 6 screw-on pieces and 4 pins (2 individual pins, 2 bases with 2 pins).

313 309 375 167 6

313 309 375 067 9


Fine Motor Skills

Triolo • • • •

The figurative shapes stimulate the imagination. Large-size, easy-to-hold pieces, pleasant to the touch. Vertical activity surface. Individual or workshop activity.

24 pieces 4 shapes and 3 colours

2 YEARS +

Triolo The basic set includes large objects in 4 different shapes and 3 different colours for the children to slide onto a base with 3 pins. For free-play activities or as an addition to Triolo Workshop.

2 3-pin bases

• 2 bases, 24 plastic objects (4 shapes and 3 colours). • L/W/D base: 19 x 6.5 x 1.5 cm. • H/Ø pin: 14 x 2 cm. • H. cone: 5.5 cm. • Ø base: 6 cm. 313 309 375 091 4

48 pieces 4 shapes and 3 colours

3 YEARS +

Triolo Set

20 workcards

20 workcards

Front/ Back

This workshop is designed as an activity for children to arrange objects vertically. The materials include large objects of 4 different shapes and 3 different colours for the children to slide onto a base with 3 pins. The simple, coloured shapes of the pieces have a pleasant texture and are easy to grip for young children. They can be arranged in any way and therefore foster the development of their imagination. The 20 workcards of increasing difficulty are a means of introducing children to reading and recreating a model. • 4 bases (L/W/D: 19 x 6.5 x 1.5 cm) • H/Ø pin: 14 x 2 cm. • H. cone: 5.5 cm. • Ø base: 6 cm. • The box contains: 4 bases, 48 plastic objects and 20 double-sided strong cardboard workcards (23 x 16.5 cm). 313 309 375 092 1

POINTS 4 bases

• Workshop for 4 or 6 children. • IIntroduction t d ti tto reading and reproducing a model.

103


Fine Motor Skills 3 YEARS +

Bolt Tree

2 YEARS +

A solid wooden tree with different sized branches, 10 varnished wooden balls in assorted colours and 4 mushrooms. Not suitable for children under 36 months.

Screw-on Ladybird

• H: 24 cm. • Ø ball: 3 cm. • Ø/D base: 15 x 2 cm. 313 309 375 002 0

• L/W/D base: 20 x 18 x 1.5 cm. • Ø screw: 3.3 cm. • H. feet: 2 cm. 313 309 375 073 0

Wooden base representing a ladybird containing 6 black screws.

My First Workbench To hammer, screw, turn... A robust, stable workbench. Can be placed on the floor or on a table. It is equipped with a tray to store the tools.

15 cm

23 cm

8 cm

• Workbench and 15 wooden tools: screws, nuts and bolts, hammer, screwdriver, spanner, strips in various sizes. • L/W/H: 26 x 12 x 17cm. 313 309 399 441 7

4 YEARS +

Wooden Construction Set 104 varnished and coloured wooden pieces (slats, cubes, nuts, screws, silent wheels, 1 screwdriver, 1 spanner) for making representative shapes or technical creations. To introduce technology. Supplied in a storage barrel.

104

• 104 varnished wooden pieces. • L of slats: 11/15/19 and 23 cm. • L of screw: 3.5/4.2/6.7 and 8.4 cm. • Ø wheel: 8 cm. • Cube edge: 3.5 cm. • H of spanner and screwdriver: 15 cm. 313 309 398 358 9

2 YEARS +

64 PIECES

Maxibolts 32 nuts and 32 bolts in 4 shapes, 4 colours and 4 diameters. • Ø bolt: 2.7/2.3/2.1/1.7 cm. • H.: 6 cm. • W. nut: 4.8/4.5/4 cm. • Set of 64 pieces. 313 309 303 029 0


o n ,

S t a c k

u p ,

S c r e w

24 PIECES

Maxi-Chains 24 big open chains to make a long string. Easy for small hands to handle.

Fine Motor Skills

S l i d e

• Plastic. • Piece L/W: 14 x 8 cm. 313 309 399 267 3

2 YEARS +

12 PIECES

Maxi Fishes - Set of 12 12 large fish in 4 different colours to be assembled by linking them together in a chain. Easy for small hands to handle. • Plastic. • L/W: 12 x 9 cm. 313 309 342 268 2

2 YEARS +

60 PIECES

Chain Links 60 chain links in 4 different colours, to be assembled by clipping them together. • Plastic. • L/W: 6.3 x 4.2 cm. 313 309 399 357 1

16 PIECES

Tactibeads Different sized beads with end-pieces that young children can easily fit together to make a necklace.

POINT Pleasant to touuch raised pieces pieces.

• L/Ø: 8.6 x 5 cm. • 16 plastic beads. 313 309 399 263 5

NEW 2 YEARS +

Maxi Tongs Tongs for working on precision movements and 3-finger gripping. • Soft green plastic. • L: 18 cm. 313 309 342 275 0

105


Fine Motor Skills

• Develop dexterity and concentration. • Wide variety of easy-to-use materials for free or supervised activities. • Many possible further activities: sorting, categorising, language, etc.

2 YEARS +

Sensory Baby Beads 10 beads with different raised patterns for threading onto 1 lace consisting of 4 rods that snap together. For learning early threading movements and developing the sense of touch and hand-eye coordination. • 10 beads and 1 lace consisting of 4 plastic rods. • Ø bead: 4.5 cm; Ø bead hole: 0.75 cm; L of lace: 73 cm. 313 309 315 060 8

18 MONTHS +

Babybeads 48 plastic beads in 4 shapes and 4 different colours.

4.5 cm

• Edge of cube: 3.5 cm. • Ø sphere: 4.5 cm. 313 309 315 000 4

3 YEARS +

Anilacing 12.5 cm

8 animals in 4 assorted colours. Comes with 9 laces in 3 colours. • H. animal: 12.5 cm. • L. lace: 50 cm. 313 309 333 122 9

POINT Easy to handlee.

2 YEARS +

Animal Lacing Funny lace-up animals. Includes 4 animals and 4 laces.

106

15.5 cm

• In varnished wood. • L/W/D cow: 15.5 x 9 x 1 cm. • L. lace: 1.16 m. 313 309 333 302 5


Fine Motor Skills 2 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Lacing Shapes Goldilocks and the 3 Bears

16 figures in varnished wood

4 laces 16 model sheets

For free exploration of a story that is well known to children. The large wooden figures are stable and easy to handle. The laces have long plastic-coated ends to make threading easier. • 13 figures in varnished wood and 4 laces. • H of figures: 6.3 and 6.8 cm; thickness: 1.5 cm. • L of lace: 70 cm. 313 309 375 145 4

Lacing Shapes Little Red Riding Hood For free exploration of a story that is well known to children. The large wooden figures are stable and easy to handle. The laces have long plastic-coated ends to make threading easier. • 13 figures in varnished wood and 4 laces. • H of figures: 6.3 and 6.8 cm; thickness: 1.5 cm. • L of lace: 70 cm.

16 figures in varnished wood

4 laces 16 model sheets

313 309 375 147 8

POINTS • The pieces stay upright. • Wooden end-pieces make threading together easy.

Lace-up Farm 12 shapes in bright colours (wooden). Large pieces, easy to handle, very stable. The lace has a wooden “needle” on the end to help threading. • L/W/D tractor: 7 x 6.5 x 2 cm. • 1 lace: 80 cm. 313 309 399 379 3

107


Fine Motor Skills

Button, Lace up, Attach Fabrics • • • •

Encourage handling of endearing objects. Promote exploration of the senses. Develop dexterity. Washable at 30°C.

2 YEARS +

Actidolls Large dolls to help develop children’s fine motor skills. Clothing has different fastening systems (press studs, Velcro®, buttons, laces, zips, three kinds of belt buckle and braces). Each doll is dressed in three different styles of clothing: for girl dolls, blouse, dress and bonnet; for boy dolls, shirt, dungarees and jacket. The dolls’ bodies are made of soft velvet.

Actidoll Girl 313 309 375 107 2

• H. doll: 62 cm.

Actidoll Boy 313 309 375 108 9

Giant-size dolls: 62 cm

2 YEARS +

Russian Dolls Cilou Zelkine

These 6 padded cotton dolls of different sizes fit inside each other. They open and close with different attachments (buckles, Velcro®, zip, laces, buttons).

Pouches for putting dolls to bed or taking them for a walk

• H. large doll: 34.5 cm. • H. small doll: 10 cm. 313 309 375 098 3 34.5 cm

POINT Free standing.

108

6 dolls in increasing sizes


Nesting Actibaskets 6 baskets for playing, imitating, carrying, emptying and filling. Each padded fabric basket has a different type of closing mechanism: Velcro®, zip, 3 types of button and a clip. The baskets, in different sizes and colours, can be placed inside each other easily. • 6 nested fabric baskets. • Washable at 30°C. • L x H large basket: 37 x 21 cm. • L x H purse: 15 x 11 cm. 313 309 370 301 9

Fine Motor Skills

NEW 2 YEARS +

21 cm

The 6 baskets can be placed inside each other easily.

11 cm Satin

Velvet

15 MONTHS +

Tactile Imps These 8 little imps in 8 different materials, pleasant to the touch, are stored in a big basket. Each character’s sleeper and bonnet are made in the same fabric. Differences in touch (smooth, rough, soft, flexible, etc.) encourage the child with sensory exploring. The bonnet is attached to the head, and the eyes are embroidered. The complete collection includes: 8 imps and 8 outfits in different materials (cotton, satin, velvet, wool, linen, etc.) and 1 quilted cotton basket with 2 handles.

Cotton

26 cm

• H. imp: 26 cm. • L/W/H basket: 30 x 21 x 14 cm. 313 309 399 346 5

109


Fine Motor Skills

Magnetic Activities Magnetic Petipano • • • •

Handle objects vertically. Develop fine motor skills. Coordinate both hands. Removable base.

MAGNETIC 2 YEARS + PIECES

POINTS

Bob and Lisa Get Dressed

• Vertical magneetic panel. • For F discovering di i the human body.

To discover the human body, 2 children to dress in different clothes. Illustration of unclothed character on one side and clothes for each part of the body on the other. The board and pieces are magnetic.

Front/ Back

Front/ Back

Bob Gets Dressed

Lisa Gets Dressed

• In magnetic wood. • L/W board: 27 x 19.5 cm. • H/W T-shirt: 6.5 x 7 cm. • The complete set includes: 1 board on a removable base and 9 wooden pieces representing items of clothing. 313 309 375 200 0

• In magnetic wood. • L/W board: 27 x 19.5 cm. • H. dress: 10.5 cm. • The complete set includes: 1 board on a removable base and 9 wooden pieces representing items of clothing. 313 309 375 201 7

Front/ back

MAGNETIC 2 YEARS + PIECES

110

Front/ back

MAGNETIC 2 YEARS + PIECES

Savannah Fun

Let’s Eat!

To bring the savannah to life, 3 animals in 3 parts, can be combined and positioned in the scene.

The child lays the table and creates a meal using the cutlery and the food on the back of the panel.

• The set consists of a panel, a base and 9 pieces. • In varnished, screen-printed wood. • Panel H/W/thickness: 27.5 x 19.5 x 0.5 cm. 313 309 375 203 1

• The set consists of a panel, a base and 9 pieces. • In varnished, screen-printed wood. • Panel H/W/thickness: 27.5 x 19.5 x 0.5 cm. 313 309 375 202 4


47 cm

40 cm

30 cm

Fine Motor Skills

56 cm

MAGNETIC 2 YEARS + PIECES

2 Magnetic Boards Set of 2 boards sold without pieces. 313 309 375 125 6 MAGNETIC 3 YEARS + PIECES

Weather for Children An amusing, attractive resource to introduce the weather and foster awareness of the concept of the passage of time. The children are invited to: - observe the weather; - use the roulette wheel and symbol counters to make a weather forecast; - dress Little Bear to suit the forecast. Using a practical, everyday situation, they gradually acquire the appropriate vocabulary (weather vocabulary, the language of clothes and the seasons) and are introduced to the concept of chronology (yesterday, today, tomorrow).

MAGNETIC

2 YEARS + PIECES

• The complete set includes: 1 magnetic panel (56 x 40 cm) with 2 mounting eyelets; 24 clothing pieces; 24 weather counters; 4 season counters; 4 arrows and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 305 164 6

38 PIECES

Magnetic Board and Pieces A board with wooden geometric magnetic shapes for creating drawings and mosaics. • L/W/D board: 47 x 30 x 1 cm; L/W large rectangle: 10 x 2.5 cm. • The game comprises: 1 magnetic board and 38 magnetic pieces (9 shapes, 4 colours). 313 309 375 076 1

MAGNETIC

2 YEARS + PIECES

Magnetic Erasable Whiteboards Whiteboards that can be written on and/or have magnetic items put on them. For everyday classroom activities. For use with felt tip pens that are erasable with water.

MAGNETIC

PIECES

Magnetic Storage Pocket Pocket is attached to a metal surface and used to store small items. In transparent plastic with a gusset for easy access.

• Plastic and metal. • L/W: 33 x 24 cm. • Set of 6.

• Magnetic pocket in transparent plastic. • L/W: 24 x 20 cm. 313 309 388 064 2

MAGNETIC 3 YEARS + PIECES

38 PIECES

313 309 375 149 2

2 YEARS +

40 PIECES

2 YEARS +

40 PIECES

Farm Magnets

Extra Basic Magnetic Shapes

Extra Magnetic Shapes

38 wooden magnetic pieces.

40 wooden magnetic pieces.

For children to create their own story, 40 wooden magnetic pieces (20 different duplicated objects) with a farm theme. Can be placed on any metal object.

• 9 shapes, 4 colours. 313 309 375 097 6

• 10 shapes, 4 colours. 313 309 375 077 8

• H. farmer’s wife: 5 cm. 313 309 375 124 9

111


Construction

Construction Games • Promote creativity, concentration and fine motor skills. • A wide variety of shapes, colours, materials and modes of assembly. • Lots of pieces for group games.

12

2 YEARS +

cm

58 PIECES

Flexible Animal Bricks Bricks for building a farm, a zoo or a house. 6 animals complete creations and bring them to life. • L/W/H large brick: 12 x 6 x 5 cm. • L/H zebra: 10.5 x 7.5 cm. • 58 pieces: 52 flexible plastic bricks in 4 sizes and 4 colours and 6 animals. 313 309 333 422 0

2 YEARS +

30 PIECES

Flexible Train Bricks A train comprising bricks, wagons and travellers.

6 cm

• L/W/H wagon: 16 x 10 x 5 cm. • 30 flexible plastic pieces. 313 309 333 423 7

2 YEARS +

100 PIECES

Maxibricks 100 semi-rigid plastic bricks in 4 sizes and 4 colours for making large constructions. The wheels can be used to make mobile creations such as a lorry, tractor, etc. The bricks fit together very easily.

112

• L/W/H large brick: 12 x 6 x 6 cm. • Ø wheel: 6 cm. 313 309 333 424 4


Construction 2 YEARS +

120 PIECES

Pingrip A variety of shapes and bright colours for building static or mobile objects by simply snapping pieces together with grip pins. Comes with 4 figures. • Edge square: 5 cm; Ø wheel: 4 cm. • Set of 120 pieces. 313 309 333 135 9

cm

5 cm

.5

12

12.

2 YEARS +

25 cm

12.5

cm

30 PIECES

Giant Bricks 30 large, very lightweight solid bricks in semi-rigid plastic that are easy to snap together. For building stable constructions or imaginative paths. The set comes with 2 sizes and 4 colours to match. For use indoors or outdoors. • Semi-rigid plastic. • L/W/H of large brick: 25 x 12.5 x 8 cm (blue and green; weight: 260 g). • L/W/H of small brick: 12.5 x 12.5 x 8 cm (red and yellow; weight: 135 g). 313 309 333 425 1

Lightweight bricks for quiet play

3 YEARS +

36 PIECES

Batibriques 36 bricks in tough cardboard to build and re-build all sorts of constructions. These very light, solid bricks can support the weight of a child. The set comes with 3 sizes and 3 colours. • L/W/H: 4 of 30 x 15 x 7.5 cm; 8 of 15 x 15 x 7.5 cm; 24 of 15 x 7.5 x 7.5 cm. • Delivered unassembled, with assembly instructions. 313 309 333 294 3

36 solid, hard-wearing bricks

113


Construction

MAGNETIC 3 YEARS + PIECES

68 PIECES

Magnetic Blocks Magnetic pieces in different shapes to build cars, animals or characters. The pieces are very easy to handle. • 68 pieces in magnetic wood. • Cube side: 3 cm. 313 309 333 303 2

2 sizes, 4 colours

MAGNETIC

3 YEARS + PIECES

120 PIECES

Constructamagnet A collection of pieces based on rods and magnetic balls that enables experimentation with magnetism through play. The child produces 3D constructions. The game is made up of rods of 2 sizes and spheres. • L. rods: 8.5 and 5 cm. • Ø sphere: 3.6 cm. • 120 magnetic plastic pieces. 313 309 333 256 1

MAGNETIC

2 YEARS + PIECES

59 PIECES

Magnetico Set of 59 parts, fully magnetic. This fun game gives children the ability to build many different things - easy to use with no risk of doing it wrong. Magnetic blocks integrated in the material provide game safety. • L/W/thickness rectangle: 8 x 2.5 x 1.7 cm. • 59 magnetic pieces, including 4 characters and 4 vehicles. 313 309 333 312 4

3 YEARS +

Magnetico Cards 12 double-sided photo cards. On one side of the card is a photo of the object to build and the parts to use; on the other side are the 6 assembly steps. 12 models separated into 3 sets to help children start reading images. Models that can be made with the Magnetico set (59 pieces). • L/W card: 29.7 x 21 cm. 313 309 333 311 7

114

Front/Back


G a m e s

12 model cards

134

4 YEARS + Front/ Back

4 YEARS +

Poly-M® Cards 12 model cards with photos. On one side of the card is a photo of the object to create with the parts used, on the other side are the 6 assembly steps. • Card models created with Poly-M Nathan®. • L/W card: 29.7 x 21 cm. 313 309 305 143 1

Construction

C o n s t r u c t i o n

PIECES

®

Poly-M

134 pieces (bars, sockets, bolts, wheels, tubes). A wide variety of flexible plastic shapes to stimulate the child’s imagination. • L. bar: 20/13/9/5.5/3.5 cm. • H. character: 7 cm. 313 309 305 149 3

Poly-M® Add-on 71 pieces. 313 309 305 148 6

4 shapes identified by a different colour

3 YEARS +

90 PIECES

Tubulo

2 YEARS +

Assembly game for creating a wide variety of original constructions. The tubes, in 4 different shapes (straight, cross, curved, and T-shaped), fit easily into each other. • 4 shapes and 4 colours. • L/Ø straight tube: 8 x 2.6 cm. • 90 plastic pieces. 313 309 399 213 0

86 PIECES

Babyconnect Various different shapes that are easy to fit together to make weird and wonderful creations. • 86 plastic pieces in 4 shapes and 6 colours. • Star shape L: 6.5 cm. 313 309 333 296 7

SEE ALSO 25 cm

Cut-up magnetic fruits p. 153

POINT Invisible magnets inserted in wood.

MAGNETIC

2 YEARS + PIECES

Magnetic Animals A fun activity where children reconstitute a giraffe, an elephant, a horse or a cow. Each plastic animal comprises 4 magnetic parts (head, body, front legs, hind legs). The children can mix up the different parts using their imagination to create wonderfully strange and funny animals. • 16 magnetic plastic pieces. • L/W/H horse: 17 x 5 x 14.5 cm. 313 309 333 360 5

MAGNETIC 2 YEARS + PIECES

12 PIECES

Magnetic Characters These thick wooden coloured pieces can be easily stacked up to create different characters. The pieces attract and repel each other. This game introduces children to the basics of magnetism. • Average Ø/D: 5 x 2 cm. • 12 wooden pieces. 313 309 399 387 8

115


Construction

4 YEARS +

Mini Bricks 600 hard plastic bricks (6 sizes, 6 colours) allow children to build all sorts of different things. They can also use model cards. These cards show the model to be built and, on the back, the pieces to use, with instructions numbered 1 to 9. A poster suggests another 29 models.

600 pieces, 2 shapes, 6 colours

12 model cards Front/Back

• The set includes: 600 hard plastic bricks, 12 laminated model cards, 1 poster. • Supplied in a transparent plastic tray. • L/W/H large brick: 2.5 x 1.2 x 1.2 cm. • L/W card: 17 x 15 cm. 313 309 333 323 0

3 YEARS +

Coulisso Construction game with 300 rigid plastic pieces for the development of creativity, fine motor skills and logic. The bricks are put together vertically or by sliding them together from the side. Children invent their own constructions or follow flat or 3D models suggested on the posters. • The set includes: 300 plastic pieces (square, triangle, wheel, axle, connecting parts); 6 colours. • 9 double-sided A3 posters. • L/H of square brick: 3.5 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 333 321 6

4 YEARS +

360 PIECES

Clics Construction game in plastic with 360 interlocking pieces that click together using a swivel-hinge principle enabling volumes to be created.

116

• L/W block: 5 x 5 cm. • Comes in a transparent plastic bucket. • 360 pieces: red, yellow, green, black and transparent blocks, wheels and axles. 313 309 333 227 1


3 YEARS +

G a m e s

Construction

C o n s t r u c t i o n

324 PIECES

Bambouchi Cylindrical tubes to assemble using rosettes each with 8 branches. Assortment of 3 colours. • L/Ø: 2.5/15 x 0.6 cm. • Set of 324 pieces. 313 309 306 533 9

3 YEARS +

268 PIECES

Bambouchicolour Soft and flexible plastic rods used to make 3D models with curves. The rods are linked using a starshaped connecting piece. 268 plastic pieces (170 rods in 3 sizes, 3 colours and 98 connecting pieces). • L. rod: 15/10/5 cm. • Ø star: 3 cm. 313 309 306 535 3

Bambouchicolour Cards 12 model cards with photos. On one side of the card is a photo of the object to create with the parts used; on the other side are the 4 assembly steps. 12 simple and uncluttered models to help children start reading images. Models that can be made with Bambouchicolour. • L/W card: 29.7 x 21 cm. • 12 cards and 1 table summarising the models suggested. 313 309 305 163 9

Front/ Back

117


Construction

Construction Sets • Model cards develop self-sufficiency.

23.5

cm

Ø: 3 cm

2 YEARS +

161 PIECES

Technico Junior® An early building set specifically designed for toddlers enabling them to construct simple machines and creatures. • L/W 6-hole slat : 23.5 x 3.5 cm. • Ø nut: 3 cm. • 161 coloured pieces (slats with holes, screws, nuts and 1 spanner). 313 309 333 507 4

Extra Pieces for Technico Junior® 81 hard-wearing plastic pieces. 313 309 333 506 7

4 YEARS +

Technico Junior® Cards 12 model cards with photos. On one side of the card is a photo of the object to create with the parts used; on the other side are the 4 or 6 assembly steps. • L/W card: 29.7 x 21 cm. 313 309 305 147 9

4 YEARS +

Wooden Construction Set 104 varnished and coloured wooden pieces (slats, cubes, nuts, screws, silent wheels, 1 screwdriver, 1 spanner) for making representative shapes or technical creations. To introduce technology. Supplied in a storage barrel. • 104 varnished wooden pieces. • L of slats: 11/15/19 and 23 cm. • L of screw: 3.5/4.2/6.7 and 8.4 cm. • Ø wheel: 8 cm. • Cube edge: 3.5 cm. • H of spanner and screwdriver: 15 cm.

118

313 309 398 358 9

2 YEARS +

My First Tool Kit Advanced development of motor skills. Imitate grown-ups with this battery-operated drill, spanner and screwdriver. Each tool box includes: 1 battery-operated drill with three interchangeable bits (for drilling or screwing), 1 spanner, 1 screwdriver, 3 bolts and 4 planks. • L. large plank: 11.5 cm. • Requires 2 x R6 1.5 volt batteries. 313 309 399 204 8


4 YEARS +

G a m e s

96 PIECES

Mobilo 96 pieces (cubes, panels, wheels). The pieces fit together to create mechanical, static or mobile constructions. In hard plastic. • Cube side: 3.5 cm. • L/W rectangle: 7.5 x 3.5 cm. 313 309 305 427 2

Construction

C o n s t r u c t i o n

Front/ Back

Extra Pieces for Mobilo-Nathan® 54 pieces in hard plastic: cubes, joints, parallelepipeds, wheels and heads. 313 309 305 422 7

4 YEARS +

Mobilo Cards 12 model cards with photos. On one side of the card is a photo of the object to create with the parts used, on the other side are the 6 or 8 assembly steps. • L/W card: 29.7 x 21 cm. 313 309 305 145 5

Mobilo® Ethnic Heads 8 heads to bring the Mobilo game to life. • H.: 4.5 and 3.5 cm. 313 309 305 402 9

Front/ Back

4 YEARS +

Gearwheel Cards

4 YEARS +

95 PIECES

12 model cards with photos. On one side of the card is a photo of the object to create with the parts used, on the other side are the 6 or 8 assembly steps.

Gearwheels

• L/W card: 29.7 x 21 cm. 313 309 305 144 8

• Panel side: 11.7 cm. • Ø wheel: 6 cm. 313 309 375 114 0

95 pieces (panels, cogwheels, connecting pieces). Coloured shapes in hard plastic to make simple mechanical gearwheels.

Ø: 6 cm

119


Jigsaws and Puzzles

Early Lift-out Puzzles 2 YEARS + • • • •

An introduction to colours, shapes, sizes and materials. Pleasant and easy to handle. Suitable and safety-compliant for children under 3. In high-quality varnished wood.

A big wooden button for easy handling

4

4

PIECES

PIECES

Easy handling

In My Garden 4 different animals. Once a piece has been removed, the main colour of the animal can be seen on the bottom of the base. Pieces overlapping the base holding up vertically. • Base size: 22 cm; thickness: 2 cm. • 4 pieces in varnished wood. 313 309 330 137 6

My Little Friends 4 contrasting animals with different graphic patterns. • Base size: 22 cm. • L/H cow: 9 x 5.5 cm. • 4 pieces. 313 309 330 136 9

Varnished wooden trays with 4 interlocking puzzle pieces. • L/W/D base: 24 x 24 x 1.5 cm. • L/D piece: 10 x 1.2 cm.

4

PIECES

Fruits 313 309 330 130 7

4

PIECES

Vehicles 313 309 330 131 4

Wooden Cut-outs 2 new cut-outs which develop fine motor skills thanks to the small gripping buttons. Made in screen-printed wood.

5

PIECES

Gardening • 5 wooden pieces. • 1 wooden base. • Base: 30 x 8 cm; thickness: 0.8 cm. 313 309 330 149 9

5

PIECES

Savannah

120

• 5 wooden pieces. • 1 wooden base. • Base: 30 x 8 cm; thickness: 0.8 cm. 313 309 332 027 8


Jigsaws and Puzzles

• 3 shapes and 1 varnished wooden base. • L/W/D base: 30 x 12 x 1.5 cm. • Ø circle: 8 cm. • Ø handle: 2.2 cm.

POINT Discover a diffe ferent picture under each sh shape!

3

PIECES

Babycolour 3 same-size coloured circles for lifting. Underneath: 3 animals in different colours. 313 309 330 095 9

3

PIECES

Babyshapes 3 different shapes. Underneath: 1 fish, 1 Indian and 1 mouse. 313 309 330 097 3

Babytactile

POINT

Lift-out animal shapes for toddlers to discover different textures and arouse children’s curiosity and senses. 3 piece cut-out in varnished wood.

Stimulate the sense of touch.

• L/W/D: 30 x 12 x 1.5 cm.

3

PIECES

Babytactile Farm Animals 313 309 330 098 0

3

PIECES

Babytactile Water Animals 313 309 330 134 5

121


Jigsaws and Puzzles

Discovery Lift-out Puzzles • Pieces of all sizes, large and small, to be assembled and slotted together. • Attractive, brightly-coloured illustrations encouraging language use. • Each cut-out comprises several stages. • Slots in each stage make handling the pieces easy. • Suitable for children under 3.

6

PIECES

9

PIECES

The Bedroom

The Haunted Castle

• 6 pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • L/W/thickness of base: 29 x 24 x 0.8 cm. 313 309 399 462 2

• 9 pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • L/W/thickness of base: 29 x 24 x 0.8 cm. 313 309 399 463 9

8

PIECES

The Ocean Liner • 8 pieces and a base of varnished wood. • Base L/W/H: 29 x 24 x 0.8 cm. 313 309 399 460 8

POINTS • Folds up. • Can be used to store 10 puzzles.

Puzzle Storage Rack A cleverly-designed, practical rack for storing puzzles and cut-out games of all sizes and shapes. Can be set on a table or any flat surface and folds up easily. Holds 10 puzzles.

122

• Metal wire frame with red epoxy finish. • L/W/H: 48 x 28 x 22.5 cm. • Storage width: 41 cm. • H. between 2 wire shelves: 2 cm. • Delivered folded in 3. 313 309 372 834 0


Cut-outs - Size Sequencing 3 cut-outs consisting of 4 pieces with buttons to grip and 1 base in varnished wood. For discovering and comparing the sizes of animals. • 4 pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • 30 x 20 cm.

Cut-out - Height 313 309 332 757 4

Cut-out - Length

Cut-out - Size

313 309 332 756 7

313 309 332 758 1

Jigsaws and Puzzles

2 YEARS +

3 YEARS +

Matriochkas Stéphanie Charpiot-Desbenoit

5 dolls that fit into one another, from the smallest to the largest. Given their endearing shape and colour, dolls encourage an exchange of ideas and language. Each doll is split into 2 parts, except the smallest which is printed on the base. • 8 pieces in varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 21 x 15 x 2 cm. • H. large doll: 17 cm. 313 309 332 918 9

The Four Seasons Stéphanie Desbenoit-Charpiot

3 cut-out stages with 9 pieces (1st stage: 2 pieces; 2nd stage: 3 pieces; 3rd stage: 4 pieces). • In varnished wood. • Base L/W/H: 20 x 20 x 1.5 cm. 313 309 332 911 0

123


Jigsaws and Puzzles

3-D Cut-outs Magnetic Cut-outs Games to introduce 3D construction. The magnetic pieces make assembly easy. All the pieces can be put away in the base.

7

PIECES

8

PIECES

The Sandwich The pieces are decorated on both sides, symmetrical and reversible.

The Tractor

• 7 magnetic pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • L/W/thick. of base: 27.5 x 19.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 180 5

• 8 magnetic pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • L/W/thick. of base: 27.5 x 19.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 181 2

The pieces are decorated on both sides.

Wooden Cut-outs 30 x 21 cm 4 YEARS +

Assembly instructions printed on the back

Laurent Schmitt

• Construction cut-outs to stimulate the imagination. • Introduction to reading assembly diagrams.

7

PIECES

Fire Engine • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 0.8 cm. D. piece: 0.6 cm. 313 309 330 111 6

21 cm

8

PIECES

Aeroplane

124

• In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 0.8 cm. D. piece: 0.6 cm. 313 309 330 120 8 30 cm


Jigsaws and Puzzles

Wooden Cut-outs 40 x 30 cm

10

PIECES

Dustbin lorry

Figures are free standing

7 décor panels and 3 figures. • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 40 x 30 x 1 cm. D. piece: 0.6 cm. 313 309 330 139 0

40 cm

11

PIECES

The Farm 5 décor panels and 6 figures. • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 40 x 30 x 1 cm. D. piece: 0.6 cm. 313 309 330 099 7

11

PIECES

Fortified Castle 7 décor panels and 4 figures. • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 40 x 30 x 1 cm. D. piece: 0.6 cm. 313 309 330 114 7

125


19 cm

Puzzle on 2 levels

34 cm

Jigsaws and Puzzles

Body Discovery Cut-outs

22

PIECES

3 YEARS +

Body Discovery Puzzles For discovering the parts of the body, 22 puzzle pieces that fit on 2 levels.The different parts of the body underneath and the clothes on top. • In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 34 x 19 x 1 cm. • D. base: 0.4 cm.

Boy

Girl

313 309 332 717 8

313 309 332 716 1

SEE ALSO Photo Box - Clothing

p. 15

13

PIECES

Cut-outs - My Wardrobe A little girl to dress in seasonal clothes. Her image is printed on the base. She has three interchangeable outfits in her wardrobe. Each piece is equipped with a knob for the child to practise fine motor skills. • 13 pieces and a base of varnished wood. • Base L/W/H: 38 x 26 x 0.9 cm. 313 309 332 921 9

21 cm

POINT Thick pieces for an easy grip. 8 children of the world, boys and girls

3 YEARS +

My School Friends 4 puzzle boards representing 8 characters. On each board is a pair of friends of the same ethnic group. Each character is divided into 3 pieces. All the pieces can be fitted in all the trays.

126

• In varnished wood. • L/W/D base: 21 x 15 x 1 cm. • H. character: 13 cm. 313 309 330 204 5

15 cm

24

PIECES


Jigsaws and Puzzles

Wooden Puzzles NEW

19 cm

15 cm

2

PIECES

My First Fruits 4 puzzles consisting of 2 pieces with real photos of fruits. • Varnished wood. • Colour model printed on the wood. • L/W/D base: 19 x 15 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 174 9

19 cm

15 cm

3

PIECES

Pets 4 puzzles consisting of 3 pieces with real photos of animals. • Varnished wood. • Colour model printed on the wood. • L/W/D base: 19 x 15 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 156 0

18 cm

4

PIECES

4 puzzles each with 4 pieces: A friendly little character who accompanies the child throughout the day: bedtime, school, mealtime and playtime. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 18 x 18 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 131 2

18 cm

A Day with Cajou

127


Jigsaws and Puzzles

6

PIECES

Animals 4 puzzles of 6 pieces: hippopotamus, crocodile, giraffe, penguin. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 18 x 18 x 1 cm. • D. parts: 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 005 6

6

PIECES

Colour Vehicles 4 puzzles: the dump truck, the tanker, the dustbin lorry and the tractor. • In varnished wood. • Model in black and white. • L/W/thick. of base: 23 x 18 x 1 cm. 313 309 386 898 5

6

PIECES

and 9

PIECES

My Day 4 puzzles with 6 and 9 pieces: mealtime, going to school, waking up, washing. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 23 x 18 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 004 9

128


6

PIECES

P u z z l e s

and 9

PIECES

Fairy Tales 1 4 puzzles based on traditional fairy tales: the Three Little Pigs, Goldilocks and the 3 Bears, Pinocchio and the Little Red Hen. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 23 x 18 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 151 0

9

PIECES

Jigsaws and Puzzles

W o o d e n

and 12

PIECES

Fairy Tales 2 4 puzzles based on traditional fairy tales: Snow White and the Seven Dwarves, the Three Little Pigs, Little Red Riding Hood and Goldilocks. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 152 7

NEW

12 and 15

PIECES

PIECES

All Clean! 4 puzzles: brushing teeth, washing hands, having a bath and doing the housework. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 175 6

129


Jigsaws and Puzzles

15

PIECES

School Celebrations 4 puzzles: New Year’s celebrations, carnival, a birthday party and a Christmas party. • In varnished wood. • Model in black and white. • L/W/thick. of base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 332 028 5

18 and 24

PIECES

PIECES

Together at School 4 puzzles depicting regular events in the child’s day at school: break time, school lunch, PE and assembly. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 146 6

18 and 24

PIECES

PIECES

Fairy Tales 3 4 puzzles showing 4 traditional fairy tales: - Little Red Riding Hood, - The Wolf and the Seven Young Kids, - Sleeping Beauty, - Puss In Boots. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 153 4

130


18 and 24

PIECES

PIECES

Means of Transport 4 puzzles on the theme of transport: port, railway station, road, airport. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 088 9

P u z z l e s

Jigsaws and Puzzles

W o o d e n

21 and 28

PIECES

PIECES

Animals of the world 4 puzzles on the theme of animals in their environment: ice floe, savannah, Amazonian forest and European mountains. • In varnished wood. • Black and white model. • Base L/W/thickness: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 332 026 1

24 and 35

PIECES

PIECES

The Street 4 puzzles each showing a different street scene: small town, worksite, pedestrian street and big city. Very realistic illustrations help develop attention to detail and language. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 154 1

131


30 cm

Jigsaws and Puzzles

21 cm

NEW

28 and 35

PIECES

PIECES

Art and Animals 4 puzzles of paintings of animals. • Franz Marc: Blue Horse (1911). • Steve Hickok: Disco Kitty (2012). • Eileen Agar: Pigeon Post (1969). • Natalia Goncharova: Peacock in Bright Sunlight (1911). • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 172 5

24 and 35

PIECES

PIECES

Nature 4 puzzles with 24 and 35 pieces. Each contains the same characters, but in different settings: the mountains, the seaside, the woods and the countryside. • In varnished wood. • Black and white models. • L/W/D base: 30 x 21 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 133 6

Large Wooden Jigsaw Puzzles • Large-format puzzles from 35 to 72 pieces. • In high-quality, durable varnished wood, the illustrations are printed directly on the wood. • Black and white models.

NEW

72

PIECES

The Hospital • L/W/D base: 42 x 32 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 173 2

132


Camping • L/W/D base: 42 x 32 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 130 5

Museum • L/W/D base: 42 x 32 x 1 cm. 313 309 386 900 5

The Zoo • L/W/D base: 42 x 32 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 132 9

P u z z l e s

The Stadium

48

PIECES

56

PIECES

63

PIECES

• L/W/D base: 42 x 32 x 1 cm. 313 309 332 025 4

Castle Life • L/W/D base: 42 x 32 x 1 cm. 313 309 387 000 1

Pirates • L/W/D base: 42 x 32 x 1 cm. 313 309 386 899 2

Jigsaws and Puzzles

W o o d e n

56

PIECES

63

PIECES

72

PIECES

133


Jigsaws and Puzzles

NEW

15 and 18

PIECES

PIECES

Multicoloured Animals 4 puzzles of 15 to 18 pieces showing animals in bright colours, printed directly onto the wood. Cut-out pieces make up the shapes. • In varnished wood. • The shape of the pieces is outlined on the base. • L/W/D base: 22 x 22 x 1 cm. 313 309 375 157 7

Straight-edged piece puzzles

4

PIECES

The Farmyard

The Bathroom

4 pieces, 1 base of varnished wood and 1 black and white model.

12 pieces, 1 base of varnished wood and 1 black and white model.

• Base L/W/thickness: 15 x 15 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 156 5

• Base L/W/thickness: 19 x 15 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 159 6

6

PIECES

134

12

PIECES

16

PIECES

The Duck Pond

At the Doctor’s

6 pieces, 1 base of varnished wood and 1 black and white model.

16 pieces, 1 base of varnished wood and 1 black and white model.

• Base L/W/thickness: 15 x 15 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 157 2

• Base L/W/thickness: 19 x 15 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 160 2


8

PIECES

P u z z l e s

24

PIECES

The Vegetable Garden

The Playground

8 pieces, 1 base of varnished wood and 1 black and white model.

24 pieces, 1 base of varnished wood and 1 black and white model.

• Base L/W/thickness: 19 x 15 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 155 8

• Base L/W/thickness: 19 x 15 x 0.7 cm. 313 309 387 158 9

Jigsaws and Puzzles

W o o d e n

Logic Puzzles Puzzles based on the principle of the double entry table.

Logic Puzzle - Numbers Introducing the concepts of the numbers from 1 to 5: digits, fingers, dots and collections.

Logic Puzzle - Sizes

• 25 pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 23.5 x 23.5 x 0.7 cm.

• 12 pieces and a base of varnished wood. • Base L/W/thickness: 21 x 21 x 0.7 cm.

313 309 387 170 1

313 309 387 161 9

Logic Puzzle - Geometric Shapes

Logic Puzzle - Spatial Recognition

Introducing the concepts of geometric shapes: circle, square, triangle and rectangle.

An entertaining puzzle to introduce the basic concepts of spatial awareness: in front of/behind/on/under.

• 16 pieces and 1 base in varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 21 x 21 x 0.7 cm.

• 16 pieces and a base of varnished wood. • Base L/W/thickness: 21 x 21 x 0.7 cm.

313 309 387 169 5

313 309 387 162 6

An introduction to the concept of size in the company of 3 Bears.

135


Early Learning

Mosaics and Tiling Maxicoloredo® • An introduction to shapes, colours and orientation. • Develop fine motor skills and visual discrimination. • Encourage self-sufficiency through reproduction of model cards or creation of individual designs.

56 counters

Large play pieces for a good grip. Durable plastic play pieces and grids. 1 grid

2 YEARS +

1 CHILD

Primo Maxicoloredo® Mosaic game with soft, bright colours. 12 suggested patterns: 10 figurative, 2 mosaic. The child slides the pattern card inside the transparent grid. The pieces simply press into the grid. • L/W grid: 31.5 x 21.5 cm. • L/W pattern card: 31 x 21 cm. • Ø counter: 3.3 cm. • The box contains: 1 transparent plastic grid, 6 double-sided pattern cards and 56 counters in 4 colours (14 counters per colour). 313 309 310 057 3

6 double-sided pattern cards

Blank cards for children tocreate their own patterns

2 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Maxicoloredo® Mosaic game for toddlers comprising 2 hard plastic transparent grids with studs, 96 round snap-on pieces in 4 colours, and 18 pattern cards. The pattern cards slide beneath the grid and the pieces snap on to the studs.

18 figurative or abstractpattern cards

184 counters

96 counters

2 grids

• L/W grid: 31.5 x 21.5 cm. • L/W pattern card: 31 x 21 cm. • Ø counter: 3.3 cm. 313 309 345 007 4

4 grids 24 pattern cards

2 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Maxicoloredo® Set Mosaics in soft, bright colours. The 24 pattern cards are divided into 6 series of 4 cards identifiable by a logo, for a workshop of 4 children. 18 cards represent figurative pictures and 6 mosaic designs to help develop children’s sense of structuring space.

136

• L/W grid: 31.5 x 21.5 cm. • L/W pattern card: 31 x 21 cm. • Ø counter: 3.3 cm. • The box contains: 4 transparent plastic grids, 24 pattern cards and 184 counters in 4 colours (46 counters per colour). 313 309 345 093 7


Early Learning

2 grids

18 model cards

3 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Maxigeocoloredo® The game consists of 18 model cards, 2 stud grids and 124 counters (3 geometric shapes, 4 colours). • Grid L/W: 31.50 x 21.50 cm. • Model card L/W: 31 x 21. • Triangular counters, side: 3 cm. 313 309 345 110 1

124 counters

Maxicoloredo® Grids Maxicoloredo® Counters

Maxigeocoloredo® Counters

2 transparent plastic grids.

96 round counters, 4 colours.

124 geometric counters: 3 shapes, 4 colours.

• L/W grid: 31.5 x 21.5 cm.

313 309 387 213 5

313 309 345 111 8

313 309 387 121 3

12 laminated cards that slide under the grid

2 YEARS +

Wall-mounted Maxicoloredo® Vertical tiling activity consisting of a wall-mounted panel overlaid with a transparent stud grid. Dual-sided pattern cards are provided representing figurative drawings or mosaics that slide under the grid. Children fill in their drawings with round pieces that are simply pressed onto the stud grid. These pieces are stored in the tray on the panel provided for this purpose. • L/W panel: 68 x 58 cm. • L/W pattern card: 61 x 41 cm. • Ø counter: 3.3 cm. • The complete set contains: 1 panel with plastic tray, 1 transparent stud grid, 12 laminated cards illustrated on both sides and 225 round counters in 4 colours. 313 309 345 106 4

Panel that can be used by 2 children simultaneously

137


Early Learning

12 pattern cards

3 YEARS +

1 CHILD

320 pegs

Mosaicolor Plastic pegs in 4 different colours to fit into holes in a transparent plastic grid placed over pattern cards. • L/W grid and pattern card: 25 x 19 cm. • Ø peg: 9 mm. • 1 transparent plastic grid, 320 pegs in 4 colours and 12 pattern cards. 313 309 345 001 2

Extra Pegs Set of 160 pegs in 4 colours. • Ø peg: 9 mm. 313 309 345 003 6

8 pattern cards

100 flat pieces with pegs in 6 different shapes

4 YEARS +

138

1 CHILD

Extra Pieces

Geomosaic

Set of 100 plastic geometric pieces in 5 colours.

A mosaic game in hard plastic. The shapes fit into the grid to create abstract patterns or to reproduce the patterns on the card. Complement with Geomosaic Extra Pieces if you want more children to play.

• Average L. of piece: 4 cm. 313 309 345 827 8

• L/W grid and pattern card: 25 x 19 cm. • Av. L. of piece: 4 cm. • 1 transparent plastic grid, 100 flat pieces with pegs in 6 different geometric shapes and 8 pattern cards. 313 309 345 825 4

Extra Grids 2 transparent grids for Geomosaic and Mosaicolor. • L/W grid: 25 x 19 cm. 313 309 345 826 1


a n d

T i l i n g

MAGNETIC 3 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN PIECES

Geocolor André Jacquart

Early Learning

M o s a i c s

This workshop introduces the recognition of simple geometric shapes: square, rectangle, triangle and circle. The child reproduces or creates semi-representational models using magnetic pieces in a variety of shapes and colours. The activity cards are grouped into 6 sets of increasing difficulty. • Sets 1 and 2: individual shapes shown as solids. • Sets 3 and 4: individual shapes shown hollow. • Sets 5 and 6: individual or assembled shapes shown as solids. For 2, 4 to 6 extra children, just get 1, 2 or 3 Extension Packs. • L/W sheet: 30 x 21 cm. • The box contains: 12 double-sided activity cards grouped into 6 sets, 40 magnetic shape counters in 5 different shapes and 4 different colours, and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 345 114 9 12 double-sided activity cards, i.e. 24 models to reproduce

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to Geocolor and enables an additional two children to join in. • 40 magnetic shape counters in 4 different colours, i.e. 10 shape counters (square, rectangle, triangle, circle, semi-circle) per colour. 313 309 345 115 6

40 magnetic shape counters

Actual-size reproduction of model cards

5 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Organicolor J. Dubosson

Develops observation, organisation and reasoning skills. Using coloured wooden chips, children reproduce complex designs based either on models or simply using their imagination. • L/W model card: 23 x 13 cm / 23 x 23 cm / 26 x 12.5 cm. • The box contains: 96 chips (4 colours), 28 model cards in colour or black and white and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 337 038 9

Develop abstraction skills

3 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

Geometrix F. Hardy and G. Zimmermann

Wooden geometric pieces in 3 colours for creating a wide variety of designs. The shapes fit into plastic trays using actual-size or scaled-down, colour, black and white or outlined patterns. • Ø circle: 5 cm. L/W tray: 28 x 21 cm. • The box contains: 132 geometric pieces: circles, semi-circles, large and small triangles, large and small squares, 6 plastic trays, 48 printed pattern cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 343 102 8

48 pattern cards

Extra Pieces for Geometrix • Set of 132 wooden pieces. 313 309 343 125 7

6 plastic cut-out trays

132 geometric pieces

139


Early Learning

Early Learning Sets • Early observation and logical association sets for learning to follow instructions and reproduce simple models.

4 abacuses

2 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Abacolor Set Tactile game for developing dexterity and recognising shapes and colours. 4 sets of 4 sheets in increasing levels of difficulty, showing a variety of stacks and teaching children to read a model sheet. • The box contains: 4 abacuses with 4 rods of different lengths, 40 beads in 4 shapes and 4 colours, and 16 model sheets in 1:1 scale. • L/W/thickness of abacus: 21 x 6.5 x 2.2 cm. • H rod: 14 cm. • Ø bead: 4.5 cm. • L/W sheet: 26 x 21 cm. 313 309 304 998 8

40 beads

16 model sheets

Abacolor Set of 2 abacuses and 20 plastic pieces.

313 309 304 999 5

4 shapes, 4 colours

A

4.5 cm

30 model sheets

3 YEARS + 2 CHILDREN

Farandole Michel and Marie-Hélène Chevillon

A workshop for practising motor skills and reproducing simple rhythms with figurative pieces on a farming theme. The pieces, painted on both sides, stand up and include 2 holes. The activity can be performed either freely or with the help of model cards the same scale as the pieces. The workshop equipment can be used for children to work in pairs. For 2 to 4 extra children, just get 1 or 2 Extension Packs.

20 wooden pieces

2 laces

The box contains: • 20 wooden pieces with 2 holes and illustrated on both sides (Cow H: 7 cm). • 30 model cards (L/W: 33 x 11 cm). • 2 laces (1 m). • 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 375 128 7

Build your set 4 CHILDREN

6 CHILDREN A

B

1x

A

1x +

+

B

2 Child Extension Pack This material adds to Farandole and enables an additional two children to join in. • 8 wooden pieces and 2 laces. 313 309 375 129 4

140

1x

2x

B


A set for recreating early simple patterns, taking into account the size, shape and colour of the figures. Children can freely create patterns or reproduce the ones shown on each model sheet, with or without a lace. The 16 model sheets are at a 1:1 scale. They are structured in 4 sets of 4 sheets (patterns of 3 then 4 elements). The large wooden pieces are stable and easy to handle. The laces have long plastic-coated ends to guide threading.

Early Learning

Lacing Set - Fairy Tales

16 model sheets

A

2 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Lace-up Set - Little Red Riding Hood

16 figures in varnished wood

• 16 figures in varnished wood (H/thickness: 7 / 5.2 x 1.5 cm). • 4 laces with long plastic-coated ends (L: 70 cm). • 16 model sheets at a 1:1 scale, divided into 4 sets of 4 sheets (L/W: 32.5 x 12 cm). 313 309 375 146 1

4 laces

Build your set 8 CHILDREN

B

4 Child Extension Pack

This pack expands the Lace-up Set - Little Red Riding Hood so that 4 more children can join in. • 13 figures in varnished wood and 4 laces. • H of figures: 6.3 and 6.8 cm; thickness: 1.5 cm. • L of lace: 70 cm. 313 309 375 147 8

A

1x

1x

A

1x

+ A

8 CHILDREN

+

B

B

2x

16 model sheets

2 YEARS + 4 CHILDREN

Lace-up Set - Goldilocks and the Three Bears • 16 figures in varnished wood (H/thickness: 6.8 / 6.3 x 1.5 cm). • 4 laces with long plastic-coated ends (L: 70 cm). • 16 model sheets at a 1:1 scale, divided into 4 sets of 4 sheets (L/W: 32.5 x 12 cm). 313 309 375 144 7

B

4 Child Extension Pack

This pack expands the Lace-up Set - Goldilocks and the Three Bears so that 4 more children can join in. • 13 figures in varnished wood and 4 laces. • H of figures: 6.3 and 6.8 cm; thickness: 1.5 cm. • L of lace: 70 cm. 313 309 375 145 4

4 laces

16 figures in varnished wood

141


142


Pretend Play

To discover...

Modular Kitchen

P.147 NEW

P

retend playing at tea parties or shopkeepers are all-important activities for young children. Children can better understand the world of grown-ups by imitating it. These role-playing situations help children develop their language and social skills. Deliberately uncluttered and highly realistic, our furniture and accessories stimulate children’s imagination and encourage interaction. These modular, fun products are made with natural materials selected for their environmental qualities. They comply with safety standards for intensive use in groups.

Kitchen Corner Vitamin Kitchen

p. 144

Modular Kitchen

p. 146

Compact Kitchen

p. 148

Traditional Kitchen

p. 150

Dining Set

p. 152

Grocery Corner Play Food and Grocer

p. 153

Shopping Corner

p. 154

House Corner

Puppets of the World

P.164 NEW

Nathan House

p. 155

Vitamin Bedroom

p. 156

Traditional Bedroom

p. 157

Red Bedroom

p. 158

Dolls and Accessories

p. 160

At Home

p. 163

Theatre Corner Theatre and Puppets

p. 164

Dressing-up

p. 165

Pretend Group Play The Car, The Boat

p. 166

Play Corners

Playing Table on Casters

P.171

Doll House, Castle

p. 167

Farm and Animals

p. 168

Playing Table

p. 170

Garages, Road Circuit

p. 172

Vehicles

p. 174

Train Set

p. 175

Water and Sand Equipment

p. 176

143


Kitchen Corner

Vitamin Kitchen POINTS

2 YEARS + • A choice of 7 modules that can be set up in a linear or island configuration using the 2 square and rounded quadrant shapes. • A wide range of possible activities.

• Suitable for classroom and kindergarten spaces of all kinds. • Ideal for 2 to 4 years. • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

Practical details of the range: • H. of playing surfaces, 48 cm; table, 40 cm. • Raised modules for easy cleaning, 7 cm. • Lacquered 15 mm thick plywood.

144

• Safe anti-pinching system. • Rounded edges and corners for safety. • The bowl of the sink is fixed to prevent it moving.


Kitchen Corner

Nathan Commitments • All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests. The sink bowl is fixed and the buttons turn.

Sink 1 round white sink, 1 angled metal tap unit, 2 rotating red and blue buttons, 1 fixed shelf, 2 curtains. • In MDF board 15 mm thick with a pink finish. • L/W/H: 42 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm. 313 309 371 204 2

Once the washing up has been sorted, the tray slides out so that it can be emptied.

Plethora of possible layouts

Special system to prevent pinched fingers.

Do the washing by turning the drum.

Cooker

Washing Machine

3 cooking hobs, 1 lateral-opening oven door with an anti-pinching system, Plexiglas window, 1 fixed shelf, 4 rotating buttons.

Round Plexiglas lateral door and anti-pinching system. Rotating window, fixed inside drum. 2 buttons to press, 1 four-colour adjustment button, 1 work surface.

• In MDF board 15 mm thick with an orange finish. • L/W: 38 x 38 cm. • H. work surface: 48 cm; H. total: 54 cm. 313 309 371 212 7

• In MDF board 15 mm thick with a blue finish. • L/W: 38 x 38 cm. • H. work surface: 48 cm; H. total: 54 cm. 313 309 371 214 1

Special system to prevent pinched fingers.

Table Rectangular table for 4 children, to be placed next to 2 kitchen units or next to a wall. Plastic pads. • Support thickness 15 mm, coated in 2 layers of protective varnish. • L/W: 76 x 38 cm; H: 40 cm. 313 309 371 205 9

Stools - Set of 2 Storage Unit Storage Unit for Sorting For tidying and sorting according to the shape of the object. The surface has 3 holes (round, rectangle and surprise). 1 low shelf and 1 wooden bin with 3 compartments fitted with an anti-drop system. • In MDF board 15 mm thick with a green finish. • L/W: 38 x 38 cm, rounded quadrant façade. • H. work surface: 48 cm; H. total: 54 cm. 313 309 371 220 2

For playing at emptying and filling, with 2 sliding doors designed to prevent trapped fingers: 1 side door from which things can be tidied into 2 compartments and 1 door on the top (handles in solid varnished wood). • Support thickness 15 mm, coated in 2 layers of protective varnish. • Side: 38 cm; H of play surface: 48 cm; total H: 54 cm. 313 309 371 240 0

Slide under the table easily. With solid wood supports and plastic pads. • Support thickness 15 mm, coated in 2 layers of protective varnish. • H of seat: 20 cm; side: 21 cm. 313 309 371 206 6

SEE ALSO Vitamin Bedroom

p. 156

145


Kitchen Corner

Modular Kitchen 2 YEARS + • 8 modular elements in 4 colours suitable for classroom and kindergarten spaces of all kinds. • 2 possible work surface heights through use of a removable base. • High-quality varnished plywood, 10 mm thick, and MDF; meticulous finishes, easy to maintain. • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

Side by side Sink-Plus + Cooker-Plus

146

2 possible heights: For 2-3 year olds: without base, H.: 50 cm. For 3 year olds and above: with base, H.: 55 cm.

Back to back Cooker-Plus + Sink-Plus

Rounded edges


The bowl of the sink is fixed to prevent it moving.

Fridge Highly complete layout with 2 shelves, 1 inside adjustment knob, 1 egg and butter tray and 1 bottle tray in the door.

Sink

• L/W/H: 42 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm.

• L/W/H: 42 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm.

Red

Red

313 309 371 210 3

313 309 371 216 5

Yellow

Blue

313 309 371 244 8

313 309 371 241 7

Equipped with wooden tap and storage shelves concealed by a curtain. Base included.

Kitchen Corner

POINT

Cooker

Dishwasher

Equipped with 3 burners and an oven with Plexiglas door. Base included.

1 central shelf with 4 slots for plates, 6 wooden spikes for glasses, 3 external adjustment knobs and even 1 powder compartment in the door. Can contain a red basket.

• L/W/H: 42 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm.

Red

• L/W/H: 42 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm.

313 309 371 215 8

Red

Orange

313 309 371 209 7

313 309 371 243 1

Washing Machine

Microwave Oven

With opening plexiglas door, pullout washing powder compartment and turnable adjustment knob.

This space-saving microwave oven with revolving inner tray stands upright and is complemented by a storage area with a central shelf. Side-opening door with Plexiglas window.

• L/W/H: 42 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm.

Red 313 309 371 208 0

• L/W/H: 40 x 29 x 73 cm or H. with base: 78 cm.

Green

Red

313 309 371 242 4

313 309 371 211 0

POINT The bowl of the sink is fixed to prevent it moving.

Kitchen Sink-Plus

Cooker-Plus

Includes a sink, a refrigerator, 2 storage shelves and a rounded work surface.

Includes 3 burners, 1 oven with Plexiglas door, 2 storage shelves and a rounded work surface.

• L/W/H: 84 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm.

• L/W/H: 84 x 34 x 50 cm or H. with base: 55 cm.

Red

Red

313 309 371 218 9

313 309 371 217 2

Blue

Orange

313 309 371 246 2

313 309 371 245 5

147


Kitchen Corner

Compact Kitchen 3 YEARS + • 6 functions of the Compact Kitchen: oven, cooking hobs, sink, refrigerator, work top and storage space. • Suitable for classroom and kindergarten spaces of all kinds. • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

Rounded edges for children’s safety

Fixed bowl

Opens to the side

Plexiglas door

POINT

105 cm

The bowl of the sink is fixed to prevent it moving.

Sliding drawer

Wall Grid 105 cm

Full Kitchen Unit All the basic functions of a kitchen corner in one activity unit: sink, cooker and refrigerator. The 2 plastic shelves and drawer provide storage space for the toy dining set. In red and beech finish melamine with white wire accessories: 2 oven shelves, refrigerator door fittings and 2 shelves. • L/W/H: 105 x 30 x 57 cm. 313 309 370 824 3

Zen Cooker A very strong piece of furniture with simple, soft lines and natural colours - perfect for small children. Non-removable sink, 2 turning buttons and 1 tap, doorless oven, 2 side storage spaces and 2 silkscreen hotplates. The façade notches enable objects to fall from above to be collected below.

148

• Varnished birch wood, clear varnish and white melamine particle board. Tap and buttons in solid wood. • L/W/H: 70 x 40 x 55 cm; Work surface H.: 45 cm. 313 309 372 886 9

Creates useful storage space on a wall for the smaller accessories used in a kitchen corner. Can be fixed to a wall with 4 screws (included) at any height. Red wire. • W/H grid: 105 x 50 cm. • L/W/D basket: 25 x 12.5 x 8.5 cm. • Weight: 3715 g. • Comes with 2 baskets and 5 hooks. 313 309 370 992 9


Kitchen Corner

52 cm

Ø 60 cm

Kitchen Table Big enough for 4 children to play together. Round varnished wood table with red top. • Ø/H: 60 x 52 cm.

Red 313 309 371 200 4

Blue 313 309 371 247 9

Stools - Set of 2 Small varnished wood stools with red seats. Designed to match the Kitchen Table and the Dressing Table (p. 159). Supplied in pairs, ready-assembled. 30 cm

• H. seat: 30 cm.

Red - Set of 2 313 309 371 201 1

Yellow - Set of 2 313 309 371 248 6

110 cm

110 cm

Dresser

Extra Larder

The top section has 2 shelves for storing dishes. The bottom section has 2 red doors with a cutout handle to avoid pinched fingers. The middle shelf provides an extra-wide storage surface.

A food storage unit: groceries on the shelves, fruits and vegetables in the baskets. Includes 3 shelves concealed by a curtain and 3 plastic baskets. Red and beech finish melamine.

• L/W/H: 67 x 33 x 110 cm. 313 309 371 075 8

• L/W/H: 40 x 30 x 110 cm. 313 309 370 990 5

149


Kitchen Corner

Traditional Kitchen 2 YEARS + • Stimulates the imagination through its fairy-tale inspired design. • A choice of natural and durable materials in solid wood and plywood, with an ivory gloss and brown varnish finish. • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

Nathan Commitments • All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests.

Table A logical extension to kitchen activities, this rectangular table seats up to 6 children at a time, who can gather round it “like a family”. The top is of brown-varnished plywood, the legs of ivory-lacquered solid wood. • L/W/H: 72 x 54 x 48 cm. • Accessories sold separately. 313 309 370 807 6

POINTS • All kitchen funnctions in a single item of furnitu furniture. Hotplates, cooker, sink, refrigerator, cupboard and work surface. • The bowl of the sink is fixed to prevent it moving.

Stools - Set of 2 Practical and fun, they are easy to move from place to place thanks to their central tulipshaped cut-out. The wide, square seat makes them very comfortable to sit on. • L/W/H: 28 x 25 x 26 cm. 313 309 370 808 3

Bench Suitable for 3 children or 2 around a table, this small bench owes its solidity to its stable right-angled central structure with tulip cut-out. Made of ivory and brown-lacquered plywood.

150

• L/W/H: 60 x 25 x 26 cm. 313 309 370 809 0

SEE ALSO Traditional Bedroom

p. 157


Kitchen Corner

43 cm

Fixed bowl

112 cm

Buffet

56 cm

Basket sold separately p. 257 Plexiglas door

Open to the side

Metal tap

Combination Kitchen Unit A crucial element of the kitchen, this combination unit groups together all the essential functions: hotplates, cooker, sink, refrigerator, work surface, central storage cupboard. The uprights are in solid wood, the top is in thick plywood and the body of the unit is in MDF. The unit can also be used to separate areas thanks to the smart whitelacquer finish on the back. The combination unit includes: 4 hotplates, oven with shelf and door in Plexiglas opening on one side, sink, metal tap and cross-shaped knobs in wood, refrigerator with shelf and white-lacquered metal rack fixed on the door, work surface, central storage cupboard. • L/W/H: 112 x 36 x 56 cm. • Accessories sold separately. 313 309 370 823 6 2 cloth hooks

Pots & Pans A set of 4 genuine cooking utensils including: 1 saucepan, 1 stew pot, 1 frying pan and 1 casserole dish. • Ø saucepan: 13 cm. • Ø frying pan: 16 cm. • Ø casserole dish: 16.5 cm. • Ø stew pot: 16.5 cm. 313 309 333 165 6

Buffet A practical and compact unit to store toy food, dining sets and accessories in a number of ways: in a basket, on a shelf, in compartments, on coat pegs and on bottle racks. • In thick plywood with solid wood stiles.• L/W/H: 43 x 36 x 104 cm. • Delivered with a red plastic basket, accessories sold separately. 313 309 370 820 5

151


Kitchen Corner

Dining Set

Dining Set Set of 48 pieces: 8 dinner plates, 8 soup bowls, 8 knives, 8 forks, 8 spoons and 8 beakers. In 4 colours. • Ø plate: 19 cm. • L. cutlery: 13.5 cm. 313 309 333 150 2

Play Basins 4 lightweight round basins in green plastic for filling, emptying, and carrying objects. For use both indoors and outdoors. Easy to grip with their ergonomic handles. Stackable. • Ø/H of basin with handle: 27 x 9.5 cm; Ø interior: 21 cm. • Set of 4.

Cutlery Set of 33 pieces: 8 knives, 8 forks, 8 spoons and 8 teaspoons, all packed in a special tray. In 4 colours.

313 309 333 398 8

• L. cutlery: 13.5 cm. • L/W tray: 26 x 19.5 cm. 313 309 333 152 6

Set of 4 pieces: 2 saucepans, 1 frying pan and 1 casserole dish. In 3 colours.

Kettle & Pressure Cooker

Coffeemaker

• Ø frying pan: 13 cm. • Ø casserole dish: 14 cm. 313 309 333 157 1

• H/Ø pressure cooker: 10.5 x 11 cm. • H/Ø kettle: 14 x 13.5 cm. 313 309 333 159 5

Coffeepot in transparent plastic.

Coffee Service

Cooking Utensil Set

15 items: 4 cups and saucers, 4 teaspoons in four assorted colours, 1 sugar bowl, 1 milk jug and 1 tray.

Set of 14 pieces: 2 mixing bowls, 2 whisks, 2 ladles, 2 knives, 2 spatulas, 2 slotted spatulas, and 2 pastry cutting wheels. In 4 colours.

Place Mats

• Ø cup: 6 cm. 313 309 333 300 1

• Ø bowl: 12 cm. Average L: 18 cm. 313 309 333 158 8

• L/W: 33 x 27 cm. 313 309 333 167 0

Cookware

• H: 21 cm. 313 309 333 301 8

Set of 4 place mats in 4 colours. Soft, hard-wearing washable plastic.

NEW

Scales and Cash Register A cash register with a solar-powered calculator. Scales for weighing fruits and vegetables. In plastic.

152

• L/W/H scales: 30 x 18 x 16 cm. • L/W/H cash register: 15 x 14 x 20 cm. • Basket and vegetables sold separately. 313 309 333 216 5

Maxi Tongs - Set of 4 Baskets - Set of 6 Hard plastic shopping baskets in 3 assorted colours. • L/W/H: 19 x 13 x 8 cm. 313 309 345 071 5

Tongs for working on precision movements and 3-finger gripping. • Soft green plastic. • L: 18 cm. 313 309 342 275 0


Dry Goods 14 plastic dry goods for playing shopkeeper and stocking the kitchen corner.

Grocery Corner

Play Food and Grocer

Meat 1 joint of beef with two cut slices, 1 dry sausage, 2 chicken legs, 1 large sausage, 1 pork sausage, 1 pork chop.

Fish

• Set of 9 pieces. 313 309 345 079 1

• Set of 9 pieces. 313 309 345 065 4

Bread

Market Vegetables

Market Fruit

A 1/2 French loaf, 2 slices of French loaf, 1 round loaf, 1 slice of white bread, 1 slice of rye bread, 1 roll.

6 tomatoes, 6 onions, 6 red peppers, 6 green peppers, 6 leeks, 6 potatoes, 6 carrots, 6 courgettes. Reduced scale.

6 oranges, 6 lemons, 6 green apples, 6 red apples, 6 bananas, 6 pears, 6 apricots, 6 clementines. Reduced scale.

• Set of 7 pieces. 313 309 345 078 4

• Set of 48 pieces. 313 309 387 084 1

• Set of 48 pieces. 313 309 345 049 4

• H/Ø round tin: 10 x 7 cm, 6 x 6.5 cm, 4 x 4.5 cm. • W/H carton: 10 x 6.5 cm. • Set of 14 pieces. 313 309 345 053 1

1 trout, 1 sole, 1 red mullet, 6 sardines.

Cut-up Magnetic Fruits

Tropical Fruit

Fruit Basket

Pineapples, watermelon, grapefruit, banana, lemon and fig. Actual size.

1 tangerine, 1 orange, 1 lemon, 1 red apple, 1 banana, 1 pear, 1 apricot, 1 fig, 1 plum, 1 peach, 1 grapefruit, 2 strawberries.

• Set of 6 items. 313 309 345 109 5

• Set of 13 pieces. 313 309 345 075 3

3 magnetic fruits that are easy to cut up with a knife: 1 orange (in 2 parts), 1 pear (in 3 parts) and 1 apple (in 4 parts). With 1 fabric bag with handles, which is useful for tidying up. • Plastic. • Ø orange: 7 cm; Ø apple: 7.3 cm; Ø pear: 9.3 cm; L of knife: 16 cm. • H/W of bag: 28 x 19 cm. 313 309 398 359 6

153


Grocery Corner

Shopping Corner • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

Market Stall Wooden stall with an awning and 6 compartments. Can stand on a table or on the ground. The handle baskets can be placed in the compartments (sold separately).

Baskets - Set of 6

• In 12 mm plywood, clear varnish and red lacquer. • L/W/H: 60 x 47 x 58 cm. • Requires assembly. Supplied with assembly instructions. Accessories not included. 313 309 372 897 5

Hard plastic shopping baskets in 3 assorted colours. • L/W/H: 19 x 13 x 8 cm. 313 309 345 071 5

Customise with your own images

Conveyor belt Laminated tough surface

Protected edging

Baskets sold separately p. 256

Easy movement provided by two small swivel wheels.

Rubber front wheels act as bumpers.

Shop Visit the local shop or supermarket with this shop counter, generating numerous dialogue scenarios. Create food and goods displays on the shelving and counter. The angled structure clearly sets out two play spaces - indoors and outdoors. The shelved or basket-based food display (baskets sold separately) also enables quick game storage.

Rear View

154

• Comes with a natural wood conveyor belt, base for screwing onto the countertop. • Particle board, green melamine and birch colour, thickness 15 mm, protected edging and rounded corners. • L/W/H: 100 x 86 x 120 cm. • H. counter: 60 cm. • Requires assembly with assembly instructions - accessories not included. 313 309 372 877 7

Shopping Trolley For shopping and walking the baby (dolls up to approx. 50 cm) - very solid and stable, capable of supporting the weight of a child. • In solid varnished 12 to 22 mm plywood with metal joins and red lacquer. • L/W/H: 47 x 40 x 59 cm. • H. handle: 58 cm; baby seat side: 13 cm at the top 9.5 cm at the bottom. • Requires assembly with assembly instructions accessories not included. 313 309 345 107 1


• A fun, original concept using modular façades that can be combined to create numerous different play spaces. • The façades can be attached together at right angles or in a straight line using the wood fastenings provided. The fastenings can also be used to mount a panel on the wall.

Technical information • Façades in thick plywood (15 mm) with shockresistant decorations screen-printed on 1 side. • Wood connectors supplied with each façade. • The façades are stable if assembled at right angles. • Requires assembly. Assembly instructions included.

House Corner

Nathan House

Shop Counter Façade • L/W/H: 100 x 20 x 120 cm; H of counter: 48 cm. 313 309 372 050 4

1 Shop Counter Façade + 1 Windows Façade

Windows Façade • L/W/H: 100 x 21.5 x 88 cm; H of seat: 20 cm. 313 309 372 051 1

Garage Façade • L/W/H: 100 x 30 x 75 cm; L of opening: 35 cm. 313 309 372 052 8

Roof closed with 2 sections

1 Entrance Façade + 1 Façade with Flowers + 2 Windows Façades

House Roof Façade with Flowers

Entrance Façade

Roof to be attached only between façades with a triangular top.

• L/W/H: 100 x 26.5 x 120 cm; H of window sill: 55 cm. 313 309 372 053 5

• L/W/H: 100 x 23 x 120 cm; L of opening: 45 cm. 313 309 372 054 2

• Plastic-coated fabric with attachment hooks. • 2 sections 77 x 99 cm, held by 4 horizontal bars. 313 309 372 055 9

155


House Corner

Vitamin Bedroom

Nathan Commitments • All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests.

2 YEARS + • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

Rounded corners and edges

B A

SEE ALSO Vitamin Kitchen Zen Cooker

p. 144 p. 148

Highly resistant reinforced bottom

B

A

Bed Bed for dolls up to 45 cm long. Highly robust and able to resist the weight of two children. • In MDF board 15 mm thick with a blue finish. • L/W/H: 50 x 30 x 38 cm. 313 309 371 226 4

Fixed sink basin

Sink and Vanity Unit For playing at washing, changing and dressing baby, while looking in the mirror! Unit with sink, tap and 2 turning buttons on retaining elastic, 1 soap holder, 2 shelves, 1 round box and 1 towel rail. • In MDF board 15 mm thick with a green finish. • Fixed sink in blue plastic. • Metal towel rail, unbreakable Perspex mirror with bevelled edges. • L/W/H: 38 x 38 x 86 cm. • H. work surface: 48 cm. 313 309 371 225 7

Table Rectangular table for 4 children, to be placed next to 2 kitchen units or next to a wall. Plastic pads. • Support thickness 15 mm, coated in 2 layers of protective varnish. • L/W: 76 x 38 cm; H: 40 cm.

Storage Unit

313 309 371 205 9

Round Plexiglas lateral door and anti-pinching system. Rotating window, fixed inside drum. 2 buttons to press, 1 four-colour adjustment button, 1 work surface.

For playing at emptying and filling, with 2 sliding doors designed to prevent trapped fingers: 1 side door from which things can be tidied into 2 compartments and 1 door on the top (handles in solid varnished wood).

Stools - Set of 2

• In MDF board 15 mm thick with a blue finish. • L/W: 38 x 38 cm. • H. work surface: 48 cm; H. total: 54 cm. 313 309 371 214 1

• Support thickness 15 mm, coated in 2 layers of protective varnish. • Side: 38 cm; H of play surface: 48 cm; total H: 54 cm. 313 309 371 240 0

• Support thickness 15 mm, coated in 2 layers of protective varnish. • H of seat: 20 cm; side: 21 cm. 313 309 371 206 6

Washing Machine

156

Slide under the table easily. With solid wood supports and plastic pads.


House Corner

Traditional Bedroom 2 YEARS + • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

All corners and edges are rounded

POINT Anti-tipping drrawers.

SEE ALSO The Traditional Kitcheen

Traditional Changing Table Traditional Bed A large cot for dolls up to 50 cm long. The extremely solid plywood base and the rounded knobs glued at the top of each post make it suitable for all ages. • In solid wood, in honey lacquered plywood and in ivory lacquered MDF. • Frieze with a tulip-shaped cut-out. • L/W/H: 63 x 35 x 39 cm. 313 309 371 131 1

A table for changing “baby” dolls and storing their clothes. Ideal for the bedroom play corner. The storage part has one shelf and two large capacity antitipping drawers. • In solid wood, in honey lacquered plywood and in ivory lacquered MDF. • Frieze with a tulip-shaped cut-out. • L/W/H: 57 x 40 x 67 cm. • H. changing table: 56 cm. • L/W inside of drawers: 42 x 32 cm. 313 309 371 133 5

p. 150

Traditional Dressing Table For 2 children. One large oval mirror, 3 drawers for accessories and secrets, 1 large drawer and 1 work surface. Enough space for 2 stools (sold separately p. 149). • In solid wood, in honey lacquered plywood and in ivory lacquered MDF. • L/W/H: 64 x 40 x 97 cm. • H. work surface: 45 cm. 313 309 371 159 5

Bedding For the cradle or beds; an allin-one mattress, pillow and blanket. Polyester filling covered with 100% cotton fabric. Machine-washable at 40°C. • L: 114 cm (opened), 64 cm (folded). • W: 30 cm. 313 309 333 180 9

157


House Corner

Red Bedroom 2 YEARS + • • • •

SEE ALSO

A design with gentle, rounded shapes. A complete range of furniture and accessories to play with dolls. Suitable for classroom and kindergarten spaces of all kinds. Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

• Stools • Bedding • Dolls

p. 149 p. 157 p. 160

Bunk Beds

A unit for washing and changing baby, and for storing accessories and clothes on either shelves or hangers. Red and beech finish melamine.

An extremely stable bed for two large dolls up to 50 cm long. With its rounded design and smooth angles, it blends perfectly with the “red and wood” range to create a harmonious and convivial bedroom play corner.

• L/W/H: 98 x 32 x 72 cm. • H. changing table: 60 cm. 313 309 370 991 2

• Clear varnished plywood with red panels. • L/W/H: 60.5 x 37 x 68 cm. 313 309 371 132 8

Changing Unit

158

Doll’s Cradle Rounded bottom to rock the cradle. 2 holes in the head and foot make it easy to pick up and carry. • In varnished plywood. • L/W/H: 60 x 30 x 30 cm. 313 309 371 088 8


House Corner

A drawer for storing accessories

Solid beech legs

Beechwood cross-pieces

Dressing Table A dressing table with rounded corners, 2 shelves on either side of the mirror and 1 plastic drawer for storing jars, bottles, make-up, combs and brushes. • Red and beech finish melamine. • Accessories sold separately. • Total H: 90 cm. • L/W/H table: 75 x 33 x 52 cm. 313 309 371 230 1

Red Wardrobe A large storage space with 2 shelves for doll’s clothes, 1 rail and 2 coat pegs. The doors are designed to prevent children from trapping their fingers. Body in varnished plywood, doors in red varnished MDF, rail in solid wood. • L/W/H: 65 x 30 x 100 cm. 313 309 372 860 9

Door with anti-pinching system

Vanity Table

108.5 cm

Stable and easy to move. Integrated storage space for hair or make-up accessories. Accessories not included. • In natural and red lacquered 10 mm plywood. • Unbreakable Perspex mirror (L/W: 21 x 23 cm). • L/W/H: 29 x 19 x 34 cm. 313 309 372 026 9

Mirror

Doctor’s Case

An unbreakable full-length Plexiglas mirror. Sides made of solid wood strips and mounted on a red MDF frame.

7 examination and treatment instruments:1 pair of scissors, 1 apparatus for measuring blood pressure, 1 ear examination instrument, 1 reflex hammer, 1 thermometer, 1 syringe and 1 stethoscope.

• W/H: 108.5 x 44.5 cm. 313 309 371 235 6

• Made of plastic. • L/H: 26 x 23 cm. 313 309 332 002 5

159


House Corner

Dolls and Accessories Ethnic Dolls • Small Ethnic Doll: 34 cm. • Big Ethnic Doll: 43 cm. • Easy-to-brush hair.

34 cm

• 6 models of washable dolls in 2 sizes with articulated limbs, fixed eyes and easy-to-style hair.

• Small European Boy. 313 309 333 278 3

• Small African Girl. 313 309 333 275 2

• Small European Girl. 313 309 333 279 0

43 cm

• Small African Boy. 313 309 333 274 5

• Big African Boy. 313 309 333 268 4

• Big European Boy. 313 309 333 272 1

• Big Asian Boy. 313 309 333 270 7

• Big African Girl. 313 309 333 269 1

• Big European Girl. 313 309 333 273 8

• Big Asian Girl. 313 309 333 271 4

Ethnic Baby Dolls

28 cm

160

• Small Baby Doll: 28 cm. • Big Baby Doll: 45 cm. • Washable.

45 cm

• A baby doll with a fabric body and plastic arms and legs. • Easy to dress for young children.

• Small African. 313 309 333 225 7

• Big African. 313 309 333 224 0

• Small European. 313 309 333 223 3

• Big European. 313 309 333 226 4

• Small North African. 313 309 333 229 5

• Big North African. 313 309 333 228 8


House Corner

Dolls’ Clothing Range • Attractive cotton dolls’ clothing; easy to slip on and fasten, using Velcro®. • Washable at 30°C. • Size 1 : for 28 cm Dolls; Size 2 : for 30 to 34 cm Dolls; Size 3 : for 43 to 45 cm Dolls.

NEW

Pyjamas - Size 1

Baby Sleep Bag Size 1 and 2

Velvet-effect cotton. 313 309 332 977 6

313 309 332 979 0

Trouser Set - Size 2

Sports Outfit - Size 2

Dress Set - Size 2

1 cap, 1 jumper and 1 pair of trousers.

Consists of trousers and a sweatshirt.

Including a dress, a jacket and trousers.

313 309 332 984 4

313 309 332 980 6

313 309 332 982 0

Trouser Set - Size 3

Dress Set - Size 3

Including soft jeans and a stripy jumper.

1 long-sleeved dress with collar and 1 pair of trousers.

313 309 332 981 3

313 309 332 986 8

Pyjama Set - Size 3 1 pair of pyjamas and nightcap.

Summer Dress - Size 3

313 309 332 985 1

313 309 332 978 3

161


House Corner

D o l l s

a n d

A c c e s s o r i e s

POINT Light and washable.

Toddler Trolley

Quilted cotton basket for holding a doll and toys. Easy to fill, empty and transport with 2 handles.

Designed with childfriendly rounded shapes, this cart transports loads in two compartments while steadying toddlers as they take their first steps. Push-bar adjustable to two heights: 56 and 61 cm.

• Washable at 30°C. • L/W/H: 39 x 25.5 x 13 cm. 313 309 399 388 5

• Solid wood push-bar, seat in plywood and fibreboard. • L/W: 50 x 30.5 cm. 313 309 371 117 5

12 MONTHS +

Basket

Pushchair Sturdy design in solid varnished wood. Fabric seat can be removed and washed.

A classic design and very stable. In solid, natural wood, this high chair blends with every type of kitchen style.

• H.: 51 cm. • Front wheelbase: 36.5 cm. • Rear wheelbase: 40.5 cm. • Cotton fabric, removable, machine washable at 30°C. 313 309 371 068 0

• L/W/H: 46.5 x 35 x 70 cm. • H. seat: 35 cm; H. tray: 50 cm. • Removable cotton fabric, machine washable at 30°C. 313 309 371 000 0

Zen Highchair

162

High Chair

Zen Bed

Pyramid design for high stability. Melamine tray suitable for frequent washing.

A large bed for dolls or... to cuddle up yourself! Very low and strengthened at ground level to withstand children jumping and to enable them to get out without moving the bed.

• L/W/H: 40 x 28 x 50 cm. Tray H: 38 cm. 313 309 372 888 3

• L/W/H: 72 x 43 x 36 cm. 313 309 372 887 6


House Corner

At Home • Wooden unit supplied with assembly instructions.

2 YEARS +

Laundry Unit All the basic functions of the laundry corner in one unit: washing, drying, ironing and folding laundry. Red and beech finish melamine, comes with a wooden iron. • L/W: 105 x 30 cm. • H. ironing board: 55 cm. • H. total: 100 cm. 313 309 371 231 8

Adjusts to children’s height

Ironing Table Foldable and adjustable (2 heights: 55 or 62 cm). Comes with a wooden iron. Thick varnished plywood. • L/W: 74 x 21.5 cm. 313 309 371 016 1

Iron • Sturdy solid wood and varnished plywood. • L/W/H: 18 x 9 x 8 cm. 313 309 371 158 8

Workbench Clothes Dryer Clothes dryer with 5 lines for clothing of all kinds. Lightweight and easy to tidy. Supplied with 10 wooden clothes pegs in 4 assorted colours. 2 year guarantee.

Housekeeping Set A stand holding a broom, a dustpan and brush and a scrubbing brush. Solid wood stand and brooms; plastic dustpan and brush.

• In wood. • L/W/H: 44 x 35 x 58 cm.

• H. stand : 92 cm. • L. broom: 70 cm. • No assembly required.

313 309 332 967 7

313 309 371 232 5

Workbench with a set of tools: 1 set square, screws, 1 clamp, 1 vice, 1 spanner, 1 hammer, 1 screwdriver, wedges, planks in 5 shapes or different sizes. Stable, robust wood, includes 3 boxes in 3 different colours for storing all 44 accessories. • In natural varnished wood. • L/W/H: 50 x 35 x 54 cm. 313 309 345 450 8

163


Theatre Corner

Theatre and Puppets

POINT Small footprint with built-in storage of puppets.

6 elastic bands to hold the puppets in place

Magnets to hold the door shut

Puppet Theatre To set up theatrical activity in the blink of an eye, a puppet theatre for placing on a table or piece of furniture. Two round windows on the front allow interactions between the stage and the characters. Practical design: once the story is finished, the curtains and doors close to store up to 6 puppets.

• Plywood, 12 and 14 mm thick, orange and blue with natural varnish finish. • Blue fabric curtains, metal curtain rod. • L/W/D: 85 x 56 x 18 cm. 313 309 336 194 3

Hand Puppets These highly expressive puppets encourage role-playing. They have hard heads and fabric clothing and hands. • Average H.: 30 cm.

Finger Puppets for Nursery Rhymes 7 endearing coloured glove puppets to bring alive the favourite nursery rhymes and counting songs of children: Hickory Dickory Dock, Once I Caught a Fish Alive, The Teddy Bears’ Picnic etc.

164

Ulysses the Puppet

313 309 352 414 0

Ulysses the globe-trotter helps children discover the world. He encourages storytelling and questions, all on travelrelated themes.

Girl 313 309 352 416 4

• In cotton and cotton velvet. • Machine washable at 30°C. • Average H.: 11 cm. 313 309 352 486 7

NEW

Wolf

Boy

• H.: 42 cm. 313 309 342 177 7

313 309 352 415 7

Puppets of the World 4 puppets with which children can identify. An ideal resource for language activities and time spent in groups. The school bag is detachable.

• Polyester and cotton velvet, machine washable at 30°C. Allow to dry gently at room temperature. • H: 32 cm.

Awa

Kim

Tom

Mani

313 309 352 500 0

313 309 352 498 0

313 309 352 497 3

313 309 352 499 7


Theatre Corner

Dressing-up • A complete range of furniture and accessories for successful festive activities: theatre, celebrations, holidays, etc.

Helmets 2 helmets - plastic - adjustable width: one fireman’s helmet and one workman’s helmet. • Plastic. • L/W/H: 28 x 20 x 11 cm. 313 309 340 218 9

“3 Cape Set” Disguise

Compact Dressing-up Unit

3 items: witch’s cape, prince’s cape and princess’s cape.

Compact and sturdy, this costume and make-up unit on wheels includes an unbreakable Plexiglas make-up mirror, a clothes-hanging rail, 4 transparent plastic storage trays and 1 rail with 7 hooks.

• Cotton, washable at 30°C. • Easy to put on, close with Velcro®. 313 309 340 193 9

• In beech effect melamine. • L/W/H: 70 x 55 x 124 cm. W/H mirror: 40 x 100 cm. 313 309 371 229 5

Doctor

Cook Fireman

Adjustable using Velcro®.

1 apron and 1 chef’s hat. Adjustable using Velcro®. Accessories not included.

• H: 45 cm. • 100% cotton, washable at 30°C. 313 309 340 225 7

• H: 45 cm. • 100% cotton, washable at 30°C. 313 309 340 226 4

• H: 45 cm. • 100% cotton, washable at 30°C. 313 309 340 224 0

Adjustable using Velcro®. Accessories not included.

Police Officer

• H: 45 cm. • 100% cotton, washable at 30°C. 313 309 340 223 3

Adjustable using Velcro®.

165


Pretend Group Play

The Car, The Boat • A fun and original play area with its own game world. • Suitable for classroom and kindergarten spaces of all kinds. • Supplied with assembly instructions.

POINT • 6 seater. • A wide id range of possible activities.

Front view Rear view

The Car A fun, original play area with its own game world. Take your dolls or friends on holiday. Climb in, press the button, move into gear, indicate, and steer away. Storage space under the seats. Curved shapes and protective sides.The Car will soon become a popular feature of the classroom or play area. • In thick varnished plywood and red lacquered fibre panels. Rear-view mirror in unbreakable Plexiglas. • L/W/H: 113 x 74 x 55 cm. • H. seat: 25 cm. 313 309 370 985 1

Rear view

Play Boat All aboard! Formidable adventures are in store with this fully equipped boat in bright colours: 2 ship’s wheels, 1 serigraphed compass, 1 anchor, 1 chest with drawer, 1 movable gangplank, 2 portholes (1 closed with Plexiglas) and one mast with flag.

166

• 18 mm plywood, plain varnish and blue and orange lacquer. • For indoor use only. • L/W/H: 156 x 78 x 95 cm (without the mast), 135 cm (with the mast). • Gangplank: 31 cm wide. 313 309 370 981 3

Raise anchor

Hide the pirate treasure

Slide through the large porthole


Play Corners

Doll House, Castle • A complete play world with accessories (sold separately).

2 YEARS +

Doll House This big wooden house, open on four sides, is designed so that several children can play together. Its two floors, doorways and large scale stimulate children to create their own makebelieve world. Comes with a ladder. Furniture sold separately.

POINTS • Robust furniture in solid wood. • Rounded shapes. • No small parts that can be swallowed.

• H/W: 62 x 58 cm. 313 309 370 200 5

Doll Furniture Doll house furniture in solid natural wood, silk-screen printed and varnished in red.

Kitchen and Bathroom

Lounge and Bedroom

9 components: 1 kitchen unit, 1 round table and 4 chairs, 1 bath tub, 1 unit and wash basin, 1 toilet.

8 components: 1 sofa, 1 coffee table, 2 armchairs, 1 double bed, 1 desk, 1 chair and 1 sideboard.

• L/W/H kitchen unit : 8 x 4 x 6 cm; Ø/H round table: 9 x 5.5 cm; H/W chair: 4 x 7 cm; L/W bath tub: 12 x 7 cm. 313 309 370 203 6

• L/W/H sofa: 12 x 6 x 6 cm; L/W/H table: 7 x 7 x 3 cm; H/W armchair: 5 x 6.3 cm; L/W/H bed: 16 x 9.8 x 6.3 cm. 313 309 370 204 3

Families • These dolls can stand up and the braided body can be bent to bring them to life. • Wooden heads and feet.

European Family

African Family

• H.: 13/12/11/10.5 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 333 170 0

• H.: 13/12/11/10.5 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 333 241 7

3 YEARS +

The Castle Square-built and very sturdy, this fortified castle creates endless play situations for several children at a time. The drawbridge is raised using a small cord, crimped at the end to hold it. Bottomless, the castle ambiance changes depending on the surroundings (carpet, grass, etc.). Crenels are slightly rounded. Comes with a wooden ladder. • Made of varnished plywood, red-lacquered drawbridge. • L/W/H: 47.5 x 37.5 x 26.5 cm. • Characters sold separately. 313 309 370 201 2

167


Play Corners

Farm and Animals • With its removable roof and large format, this farm allows 4 children to play at the same time. • A complete play world with animals and characters (sold separately).

Removable roof for easy interior access

The Farm A large-scale farm in varnished plywood. Its many doors and windows and a removable roof allow several children to play at once, with plenty of room for handling the animals. • L/W/H: 54 x 54 x 28.5 cm. • Delivered in kit form with assembly instructions.

54

cm

313 309 371 063 5

Cow-Shed A feeding trough and 2 windows to see what is going on inside. When placed on the paddock, it is held in place by 3 bushes. Animals not included.

Paddock

• In natural and red lacquered 10 mm plywood and MDF. • Requires assembly - Assembly instructions included. • L/W/H: 20 x 15 x 14 cm. 313 309 345 437 9

• In natural and red lacquered 10 mm plywood and MDF. • Requires assembly - Assembly instructions included. • L/W/H: 44 x 27 x 5.5 cm. 313 309 345 438 6

A very open game board, for use on its own or with the cow-shed. Can also be used to complete the large wooden farm made from the same materials. Animals not included.

Figurines • All characters and animals are in semi-hard painted plastic.

168

Farm Animals

Cats and Dogs

9 animals: cow, goat, lamb, ewe, sheep, hen, cock, pig and horse.

6 animals: 4 dogs and 2 cats.

• L/H turkey: 6 x 8 cm; L/H horse: 11.5 x 8 cm. 313 309 345 436 2

• L/H dalmatian: 9 x 7 cm; L/H brown cat: 5 x 6 cm. 313 309 345 434 8


Non slip Underside

The countryside

Play Corners

• Hemmed edges • New material

The forest

Large Nature Mat This activity mat illustrates 4 different natural environments (the countryside, the forest, the savannah and the sea) to develop animal games and stimulate the imagination. Anti-slip rubber covered with a 100% polyamide level loop carpet, the mat is very easy to roll. Sold without accessories. Washable in soapy water.

The sea

The savannah

• W/L mat: 150 x 100 cm. 313 309 345 414 0

Forest Animals Marine Animals 6 animals: polar bear, penguin, ray, tortoise, shark and dolphin.

In semi-hard painted plastic: wolf, fox, deer, hind, fawn, beaver, hedgehog, squirrel, rabbit and badger.

• L. bear: 13 cm. 313 309 345 432 4

• Average H: 4.5 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 345 410 2

Mother and Baby Animals

Wild Animals

In semi-hard painted plastic, wild animals represented by a mother and her baby: giraffes, elephants, tigers, hippopotamuses, zebras.

In semi-hard painted plastic: 1 rhinoceros, 1 leopard, 1 elephant, 1 zebra, 1 giraffe, 1 panther, 1 crocodile, 1 dromedary, 1 lion and 1 tiger.

• H. giraffe: 16 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 345 408 9

• Average L/H: 10 x 6 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 345 407 2

169


Play Corners

Open

Lower table on wheels

138

cm

70

cm

2 YEARS +

Playing Table Stowaway children’s table for playing and storing figurines, animals or cars. Its simple shape and design lends itself to many different play worlds (house, garage, castle, farm). The table is two tables in one: the lower table which has wheels and storage compartments slides underneath when not in use. The bridge connects the two levels during play.

Closed

74.

5c

m

70

cm

• Green lacquered varnished plywood. • L/W: 74.5 x 70 cm. • H. upper level/lower level: 27/ 21 cm. 313 309 372 494 6

Soft Animals • A collection of soft, thick, light animals that are very pleasant to the touch. • Hand-painted and made from a natural material: latex.

170

Soft Animals Mare and Foal

Soft Animals Cow and Calf

• L/W/H of mare: 16 x 5 x 14 cm; L/W/H of foal: 11 x 4.5 x 11.5 cm. 313 309 345 462 1

• L/W/H of cow: 18 x 5 x 11.5 cm; L/W/H of calf: 10.5 x 4 x 7.6 cm. 313 309 345 463 8


SEE ALSO PPlastic trays

p. 2555

Play Corners

NEW

POINT • Rounded corners • Raised edges to avoid toys falling off

49 cm

Adjustable shelf

Playing Table on Casters This large playing table is ideal for play while standing up, allowing a variety of scenarios to be set up: farm, garage, castle, house, etc. Adjustable storage shelves on 2 sides.

86 cm

• Structure in 18 mm birch-effect melamine with rounded PVC edges. • L/W/H: 86 x 86 x 49 cm. • 4 self-locking ABS swivel casters. • Supplied with 1 set of assembly instructions. 313 309 372 369 7

86 cm

Soft Animals Ewe and Lamb

Soft Animals Giraffe and Lion

Soft Animals - Elephant and Baby Elephant

• L/W/H of ewe: 13 x 4.5 x 9.8 cm; L/W/H of lamb: 9 x 3 x 8 cm. 313 309 345 464 5

• L/W/H of giraffe: 19 x 7 x 20 cm; L/W/H of lion: 16 x 6 x 10 cm. 313 309 345 465 2

• L/W/H of elephant: 18.5 x 8 x 11.5 cm; L/W/H of baby elephant: 14 x 5 x 8.5 cm. 313 309 345 466 9

171


Play Corners

Garages, Road Circuit • A set of garages, vehicles and accessories to bring the car corner to life.

2 YEARS +

Multi-Level Garage A parking garage in varnished plywood big enough for several children to play together. Red wooden tubes support the floors. Traffic flows easily up and down 6 ramps connecting the 3 levels. • L/W/H: 51 x 41 x 32 cm. • Comes in kit form, cars sold separately. 313 309 371 015 4

Service Station Hard-wearing and comprehensive: 1 access ramp, 1 fixed vehicle lift, 2 petrol pumps, 2 mobile rollers and a shop corner. For use on its own or combined with the large garage so that up to 6 children can play with it. • L/W/H: 30 x 40 x 14 cm. • In clear varnished and green lacquered plywood. • Requires assembly. • Assembly instructions included, cars not included. 313 309 371 166 3

Non-slip underside

Road Mat This lively coloured mat fosters children’s imagination and enables them to grasp the concepts of organising space. Anti-slip rubber covered with a 100% polyamide level loop carpet. Easily rolled up to facilitate storage. Sold without accessories. Washable in soapy water.

172

• L/W mat: 150 x 100 cm. 313 309 333 185 4

POINTS • A large play sppace for 4-6 children. • EEachh side id can be “connected” to a 2nd mat to expand the game.


Play Corners

Lift

Two way door

Car wash rollers

Garage Station On 3 storeys, accessible by 3 ramps and 1 lift. With 2 gates to open and close, 1 two-way door, 2 car wash rollers, 1 petrol pump, parking spaces and a helipad. For 4 children. • In varnished plywood with a natural and yellow finish. • L/W/H: 61 x 50 x 39 cm. 313 309 371 160 1

Petrol pump

Little People The European family and the mixed-race family with mother, father, daughter and son. Each doll can be in a sitting or standing position. • H. standing: 5.5 cm. • Set of 8. 313 309 363 056 8

Wooden Vehicles

Wooden Cars

In stained solid wood: Jeep, 4x4, taxi, Formula 1, van, bus.

Varnished wooden cars in three colours. The wheels are permanently attached and roll on any surface.

• Silent wheels in flexible plastic. • Average L/W/H: 4.8 x 2.5 x 3.5 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 333 283 7

• L/W/H: 6.5 x 3.2 x 3.5 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 333 069 7

Race Track 4 cars race around a circuit on levels. • Wood. • H: 24 cm. • L: 25 cm. • Car L/W: 4 × 3 cm. 313 309 399 384 7

Toy Road Signs Made of unvarnished wood, the main signs regulating road traffic. • H.: 6 cm. • Set of 14. 313 309 333 173 1

173


Play Corners

Vehicles • A range of plastic vehicles with rounded edges in bright, permanent colours. • The soft, silent rubber wheels are attached by special non-removable rivets.

Mobile ladder 14 c

m

16 cm

Ambulance and Fire Engine 4 vehicles: 2 ambulances with opening rear door, and 2 fire engines with mobile ladder. • L: 14 cm. 313 309 333 299 8

Building-Site Trucks

25 cm

In robust, rigid plastic, 4 trucks with different functions.

Large Fire Engine

• L: 16 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 333 169 4

• With 2 characters. • L: 25 cm. 313 309 387 140 4

Big Lorries These 2 large plastic lorries are strong and articulated. They can be used for many different loading and unloading games. They have wide, very quiet wheels. Detachable shovel Inclining carrier bed

25

cm

Trucks Dumper truck and tank truck that can be filled and emptied, rotating cement-mixer.

Dump Truck

Tractor-Digger

• L/W/H: 25 x 12 x 15 cm. • Set of 3. 313 309 387 083 4

• L/W/H: 31 x 23 x 21 cm. • Wheels L: 5 cm. 313 309 387 165 7

• L/W/H: 41 x 19 x 18 cm. • Wheels L: 5 cm. 313 309 387 166 4

7 cm

Sports Cars

174

9 cm

Family Cars

A collection of soft plastic cars: F1 racers, Porsches, convertibles and Renault Alpines.

A collection of soft plastic vehicles: Volvo 760, Ford Scorpio, Mercedes 300, Saab 900 convertible.

• L/W: 7 x 5 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 333 074 1

• L/W: 9 x 5 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 333 075 8

7 cm

Plastic Vehicles 8 vehicles: sports car, 4-wheel drive car, small van, fire engine, ambulance, airliner, private plane, helicopter. • L: 7 cm. 313 309 332 983 7


Play Corners

Train Set • To create a dynamic play world - easy to assemble wooden parts: wooden rails, train, animals. A wooden bridge can be added as well as a passenger train.

POINT Excellent quality finish.

Wooden Train Set A full circuit made up of: 10 rails including 1 bridge, 1 locomotive, 3 carriages, 3 signals, 2 buildings, 2 trees and 2 animals. • Circuit dimensions: 60 x 44 cm. • 25 pieces. 313 309 345 457 7

Express Train This express train comes with 1 carriage and 2 locomotives, enabling children to choose the direction of the train and turn it round. • L/W/H: 37 x 3.5 x 5 cm. • 3 pieces. 313 309 345 458 4

Magnetic coupling system Front / Back

Reversible curves enabling bends to the left and right.

The Station Bridge-Viaduct A Bridge-Viaduct to add extra detail to the Rail Circuit and expand the zoo play universe.

Extra Rails

• L/H: 37 x 7 cm. • 3 pieces. 313 309 345 454 6

313 309 345 456 0

16 rails with assorted points.

Wooden station with two decorated façades, one with clock. Rails integrated in the platform, mobile signals and a bench. The roof is transparent. • L/W/H: 19 x 12.5 x 15 cm. 313 309 345 459 1

175


Play Corners

Water and Sand Equipment Double Water Basin This double unit in thick resistant plastic contains two basins of different depths separated by a lock. A channel runs all around the edges to keep the water flowing. Fitted with a drainage tap, height-adjustable and caster-mounted. • Basin L/W/H: 130 x 78 x 30 cm; H. from floor to basin edge: 51 to 64.5 cm; weight: 14 kg; depth basin: 23/16 cm. • Storage Shelf sold separately. 313 309 373 135 7

Storage Shelf This red shelf in flexible plastic fits the metal frames of all the basins, for storing all water game accessories. • L/W/H: 80 x 72.5 x 7 cm. 313 309 373 136 4 Drainage tap

Storage Shelf sold separately

Height-adjustable

Playing Surface Cover Thick varnished fibre panel with rounded angles for fitting inside the edges of the Double Water Basin so that its surface can be used as an activity area. Its casters and handles make it easy to move it about. • L/W: 132 x 81 cm. 313 309 373 139 5

Caster-mounted

POINT 2 trays of differin ing depths to enable the flow of water between them, or for fun with different materials such as sand and gravel.

Water and Sand Basin A play area with two interconnecting levels. Water and sand can be moved up and down two ramps. Fitted with a drain, stopper and 2 casters.

Legs fitted with casters

• L/W/H tub: 97 x 74.5 x 22 cm. • H. from floor to edge: 50 to 63 cm. • Weight: 1 kg. • Storage Shelf sold separately. 313 309 373 122 7

2 handles make it easy to move about

Storage Shelf This red shelf in flexible plastic fits the metal frames of all the basins, for storing all water game accessories. • L/W/H: 80 x 72.5 x 7 cm. 313 309 373 136 4

POINTS

Storage Shelf sold separately

176

Height-adjustable

• Water and sand basin designed for 4 to 6 children. • Robust metal structure. • Height-adjustable.


Play Corners

Small Transparent Sand and Water Tub

Many possible uses (can be placed on the ground)

A strong plastic transparent tub with raised edges to help children experiment and see their results. The tub is fitted with a valve for emptying. It comes with a cover, which can be placed under the tub for placing accessories, and has height-adjustable tubular legs (44-58 cm), equipped with casters and a brake. • L/W/H: 89 x 63 x 44 or 58 cm. • Depth of tub: 23 cm.

Height adjustable

313 309 373 007 7

Shelf

Casters make this tub easy to move about

Handling Tray Garden Tools 6 tools - hard-wearing metal with wooden handles for small hands: 2 rakes and 4 spades in 2 different shapes. • L. spade: 21 cm. • L. rake: 15 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 333 314 8

2 hard-wearing spades and rakes, made of plastic, in 2 matching colours.

A rectangular plastic tray to fill with water, sand, grains or soil. Can be used freely by several children, indoors or out, for handling or building games or for creating plantations. Hangs on a wall after use.

• L.: 15 cm. • 4 pieces. 313 309 333 315 5

• In thick, rigid, red plastic. • L/W/H: 70 x 50 x 17 cm. 313 309 333 330 8

Spades and Rakes

Boats Spades

4 different models of plastic boats (sailing boats, rowing boats, tugs and trawlers) which can be hooked together front to back.

Handles are contoured to fit the shape of children’s fingers. 3 colours.

Small Ladles

• L: 23 cm. • Set of 12.

• Ø: 8 cm; L. handle: 6 cm. • D: 4 cm.

• L/H: 11 x 6.5 cm (except sailing boat, 13 cm high). • Set of 8.

313 309 333 054 3

313 309 333 061 1

313 309 333 155 7

Adapted for small hands, 6 ladles in 3 different colours.

Sieves A variety of sizes with different grades of mesh. 3 colours. • L: 22 and 16.5 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 333 131 1

Have fun with running water

Pouring Containers

Perforated Small Ladles

In thick resistant plastic. 3 colours.

In thick resistant plastic, 3 different sized recipients. 3 colours. Not suitable for children under 36 months.

• Ø/H: 18 x 16 cm. • Set of 6.

• H. blue pitcher: 13 cm; Ø: 24/19/15 cm. • Set of 3.

• Average L/W/H: 11.5 x 10 x 3 cm. • Set of 36.

• Ø: 8 cm; L. handle: 6 cm. • Depth: 4 cm.

313 309 333 053 6

313 309 333 043 7

313 309 380 020 6

313 309 333 309 4

Buckets

Sand Moulds 16 means-of-transport moulds and 20 animal moulds. 4 colours.

12 small ladles in 4 different colours for fun letting water or sand flow through the little holes.

177


178


To discover... Artistic Activities Musical Instruments Audio Games

P.181 NEW

rtistic activities such as music, painting, drawing etc. develop children’s listening skills, self-expression through movement, manual dexterity, imagination and creative spirit from the earliest age. Selected and designed with the greatest care, our instruments, our supports, accessories and tools offer all kinds of artistic possibilities that children will love to use, while encouraging their creativity.

A

Music Instruments

p. 180

Arts and Crafts

Maxi-Sticker Shapes

P.182

Stickers

p. 182

Things to Decorate

p. 186

Materials

p. 193

Paper and Cardboard

p. 197

Markers and Felt-tips

p. 198

Painting and Accessories

p. 200

Stencils

p. 204

Foam Stamps

p. 205

Modelling and AfďŹ xing

p. 206

Beads and Accessories

p. 208

Marionettes for Decorating

P.186 179


Music

Large-bar Metallophone

Dring, dring, dring: 8 bells on metal handles; clip clap: small plastic discs; chang chang: 2 pairs of small metal cymbals; chu chu chu: wheel of pearls.

Mounted on a wooden sounding box for excellent resonance, 8 long bars measuring 11 to 15 cm, with wide spacing between attachment points for easy striking. Screw-on natural metal bars, from C to C, solid wood base with natural varnish finish. Sold with 2 mallets in natural wood.

• L: 12 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 380 405 1

• L/W/H: 25 x 15.5 x 3 cm. • L. mallet: 19 cm. 313 309 380 493 8

Musical Rattles

Soprano Recorder

Small Maracas

Small Rain Sticks

Soft-toned recorder, baroque fingering.

• Ø maracas: 5.8 cm. • Made of plastic. 313 309 380 362 7

• L/Ø: 20 x 5 cm. • Set of 2. 313 309 380 292 7

• L: 32 cm. 313 309 380 489 1

Cuckoo and Dove Bird Calls

Cymbals

Two wooden instruments to faithfully imitate birdcalls.

With fabric handles for striking together.

• L: 8 cm and 10.5 cm. 313 309 380 487 7

• Ø: 20 cm. 313 309 380 479 2

2-Tone Wooden Guiro 2 notched tubes of different lengths and a wooden scraper stick in two tones. 313 309 380 481 5

2-Tone Woodblock Two-tone musical tube with sleeve and wooden stick. • L. woodblock: 19.5 cm. 313 309 380 486 0

Tambourines In wood, natural skin and metals. • Ø: 20 cm.

Bongos A pair of varnished wood drums, with natural skin. Tuning key included. • Ø/H bongos: 19 and 16 cm x 17 cm. 313 309 380 316 0

180

Rhythm Tambourine

Tambourine with Jingle Cymbals

Tambourine without Skin

Made with natural skin.

With 6 pairs of jingle cymbals.

With 6 pairs of jingle cymbals.

313 309 380 490 7

313 309 380 477 8

313 309 380 478 5


Music

3 YEARS +

Musikit These high quality instruments allow teachers to organise workshops for learning about music. With 20 rhythmic instruments, this very complete set can be used to equip a class or music workshop. It comprises: 1 tambourine with drumskin, 1 tambourine with jingle cymbals, 1 tambourine without drumskin, 2 triangles, 2 pairs of claves, 1 wooden guiro, 1 two-tone woodblock, 1 single-tone woodblock, 1 guiro-maracas, 2 pairs of wood maracas, 2 pairs of finger cymbals, 1 pair of cymbals, 2 jingle bell bracelets, 2 pairs of plastic castanets. All supplied in a bag with pockets, handles and attachment points for easy storage and transport. • Instruments in solid wood, natural skin and metal, plastic castanets. • Ø tambourine: 20 cm; cymbals: 15 cm. • L. maracas: 15 cm; triangles: 10 and 14 cm; claves: 17 cm; guiro-maracas: 15 cm. 313 309 380 245 3

Instrument Holder Bag 313 309 380 244 6

Language game

18 cm

16 photo boards

24 cm

Lotto games

Musical Instruments Audio Games For setting up activities around spoken language, listening and discovery of the world on the theme of musical instruments. • Language game: by looking at the photo boards, children learn to recognise different instruments, their family (strings, wind, percussion, etc.), what they are made of (wood, brass, metal, plastic, etc.), their origin, their sound and so on, and acquire an accurate vocabulary. • Audio lotto games: several activities with progressively increasing difficulties around 36 different sounds, to develop listening, discrimination and aural memory. • The box contains: 16 cardboard photo boards, 6 cardboard lotto boards, 36 plastic tokens, 1 40-minute CD and 1 teacher’s leaflet. • L/W of photo boards and lotto boards: 24 x 18 cm. • Ø token: 3.5 cm. 313 309 337 226 0

6 lotto boards 18 cm

4 YEARS + 6 CHILDREN

24 cm

1 CD lasting 40 minutes 36 tokens

Cords go through slit between lids.

Portable Listening Unit

Stereo Headphones

Very compact and lightweight, this listening unit is easy to carry around, facilitating listening workshop activities. It has two covered compartments which hold up to 26 CDs, 11 audio cassettes, 1 multiheadphone adapter, etc. Headphones hang up on the crossbar. The side storage area can be used for documents (maximum format A4).

Comfortable lightweight, adjustable headphones, specially designed for young children. For individual listening or use in workshops.

• L/W/H: 33 x 32 x 43 cm. • L/W/D compartment: 27 x 14.5 x 16 cm and 27 x 12 x 16 cm. • In thick varnished plywood, red finish on lids. 313 309 372 836 4

• Fitted with 3.5 mm jack. • Ø headband: 3.5 cm. • Ø speakers: 7 cm. 313 309 379 048 4

Stereo MultiHeadphone Adapter To create listening groups and eliminate interference, this adapter allows children to plug in their headphones 5 at a time and listen to the same CD. • Fitted with 3.5 mm jack. • L. jack: 3.5 cm. 313 309 379 049 1

181


Arts and Crafts

Stickers NEW

POINT Precut stickers for easy use.

784

400

STICKERS

STICKERS

2.5 cm

3.5 cm

Coloured Stickers 784 stickers in different sizes and 8 assorted colours: circles, foods, animals, plants, clothes and vehicles.

Maxi-Sticker Shapes

• Ø flower: 2.5 cm; H boots: 2.5 cm. 313 309 321 354 9

• Ø: 3.5 cm. 313 309 321 353 2

400 stickers. 10 assorted shapes and 10 assorted colours.

1.800

1.450

STICKERS

STICKERS

2 cm

2.5 cm

Stickers - Circle

Stickers - Geometric Shapes

1.450 stickers. 16 sheets. 3 sizes in 8 assorted colours.

1.800 stickers. 16 sheets. 3 shapes in 8 assorted colours and 2 sizes.

• Ø: 2.5/2/1 cm. 313 309 321 252 8

• L/W: 2 x 1 cm. 313 309 321 326 6

500

1.400 STICKERS

STICKERS

4 cm

182

4 cm

Stickers - Fancy Shapes

Maxi Stickers - Geometric Shapes

1.400 stickers. 16 sheets. 8 shapes in 8 assorted colours.

500 stickers. 16 sheets. 10 shapes in 8 assorted colours.

• L/W: 1.2 x 1 cm. 313 309 321 254 2

• Average L/W: 3 x 2.5 cm. 313 309 321 327 3


620

STICKERS

STICKERS

3 cm

3 cm

Metallic Stickers - Party

Maxi Stickers - Bears

Metallic Stickers - Stars

380 stickers. 16 sheets. 3 sizes in 8 assorted colours.

320 stickers. 10 sheets. 5 assorted metallic colours: gold, silver, blue, red and green.

620 stickers. 10 sheets. 19 shapes and 5 assorted metallic colours: gold, silver, blue, red and green.

• L/W: 4/3.5/2.8 cm. 313 309 321 253 5

• L.: 3 cm. 313 309 321 324 2

• Average H: 2 cm. 313 309 321 323 5

680

960

430

STICKERS

STICKERS

STICKERS

2 cm

Metallic Stickers - Fantasia

1.9 cm

2.7 cm

Alphabet Colouring-in Stickers

680 stickers. 10 sheets. 15 different designs in 5 metallic colours: pink, green, turquoise, gold and silver.

Capital Letter Stickers

• Average size: 2 cm. 313 309 321 322 8

• H. letter: 1.9 cm. 313 309 321 321 1

960 stickers: 26 capital letters and one hyphen. 4 assorted colours. 16 sheets.

430 black and white stickers: 26 letters and 8 accents and signs (1 to 4 copies per sheet), half of which include patterns to provide decoration ideas. 12 sheets. • H: 3 cm. 313 309 321 403 4

1.750 STICKERS

450

420

STICKERS

STICKERS

2 cm

1.8 cm

Counting Stickers

Arts and Crafts

320

STICKERS

4 cm

380

1.750 stickers. 28 sheets. Figurative stickers and counting dots from 1 to 5, numbers from 0 to 9 and round stickers for number association.

Chromatic Stickers - Sea 450 chromatic stickers printed in 4 colours. 6 sheets. 24 different marine plants and animals.

Stickers - Eyes

• Average H.: 1.8 cm. 313 309 321 209 2

• Average size: 2 cm. 313 309 321 352 5

• Ø eye: 3 cm. 313 309 321 266 5

210 pairs of eyes on photo paper, very realistic. 15 sheets. 7 different styles.

183


480

STICKERS

STICKERS

3.2 cm

3.2 cm

Arts and Crafts

500

Illustrated Stickers - The Castle

Illustrated Stickers - Children of the World

500 stickers. 12 sheets. 4 colours based on the theme of the castle, with 40 characters.

480 stickers. 12 sheets. 4 colours, 40 different girls and boys from all over the world.

• Av. H: 3.2 cm. 313 309 321 328 0

• Av. H: 3.2 cm. 313 309 321 332 7

480

500

STICKERS

STICKERS

3 cm

3 cm

Illustrated Stickers - Farm Animals

Illustrated Stickers - Wild Animals

500 stickers. 12 sheets. 4 colours based on the theme of the farm. 17 different characters and animals.

480 stickers. 12 sheets. 17 different wild animals in 4 colours.

• H. frog: 2 cm; H. horse: 3.5 cm; H. hen: 2.7 cm. 313 309 321 325 9

• Average size: 3 cm. 313 309 321 319 8

750

820

STICKERS

STICKERS

4.3 cm

2 cm

Illustrated Stickers - Figurines 820 stickers. 12 sheets. 16 different motifs in 4 colours.

184

• Average H: 2 cm. • H. tree and house: 3.5 cm. 313 309 321 239 9

Maxi Illustrated Stickers - Party 750 stickers. 18 sheets. 23 different motifs in 4 colours. • Average H: 3.5 cm. 313 309 321 238 2


POINT Can be repositioned during activity

750

600

STICKERS

STICKERS

6.5 cm

2.7 cm

Illustrated Stickers - Shapes and Colours

Illustrated Stickers - Creating People

750 stickers printed in 4 colours, 3 different shapes: hearts, circles and stars with highly varied designs and colours. 12 sheets.

600 stickers. 12 sheets. Hats, heads, bodies and legs: 50 parts to build together into 13 characters in a logical way, or free creation of funny or surprising combinations.

• H. large heart/small heart: 2.7 cm and 2 cm. 313 309 321 333 4

• H: 2 to 3 cm. 313 309 321 335 8

560

550

STICKERS

STICKERS

3.1 cm

3 cm

Illustrated Stickers - Seasons

Arts and Crafts

S t i c k e r s

560 stickers. 12 sheets. 4 colours on the theme of the seasons, illustrated by clothes and accessories, animals, plants, fruit, trees and the weather.

Photo Stickers - Farm Animals

• Size: 1.5 to 3 cm. 313 309 321 330 3

• H. chick: 1.2 cm; L/H cow : 4.5 x 3 cm. 313 309 321 401 0

550 stickers. 12 sheets. 46 photos of farm and wild animals. Relative sizes respected.

POINTS • Detachable strips. • Delayed-effect sticking action.

POINT Photo stickers..

450

560

STICKERS

STICKERS

2.1 cm

3 cm

Maxi Illustrated Stickers - Little Creatures

Photo Stickers - Foods

450 stickers in 4 colours that can be repositioned. Large format and rounded shapes arranged over 4 detachable strips make them easier to use for toddlers. 16 sheets.16 different, fun and decorative animals.

560 stickers. 12 sheets. 47 photos representative of each food group (meat, fish, dairy products, starchy foods, cereal-based products, sugary foods, fruits, vegetables).

• L: 3 cm. 313 309 321 318 1

• H. pineapple: 3.3 cm; L. carrot: 4 cm. 313 309 321 404 1

185


Arts and Crafts

Things to Decorate

Crowns 32 cardboard crowns to decorate. 4 different models. • L/H flat: 53.5 x 9.5 cm. 313 309 340 145 8

Marionettes for Decorating 15 precut bears and 15 precut characters to decorate with the child’s choice of materials and assemble using brads (sold separately). 4 precut accessories for decoration can be stuck onto the marionettes. • 15 boards, 2 characters/board. • H: 23 cm. 313 309 340 240 0

Multicoloured Brads 120 brads for creating, decorating or attaching pieces together (paper flowers, marionettes for decoration, etc.) as the child wishes. 2 different sizes and 6 different colours. • Metal. • Ø of head: 0.5 and 0.8 cm. 313 309 379 120 7

Giant Tree to Decorate Tree in thick cardboard for decoration all year round as a group activity. The tree is easy for the children to customise, perhaps as a four seasons tree or festive tree, with cotton, Christmas decorations, Easter eggs, drawings of animals, flowers, dead leaves, acorns, etc. Not suitable for children aged less than 3.

186

• 6 pieces for the trunk and 3 pieces for the top of the tree. • Assembly instructions. • H/W: 95 x 77 cm. • Weight: 0.75 kg. 313 309 340 301 8


Arts and Crafts Baskets for Decorating

Lanterns for Decorating

32 precut, grooved baskets for decorating, with 4 different models. The baskets can be filled with sweets, chocolates, trinkets, etc., with or without the handle.

32 grooved lanterns for decorating, with 4 different precut models that can be used to slide objects inside, brighten up Christmas trees or classrooms during the festive season, etc.

• L/W/H completed basket without handle: 9.5 x 9.5 x 4 cm. 313 309 340 205 9

• H/W completed lantern: 11 x 5.5 cm. 313 309 340 203 5

Bookmarks

Photo Frames

30 precut and grooved bookmarks for decorating, including 6 different animal models.

30 3-section photo frames in 6 different precut, grooved models for decorating to enhance a photo.

• Average H: 15 cm. 313 309 340 216 5

• L/H: 22 x 11 cm. 313 309 340 215 8

Figure Frames 30 precut figures to decorate (15 girls and 15 boys) and customise with an identity photo. The notches on the arms allow them to be hooked together. They can be hung up or stood up using the self-supporting feet. • H/W: 15 x 11.5 cm; Ø of photo space: 3.5 cm; light card grammage: 350 g. 313 309 339 412 5

187


Arts and Crafts

Decorating Kits SEE ALSO

• Figurative shapes in white cardboard to cut out and decorate.

• Cabochons • Paper and Cardboard

p. 194 p. 197

Blank Books Cardboard covers.

Large Size

Small Size

3 books, 24 pages each.

3 books, 20 pages each.

• L/W: 32 x 24 cm. 313 309 339 346 3

• L/W: 22 x 19 cm. 313 309 339 348 7

Frames for Decorating Landscape Format 10 notebooks of 32 pages each. 3 printed lines at the bottom of each page for writing. Soft cover. • L/W: 21 x 15 cm. Weight: 80 g. 313 309 324 246 4

An assortment of 30 square frames and 30 round frames, in 2 sizes. In very thick cardboard, can be decorated with felt-tip pens, stickers or glued items: crystals, glitter, colour pompoms, mosaics, etc. • Ø square frame: 11 and 21 cm. • Ø round frame: 11 and 21 cm. • Set of 60. 313 309 340 150 2

Robust handles in twisted brown paper

Calendars for Decorating 5 monthly calendars in white cardboard to decorate.

188

• L/W: 29.7 x 21 cm. Weight: 120 g. 313 309 340 175 5

Bags for Decorating 20 craft paper bags for decoration. • H/W/D: 21 x 18 x 8 cm. • Weight: 110 g. 313 309 340 178 6


t o

D e c o r a t e

• A range of textile supports for customisation and decoration. • 100% cotton, washable at 30°C.

Bags to Decorate

Shopping Bags Small Model

Shopping Bags Large Model

12 bags to hold small objects and gifts.

20 shopping bags.

20 shopping bags.

• L/W: 20 x 20 cm.

• L/W: 28 x 24 cm. 313 309 370 078 0

• L/W: 38 x 42 cm. 313 309 370 079 7

313 309 370 300 2

Arts and Crafts

T h i n g s

Fabric Supports

Dimensional Fabric Paint Fabric paint that swells with heat, creating an embroidery effect. Clean with water before drying. Comes in 30-ml bottles.

Pencil cases to decorate

Purses

12 pencil cases with zip closure.

20 purses with a zipper and key ring.

• L/W: 21.5 x 13.5 cm. 313 309 370 158 9

• L/W: 8.5 x 7 cm. 313 309 370 149 7

Fabric Paint Ready-to-use gel suitable for any fabric, natural or synthetic. Colours are set with an iron. Cleans with water. Comes in 100-ml bottles. • 6 colours: red, pink, yellow, green, blue and black. • Set of 6 bottles. 313 309 351 281 9

• 6 colours: red, yellow, green, blue, violet and black. • Set of 6 bottles. 313 309 351 001 3

Fabric Markers These markers can be used on all kinds of fabric. The drawing is set by ironing the reverse side of the cloth, making it machinewashable in warm water. Assortment of 10 colours. • L: 14 cm; Ø: 4 mm. • Set of 10. 313 309 351 433 2

189


Arts and Crafts

Papier Mâché and Wooden Shapes for Decorating

Multi-Boxes for Decorating Sturdy cardboard boxes in 5 different shapes (square, round, rectangle, hexagon and star).

Treasure Chests for Decorating 15 treasure chests to decorate and fill with treasure.

• L/W/H rectangle: 10 x 6 x 5 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 340 139 7

• L/W/H: 8 x 5.5 x 5.5 cm. 313 309 340 207 3

Mini-notebooks

Small Trays

15 mini-notebooks in cardboard to decorate and personalise.

5 papier mâché trays for decoration.

• L/W: 8 x 6 cm. 313 309 340 217 2

• L/W/H: 22 x 16 x 5 cm. 313 309 340 197 7

Miniframes

Candle Holders

Sturdy cardboard frames. 4 shapes (square, round, oval and heart-shaped).

15 papier mâché candle holders to be decorated, with 2 different models: heart and flower.

• L/W: 7.5 x 7.5 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 340 169 4

• L/W/H: 8 x 7 x 2 cm. • Candle holder: Ø 4 cm. 313 309 340 211 0

Handbags

190

1 original model

Wooden Bracelets 10 wooden bracelets in 2 sizes to paint. • Ø/W: 7 x 2.5/2 cm. 313 309 339 485 9

10 papier mâché handbags in rounded shapes for decoration.

Egg Cups

• H/W: 8 x 12.5 cm. 313 309 340 195 3

• Ø: 4.5 cm; H: 4.5 cm. 313 309 339 470 5

30 wooden egg cups for decorating.


Wooden Magnets 32 wooden magnets in 8 different shapes: house, elephant, whale, teddy, sweetie (or girl’s head), character, giraffe and T-shirt to decorate with paint (gouache, acrylic, etc.), felt-tip pens, paper or other decorative accessories. • Average size: 6 cm. 313 309 339 407 1

Wooden Key Ring

t o

D e c o r a t e

Decorative Bottle Openers 16 wooden bottle openers to decorate: 8 girls and 8 boys. • In wood and metal. • H/W/thickness: 10 x 5 x 0.8 cm. 313 309 339 468 2

Christmas Trees for Decorating

32 wooden key rings in 4 different shapes: heart, flower, car and fish for decorating using paint, (gouache, acrylic, etc.), felt-tip pens, paper or other decorative accessories.

10 Christmas trees with rounded corners, made up of 2 parts that easily slot together. The trees are made stable thanks to their base. 5 trees have holes to thread strings or raffia, for example.

• Average size: 6 cm. 313 309 339 408 8

• L/W/D: 14 x 11 x 0.3 cm. 313 309 339 402 6

Dressing-up Characters

Arts and Crafts

T h i n g s

Wooden Stars

20 wooden characters.

15 wooden stars, made up of 2 parts that easily slot together. They are drilled to allow them to be hung up using string or raffia.

• L: 14 cm. 313 309 340 176 2

• H/W/thickness: 11 x 10 x 0.3 cm. 313 309 340 232 5

Potted Flowers to be Decorated Coloured Sticks • L/W: 11 x 1 cm. • Set of 1.000. 313 309 350 224 7

10 wooden flowers with rounded edges, in 2 different models: daisy and tulip. A 2-part base that easily slots together makes the flower very stable. • H/W/thickness: 14.5 x 11 x 0.4 cm. 313 309 339 410 1

191


Arts and Crafts

T h i n g s

Plastic Supports

t o

D e c o r a t e

Flexible Flodable Vases to Decorate 16 transparent plastic vases for decoration with all-purpose felt tip pens, metallic felt tip pens, raised effect felt tip pens or acrylic paint. The vases can be filled with water, fine sand or small stones.

Masks 10 plastic masks for decoration, fitted with an elastic string. Can also be used as moulds.

• H/W: 27 x 15 cm. • Set of 16. 313 309 350 232 2

• H.: 16.5 cm. 313 309 340 179 3

Magic Plastic

Transparent Shapes Transparent shapes in hard plastic. Each shape opens in 2 parts and can be decorated or filled with light objects: balls, star, bell, Santa Claus, Christmas tree. All these objects can be hung up. • H. bell: 10 cm; Ø ball: 6 and 8 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 350 225 4

Hanging Christmas Decorations 8 different shapes in transparent plastic to be decorated with Deco pens, glitter, raisedeffect pens, paper (tissue paper, patterned cardboard), beads, raffia, etc. and hung up. • Average H/W: 10 x 7 cm. 313 309 350 229 2

Plastic which heat-shrinks to make brooches, tags, key-rings. After colouring the matt surface with coloured pencils, cut out the plastic as shown. When baked, it shrinks and becomes 3 times thicker and smaller. Not for use with felt-tip pens. Pencils may be used. • L/W sheet: 30 x 20.5 cm. • Set of 10 sheets. 313 309 318 012 4

Polystyrene Shapes

192

Eggs

Wreaths

Balls

Hearts

30 eggs.

15 wreaths.

50 balls.

15 hearts.

• Ø: 45 and 60 mm. 313 309 350 228 5

• Ø: 15 cm. 313 309 350 226 1

• Ø: 60, 80 and 100 mm. 313 309 350 227 8

• H.: 9 cm. 313 309 350 230 8


Arts and Crafts

Mirrors Unbreakable plastic covered with reflective film. Can be attached with glue to any material (cardboard, wood, etc.).

Felt Sheets

Square Mirrors

25 sheets of felt in 7 assorted colours. Easy to cut up.

• L/W/D: 12 x 12 x 0.15 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 340 100 7

• L/W: 31.5 x 22.5 cm. 313 309 339 488 0

Round Mirrors • Ø/D: 12 x 0.15 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 340 154 0

Sponge Sheets Synthetic sponge sheets, easy to cut with scissors or a craft knife, can be glued onto various surfaces. 4 assorted colours. • L/W: 30 x 20 cm. • Set of 14. 313 309 339 490 3

6.7 cm

Fun Shaped Hole-Punches 4 hole-punches with waste storage, with a flexible press to punch holes effortlessly. 4 fun shapes (heart, flower, star, fir tree). • L. of cut: 2 to 2.5 cm. • L/W/H: 6.7 x 4 x 6 cm. 313 309 348 078 1

Sponge Shapes 600 synthetic sponge shapes in bright colours which can be stuck to various materials. • Average L: 4 cm. 313 309 339 508 5

193


Arts and Crafts

Alumargent Sheets Annealed aluminium foil designed for the repoussé technique. Silver-coated on both sides.

Rhodoid 10 transparent plastic sheets for window decorations and mobiles. For use with Stained Glass Paint and Lead Piping.

• L/W/D: 27 x 20 cm x 6/100. • Set of 20 sheets. 313 309 340 107 6

313 309 380 243 9

Mosaic Chips Plastic mosaic chips in 9 lively assorted colours. Simple to use with white tube glue for a variety of surfaces: wood, glass, cardboard, tin, plastic.

10 mm

Coloured Wood Mosaic Chips To paste onto any rigid surface. 4 assorted colours.

• Average dim: 1 cm; 225 g. • + 1000 chips. 313 309 339 502 3

• L/W/D: 1 x 1 x 0.2 cm. • 4 bags of 500 g. 313 309 339 495 8

Glitter

Multi-Coloured Spangles

Shiny powder in 5 different colours to glue on all surfaces.

Sparkling spangles to glue onto a variety of surfaces.

• 5 x 50 g jars. 313 309 339 507 8

• Comes in 50 g shaker jar. 313 309 339 501 6

9 mm

7 mm

7 mm

194

30 mm

Heart and Star Shaped Studs

Decorative Shapes

Raffia

Approximately 460 studs in transparent, coloured plastic, for sticking on all surfaces. 2 shapes, 12 colours.

Approximately 230 decorative shapes in different precious materials for sticking on all surfaces.

To decorate various objects by weaving or gluing (lamp shades, clothes, hair, etc.). 125 g rolls (about 260 m), 6 assorted

• L. heart: 0.7 cm; L. star: 0.9 cm. 313 309 339 505 4

• Size: 0.7 to 3 cm. 313 309 339 535 1

• Set of 6. 313 309 339 498 9


Multicoloured Brads 120 brads for creating, decorating or attaching pieces together (paper flowers, marionettes for decoration, etc.) as the child wishes. 2 different sizes and 6 different colours. • Metal. • Ø of head: 0.5 and 0.8 cm. 313 309 379 120 7

Arts and Crafts

M a t e r i a l s

Paper flowers 30 paper flowers in 5 different bright, sparkling colours and 2 different shapes for use on various media, stuck and/or linked together with a brad. • Ø: 2 to 5.5 cm. 313 309 339 540 5

22 mm 33 mm

Wiggle Eyes Personalise puppets, characters and other creative projects with these eyes that stick on a variety of surfaces. An assortment of black and coloured eyes. • Ø: 2/1.8/1.5/1 cm. • Set of 200. 313 309 339 500 9

Self-adhesive Precious Stones

Cabochons In transparent coloured plastic, for sticking or moulding. • L/W large star: 3.3 x 3.3 cm. • In 7 shapes and 6 assorted colours. • 1 bag of 960 g. 313 309 315 052 3

Sticky Butterfly Cloth Flowers 118 bright little motifs in high-quality fabric, in 2 shapes and sizes, in 4 different shades, matt and glossy. 6 sheets. • Ø: 3/2.2 cm. 313 309 340 005 5

Glitter Frieze Stickers

136 sticker stones in transparent, coloured plastic, for sticking on all surfaces. 1 shape, 3 different sizes and 8 colours.

Small Organza Bags 15 organza bags, 4 different colours. For giving small gifts or storing jewels.

45 glittery friezes with 3 different shapes and 6 bright assorted colours. Cut-up and stick onto all surfaces. 9 sheets.

• Large square L: 0.6 cm. 313 309 315 059 2

• L/W: 10 x 7.5 cm. 313 309 340 233 2

• L/W: 30 x 0.5 cm. 313 309 340 013 0

195


Arts and Crafts 196

M a t e r i a l s

Self-adhesive Ribbons

Striped Pipe Cleaners

8 rolls of sticky tape that can be applied to rice paper, which children can then write on with a felt tip pen or writing pen. Easy to unstick. Can be used on paper, fabric, glass, wood, metal, etc.

100 pipe cleaners with stripes in 7 different colour combinations. Silky and flexible, for creating, embellishing and decorating. Very easy to handle.

• L/W: 10 m x 1.5 cm. 313 309 339 539 9

• L/Ø: 30 x 0.5 cm. 313 309 340 234 9

Sparkle Pipe Cleaners

Assorted Pipe Cleaners

10 assorted colours, velvety-soft and flexible.

10 assorted colours, velvety-soft and flexible.

• L/Ø: 30 x 0.6 cm. • Set of 100. 313 309 340 167 0

• L/Ø: 50 x 0.8 cm. • Set of 100. 313 309 340 174 8

Locks of Hair

Fancy Feathers

Coloured Feathers

Synthetic hair and beards in 3 colours to glue on paper, cardboard, wood, etc.

Approx. 300 guinea-fowl feathers, uniform or speckled.

Approx. 100 brightly-coloured turkey feathers.

• 150 g. 313 309 339 486 6

• L: 1 to 5 cm. 313 309 340 099 4

• L: 7 to 15 cm. 313 309 340 140 3

Pompoms

Shiny Pompoms

8 assorted colours.

8 assorted colours.

Coloured pompoms with a hole in the middle to string onto yarn, laces, pipe-cleaners etc.

• Ø: 3.5/2.5/1.2 cm. • Set of 200. 313 309 340 161 8

• Ø: 2/1 cm. • Set of 120. 313 309 387 011 7

• Ø: 4/3/2/1.5 cm. • Set of 200. 313 309 340 172 4

Pompom Beads


Arts and Crafts

Paper and Cardboard Folding paper Paper specially adapted to folding activities. 500 sheets: 10 lively colours.

Coloured Drawing Paper Squares

Rounds

• Side: 15 cm; weight: 65 g. 313 309 370 012 4

• Ø: 15 cm; weight: 65 g. 313 309 370 013 1

50 large-format sheets of paper in 25 assorted vat-dyed colours. • L/W: 50 x 35 cm; weight: 130 g. • Set of 50 sheets. 313 309 370 041 4

Brads sold separately

Transparent Paper

Corrugated Cardboard

Dyed paper for decorating, folding activities and making bouquets. 8 assorted colours.

25 large-format sheets of transparent paper in 10 assorted colours. Filter light when coloured.

20 sheets of micro-corrugated cardboard in 10 assorted vat-dyed colours. Very easy to cut.

• L/W: 75 x 50 cm; weight: 18 g. • Set of 24 sheets. 313 309 380 205 7

• L/W: 70 x 100 cm; weight: 42 g. • Set of 25 sheets. 313 309 370 049 0

• L/W: 35 x 50 cm. • Weight: 250 g.

Right-Handed Scissors

Left-Handed Scissors

• L: 12 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 348 014 9

• L: 12 cm. • Set of 5. 313 309 348 008 8

Tissue Paper

313 309 370 038 4

Card for Cutting 20 sheets of card, one white side, one grey side. • L/W: 40 x 30 cm. • Weight: 435 g. 313 309 380 236 1

197


Arts and Crafts

TIP:

Markers and Felt-tips

Should only be used in guided activities under adult supervision.

Fine Markers

Broad Felt-Tip Pens

12 markers, assorted colours.

Assortment of 12 colours.

• L.: 14 cm; Ø tip: 2 mm. • Set of 12.

• L.: 12.5 cm; Ø tip: 6 mm. • Set of 12.

313 309 351 801 9

313 309 351 802 6

2 YEARS +

Fabric Markers Felt-tip Pens 10 pens with different effects for use in stamping and decorating children’s work. Pack of 10 different colours. Washable inkremoved from hands using soap and water. • L.: 14 cm. 313 309 340 219 6

These markers can be used on all kinds of fabric. The drawing is set by ironing the reverse side of the cloth, making it machinewashable in warm water. Assortment of 10 colours. • L: 14 cm; Ø: 4 mm. • Set of 10. 313 309 351 433 2

POINTS • Crush-proof. • Water-washable. W t h

MAGNETIC

PIECES

Magnetic Erasable Whiteboards Whiteboards that can be written on and/ or have magnetic items put on them. For everyday classroom activities. For use with felt tip pens that are erasable with water. • Plastic and metal. • L/W: 33 x 24 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 375 149 2

Whiteboard Markers with Fixed Tip • Whiteboard markers, also usable on plastic, glass, and paper. • Washes clean with a wet sponge. • 8 assorted colours.

Graphic Slates

Whiteboard Markers

198

Fine Board Markers

• L.: 12 cm; Ø tip: 4.5 mm. • Set of 8.

• 8 assorted colours. • L: 14 cm; Ø tip: 3 mm. • Set of 8.

313 309 351 810 1

313 309 387 102 2

Erasable transparent plastic slates for coloured pencils and water-based felt-tip markers. Lines can be erased using an eraser or damp cloth. • L/W slate: 30 x 21 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 305 105 9


6 small tubes in 6 colours, used just like felt-tip pens. Thick texture applied directly from the tube for a surprising raised effect. Can be used on all surfaces: wood, metal, card, plastic, clay, fabric. The glistening colours give an immediate decorative effect to children’s creations: pearl bright red, pearl carnation green, pearl capri blue, pearl white, brilliant black, sparkling gold. Clean with water before dry. • 37 ml tube. • Screw-off cap, fine nozzle.

Arts and Crafts

Universal Markers

Raised-effect Pens

6 markers to decorate different surfaces: paper, card, wood, plastic, glass, metal, papier mâché etc. Wipe clean with a damp cloth on smooth surfaces, indelible on porous surfaces, remove with water once dry, wash ink from hands using soap and water. • Marker L: 14 cm; Ø tip: 4 mm. 313 309 340 220 2

313 309 351 826 2

Glitter Gel Perfect for festive craft projects, decorating objects or cards, these 6 glitter markers in sparkling colours clean with water. Assortment of 6 colours.

Metallic Markers

• 10 ml each. • Set of 6. 313 309 351 817 0

• L.: 13.5 cm; Ø tip: 5 mm. • Set of 5. 313 309 351 435 6

For decorating different surfaces: paper, cardboard, plastic, glass, metal. Clean with water before drying. Assortment of 5 colours.

Pencils

Actual Size

Maxicolour

My First Pencils

Coloured Pencils

Pack of 12 short pencils. Chunky easy-tohandle pencils: all the better for drawing clear lines and colouring.

Pack of coloured pencils in 12 assorted colours with hard-wearing lead. In easy-tosharpen wood.

Pack of 12 pencils in 12 assorted colours. These thick coloured pencils provide better grip and make tracing and colouring easier for little hands.

• L/Ø: 8.5 x 1 cm.

• L/Ø: 18 x 0.7 cm.

• L/Ø: 18 x 1 cm.

313 309 380 107 4

313 309 380 114 2

313 309 380 113 5

199


Arts and Crafts

POINTS

Painting and Accessories TIP:

Gouache

Should only be used in guided activities under adult supervision.

Creacolour • Ready-for-use, high-density gouache with high pigment concentration. • Non-drip, ideal for use with an easel. • Adapted for all porous media: paper, card, canvas, wood, earthenware, plaster, cellulose. • May be diluted with water. 2-litre container

• High covering capacity and excellent light resistance. • Allows use of a wide variety of techniques. • Can be mixed with Coline glue (see p. 201). • Non-toxic ingredients of natural origin. • Easy to clean from both hands and clothes: remove excess and wash.

1-litre container

Creacolour n°1 • 6 colours: vermilion, green, lemon, cyan blue, white and black.

Creacolour n°2 • 6 colours: orange, pink, ultra-marine, brown, purple and spring green.

• 1-litre containers (6). 313 309 351 022 8 • 2-litre containers (6). 313 309 351 024 2

• 1-litre containers (6) 313 309 351 023 5

Acrylic Paint • Acrylic paint is a plasticbased paint that is indelible once it is dry.

Acrylic Paint Opaque acrylic paint for all surfaces. Can be used face-to-face (folding) for glazed effects using superimposed colours. Clean with water before drying.

• 5 colours: pink, yellow, green, blue and black. • 5 measuring-cap bottles containing 250 ml. 313 309 351 000 6

Stained Glass Paint Sheer gloss paint suitable for glass, transparent film, aluminium and terracotta. Ready-to-use, it can be thinned and cleaned with alcohol.

• 6 colours: pink, yellow, orange, green, blue and purple. • 6 bottles of 100 ml. 313 309 351 252 9

Colorine Drawing ink whose 5 concentrated shades are used pure or thinned with water; can be layered and blended together. Clean with water.

• 5 colours: red, green, yellow, blue and pink. • 2 assortments in 250-ml bottles. 313 309 351 002 0

POINT Protects colours permanently against UV light.

Gloss Paint Ready-to-use gloss acrylic paint which polymerises on contact with air and forms a glossy waterproof film when dry. Can be thinned with water and used on any surface. Clean with water before drying.

200

• 5 colours: red, green, yellow, blue and white. • 5 bottles containing 250 ml. 313 309 351 006 8

Varnish Thick black, uniform poster paint to spread evenly on media previously worked with thick chalk, wax or Colorine. After scraping, the colours in the sub-layer appear.

Quick-drying glossy varnish for all surfaces. To obtain a matt finish add up to 50% water and stir. Brushes can be cleaned with alcohol.

• 2 jars of 125ml. 313 309 351 010 5

• 500 ml bottle. 313 309 351 312 0

Poster paint rubbing


Arts and Crafts

POINTS • Can be used on all surfaces, pure or diluted. • Dries quickly: 3 - 4 mins.

Coline Glue White vinyl glue with paste consistency. Provides a transparent gloss on drying. Suitable for: paper, wood, earthenware, plaster, cellulose, polystyrene, glass, enamel, fabric, felt.

Glue Brushes

• 2 l bottle with handle. 313 309 348 059 0

Synthetic bristle brushes, hard-wearing and easy to clean. Wooden shaft, aluminium ferrule.

• 5 l bottle with pouring lip and handle. 313 309 348 058 3

• L/W: 17.5 x 0.7 cm. • Set of 50. 313 309 351 566 7

Non-spill Paint Pots 6 flexible plastic pots. They consist of 3 parts: a transparent pot, a funnel-shaped hole to prevent liquid spilling out and a hermetically-sealed lid with 2 slots for inserting paint brushes. In 6 different colours. • H. with lid: 7.5 cm. • Ø: 8 cm. 313 309 349 040 7

Paint Pot Holders 2 plastic paint pot holders for easy transport of up to 12 paint pots without spillage. Used with anti-spill paint pots. • L/W/H: 30 x 19 x 7 cm; Ø hole: 7.5 cm. • Set of 2. 313 309 339 467 5

Overalls Long-sleeved loose-fitting overalls in soft waterproof nylon. Velcro® fastener in the back. Assortment of 3 colours. Comes in 3 sizes.

Medium Size • L/W: 60 x 45 cm. • Set of 3. 313 309 385 102 4

Paint Roller Palettes 4 palettes in rigid plastic.

XS Size

Large Size

• L/W/H: 54 x 26 x 4.5 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 387 074 2

• L/W: 53 x 35 cm. • Set of 3. 313 309 385 098 0

• L/W: 67 x 54 cm. • Set of 3. 313 309 385 101 7

201


Arts and Crafts

Tactirollers 12 mini plastic and foam rollers, funny and original for sliding onto a finger, to dip in Créacolour® gouache and to roll onto a sheet of paper. 4 different prints.

Shapes Rollers

• L/Ø: 5.5 x 1.4 cm. 313 309 385 030 0

• L.: mark: 10 cm; Total L: 17.5 cm. 313 309 385 031 7

5 rubber rollers for use with Créacolour® gouache. 5 different pattern prints.

Picture Rollers Christmas and Easter 8 rubber rollers to create delicate and detailed patterns. Short soft plastic handle ensures a good grip. Used with Creacolour® Gouache.

10 large foam cylinders complete with different foam shapes: snowman, stars, gifts, sleigh, hen, eggs, rabbits, etc. Size and shape make it easy to grip for toddlers.

• W. mark: 4 cm. • L. handle: 7 cm. 313 309 385 005 8

• W. mark: 6.5 cm. • L. handle: 7 cm. 313 309 385 003 4

Fun Rollers

202

Paint Pattern-Rollers 1

Paint Rollers

Colour Rollers

Foam cylinders on soft plastic handles.

Foam cylinders on soft plastic handles.

Foam cylinders (3 large and 1 small) with 4 different cut-out designs and plastic handles.

• L/Ø: 4.5 x 3 cm. • Set of 5. 313 309 349 020 9

• L/Ø: 7 x 4.5 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 387 010 0

• Av. W. of design: 7 and 2.5 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 385 008 9

Broad Sponge Brushes

Fine Sponge Brushes

Paint Pattern-Rollers 2

Foam tips, 2 different sizes and shapes, soft plastic handles.

Foam tips, 3 different shapes, soft plastic handles.

Foam cylinders (3 large and 2 small) with 5 different cut-out designs and plastic handles.

• H/W: 7 x 7 cm; 7 x 5 cm; 6 x 3 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 385 164 2

• H/W: 5 x 1.5 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 351 445 5

• W. design: 7 and 2.5 cm. • Set of 5. 313 309 385 007 2


a n d

A c c e s s o r i e s

NEW

Arts and Crafts

P a i n t i n g

Seesaw Stamps Animal Skins 4 plastic stamps with a handle to make them easier to grip. 4 unusual animal prints. For use with Créacolor® gouache or plasticine. • L print: 8 cm; L/H total: 5 x 6 cm. 313 309 385 034 8

Ergonomic Stamps Materials Stamps 4 stamps in different materials to make 4 original prints. Short plastic handles ensure a good grip. • L.: 13 cm (average). 313 309 385 303 5

Tactifingers Soft plastic finger stamps with 3 different prints so that children can vary their patterns. • L/Ø: 3 x 1.8 cm. • Bag of 30. 313 309 351 647 3

8 flexible plastic stamps to make geometric and freeform shapes (4 geometric and 4 freeform shapes). Ergonomic handles for easy gripping. • L: 14 cm; Ø shape: 2.5 cm. • Set of 8. 313 309 385 032 4

Fun Finger Stamps 16 practical, fun and novel soft plastic stamps that slide onto the finger for easy creation of pretty patterns. 8 different prints. • Ø: 3 cm. 313 309 385 004 1

203


Arts and Crafts

Stencils Frame Stencils The decorative motifs can be used as a pattern. • L/W: 21 x 29.7 cm.

Fun Round Stencils Christmas Frame Stencils

Stencil Frames

• Set of 4 frames in A4 format. 313 309 351 438 7

• Set of 4 frames in A4 format. 313 309 351 439 4

Christmas Stencils

4 different attractive forms for decoration of all rounded shapes. • Ø: 15 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 351 037 2

6 different designs on the theme of Christmas.

Transport and Animal Stencils

Fruit and Vegetable Stencils

Letter Stencils

• L/W: 15 x 14 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 351 427 1

• L/W: 15 x 14 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 351 432 5

• L/W: 15 x 14 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 351 430 1

• W/H: 11 x 9 cm. • Set of 26. 313 309 351 407 3

26 stencils from A to Z.

Large-sized lines and pictures for easier use by younger children. The large shapes make handy models once detached.

Number Stencils 10 large stencils from 0 to 9. • L/W: 22 x 15 cm. 313 309 351 408 0

Rubbing Tiles Animal Skins Large Farm Animal Stencils

204

4 double-sided tiles, 8 designs.

Hard plastic tiles with raised patterns on both sides. To reproduce the pattern, place a sheet of paper on the tile and scribble with chalk, colour pencils or pastels.

• L/W tile: 15 x 15 cm. 313 309 385 025 6

• L/W tile: 15 x 15 cm. 313 309 385 035 5

6 stencils on the theme of farm animals.

Large Shape Stencils Christmas Rubbing Tiles 12 stencils, 12 different shapes.

• Sides: 20 cm. • Pack of 6. 313 309 351 402 8

• Sides: 20 cm. • Pack of 12. 313 309 351 403 5


Arts and Crafts

Foam Stamps Transparent Foam Stamps 3 YEARS +

The arrow indicates the direction of the motif

• Transparent foam stamps with a large, round coloured handle that is easy to hold. Can be used with gouache or an inkpad. • Av. L. of stamped pattern: 6 cm. Visible motif

Easy grip thanks to the handle

Capital Letter Stamps

Number and Counting-dot Stamps

26 stamps of the 26 capital letters of the alphabet.

20 stamps of the numbers from 0 to 9 and counting dots from 1 to 10.

313 309 385 018 8

313 309 385 019 5

Stamps in Geometric Shapes

Figurative Rubber Stamps

14 different stamps.

14 stamps in hard rubber with different figurative patterns.

313 309 385 028 7

313 309 385 015 7

Transportation Stamps

Farm Animal Stamps

14 stamps depicting different means of transport.

14 different stamps on the theme of farm animals.

313 309 385 017 1

313 309 385 020 1

Stamps - Sea life

Season Stamps

14 different stamps on the theme of the sea life.

14 different stamps.

313 309 385 029 4

313 309 385 024 9

205


Arts and Crafts

Modelling and Affixing TIP:

3 YEARS +

Should only be used in guided activities under adult supervision.

Modelling Clay • Easy to work for toddlers and very resistant once dry. No chemical properties. • Does not dirty hands or clothes.

Basic Modelling Clay

Pastel Modelling Clay

6 x 250 g blocks in 6 different colours.

6 x 250 g blocks in 6 different colours.

• 6 blocks. 313 309 339 033 2

• 6 blocks. 313 309 339 030 1

Potter’s Clay • These natural clays are ideal modelling materials. Shaped easily by hand, they can also be worked with various tools and modelling sticks. • Air-hardens without baking. Objects can be strengthened by applying a coat of varnish. • Can be oven-baked (minimum temp. 1.000°C).

Plastanat

Red Clay

White plastic modelling material, ready-to-use. Air-hardens without baking. Must be moistened to join pieces together. Once dry, it darkens and can be sculpted, painted with gouache and varnished.

• 10 kg bag. 313 309 339 028 8

• 2 kg bag. 313 309 339 034 9

White Clay

206

• 10 kg bag. 313 309 339 029 5

Assorted Punches 12 figurative shapes in plastic. • L/H: 7.5 x 7 cm. 313 309 387 065 0

SEE ALSO Overalls

p. 201


Seesaw Stamps - Animal Skins 4 plastic stamps with a handle to make them easier to grip. 4 unusual animal prints. For use with Créacolor® gouache or plasticine.

Mushroom Stamps

• L print: 8 cm; L/H total: 5 x 6 cm.

• L print: 8 cm; L/H total: 5 x 6 cm.

313 309 385 034 8

313 309 385 036 2

Duo-art Modelling and Painting Tools 3 painting and modelling tools with two ends for making 6 different patterns. Ergonomic handles with an anti-slip surface to make gripping easier. • L: 13 to 17 cm; W: 3.4 cm. 313 309 385 033 1

Arts and Crafts

NEW

4 plastic stamps with a handle to make them easier to grip. 4 unusual patterned prints. For use with plasticine.

Modelling Tools 10 wooden tools treated so that clay does not stick as it dries: 1 spatula, 1 double-ended hole cutter, 1 toothed wheel, 1 crocodile, 1 modelling stick, 4 different shaping chisels, 1 rolling pin. • L: 15 cm. • Set of 10. 313 309 349 011 7

SEE ALSO Multi-activity Table p. 270

Modelling Pattern-Rollers 2 Modelling Pattern-Rollers Varnished natural wood, 4 different patterns. • Total L: 17 cm; Ø: 3.5 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 349 016 2

Tools made of hard plastic for modelling clay: 2 cutting wheels (1 straight and 1 squiggly), 1 smooth clay rolling pin and 4 different patterns.

Modelling Rolling Pins

• L/Ø handle: 14 x 3.5 cm. • L/Ø wheel: 18.5 cm x 6.5 cm. • Set of 7. 313 309 349 014 8

• Total L: 20 cm. • Ø: 3.5 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 349 025 4

Plain wood.

207


Arts and Crafts

Beads and Accessories

ACTUAL SIZE

Babybeads

Translucent Maxi-Beads

48 plastic beads in 4 shapes and 4 different colours.

Plastic, translucent, large-sized, an assortment of 6 colours and 6 shapes.

• Edge of cube: 3.5 cm. • Ø sphere: 4.5 cm. 313 309 315 000 4

• Ø: from 1.7 to 2.5 cm. • Approx. 100 beads. 313 309 315 151 3

35 mm

ACTUAL SIZE

ACTUAL SIZE

Figurative Beads

Plastic, large-sized, an assortment of 6 colours and 6 shapes.

Large plastic beads in a variety of shapes and 6 colours.

• Ø: from 17 to 25 mm. • Approx. 100 beads. 313 309 315 150 6

• L: 20 mm. • Set of 192. 313 309 315 053 0

18 mm

ACTUAL SIZE SIZE ACTUAL

ACTUAL SIZE

Animal-Shaped Beads 20 mm

208

• L: 20 mm. • Set of 192. 313 309 315 054 7

20 mm

Maxi-Beads

Big plastic beads, 8 different animals in 9 assorted colours.

18 mm

Matt Beads Made of plastic, 13 assorted colours. • Ø: 7 mm. • 500 g. 313 309 315 123 0

7 mm


6 mm

3 types of beads: Opaque bbeads O d Pearly beads Transparent beads

ACTUAL SIZE

Fun Colour Beads Beads in transparent, opaque and pearly plastic, in 6 different colours and 9 different shapes, to create beautiful pieces of jewellery. Not suitable for children under 36 months.

Loose Beads Glass beads in assorted colours. • Ø: 3 mm. • 500 g. 313 309 315 115 5

Star Beads

3 mm

ACTUAL SIZE

Transparent plastic beads in 10 pastel colours that can be strung or snapped together. • Ø hole: 2 mm; total Ø: 18 mm. • Ø: 8 mm. • Approximately 340 beads. 313 309 380 062 6

• Ø: from: 6 to 14 mm. • Approximately 1.800 beads in a case with compartments. 313 309 380 066 4

Arts and Crafts

POINT ACTUAL SIZE

ACTUAL SIZE

Ring Beads Plastic and easy to thread. In 11 different translucent colours. 18 mm

• Ø: 16 mm. • Set of 500. 313 309 315 124 7

16 mm

Lacing Maxi Laces Acrylic. Extra wide. 5 assorted colours. • Total L: 1.25 m. • Ends: 5 cm. • Set of 15. 313 309 303 008 5

Rayon Laces Assortment of 4 colours. • L: 1 m. • Set of 32. 313 309 303 013 9

Plastic Laces Assortment of 5 colours. • L: 1 m. • Ends: 5 cm. • Set of 30. 313 309 303 018 4

Nylon Thread • L/Ø: 100 m x 0.4 mm. • 3 rolls. 313 309 318 015 5

Right-Handed Scissors

Left-Handed Scissors

• L: 12 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 348 014 9

• L: 12 cm. • Set of 5. 313 309 348 008 8

209


210


Furniture

To discover... N EW

A

well designed classroom layout will aid children’s education and development. Children must be able to freely develop in this organised space dedicated to discovery and experience. That is why we have designed our modular furniture so that it creates a harmonious, safe environment which can be adapted for children of different ages. All of our products comply with current manufacturing and safety standards, as well as satisfying the quality requirements specific to use in a group: choice of materials, quality in terms of manufacture, assembly and finish.

Living Areas Passage Partition - Clorofile

P.215

Partitionettes and Bush Supports - Clorofile

p. 212

Activity Units - Clorofile

p. 216

Tables and Chairs - Clorofile

p. 222

Mats and Cushions

p. 224

Wall Panels

p. 226

Mini Actibaby ®

N EW

p. 228

Actimousse for Little Ones

p. 230

Actibaby

p. 232

Ball Pools

p. 235

Communal Areas Nathan House

p. 236

Reception Area

p. 238

Gathering Corner

p. 242

Seats, Mattress, Cushions

p. 244

Storage Units Activity Units - Clorofile

P.216 N EW

Storage Units - Clorofile

p. 246

Storage Units MobiNathan

p. 248

Units with Shelves and Doors

p. 250

Units with Pigeonholes

p. 251

Units with Trays

p. 252

Plastic Trays

p. 255

Storage Boxes and Trays

p. 256

Back Units

p. 257

Display Boards

p. 258

Library Furniture

Changing Units with Compartments

P.239

MobiNathan Library Furniture

p. 259

Double-sided Library Furniture

p. 260

Display and Shelving Units

p. 262

Book Boxes: individual or Grouped Units

p. 264

Activity Equipment Artistic Activities

p. 266

Computer Corner

p. 271

211


Living Areas

Partitionettes and Bush Supports - Clorofile • A range of 7 partitions and 5 Bush Supports to combine to create safe, fun living spaces. • In decorated, varnished wood.

Easy to open for an adult

7.5 m² configuration (3.18 x 2.45 m): 1 big door, 2 adjustable partitions, 2 openwork partitions, 1 activity partition, 1 mirror partition, 2 fixed angle high bush supports, 4 high bush supports, 2 low bush supports, 2 partitionette connectors.

Fun partitionettes

Bush supports are doubled up for greater stability

Bush Supports • In lacquered MDF and 15 mm birch plywood.

Variable Angle High Bush High Bush Straight construction with light green finish. • L/H: 57 x 60 cm. 313 309 372 529 5

Fixed Angle High Bush Right angle construction with green finish.

Two uprights freely fixed at an angle between 45 and 155°. Light green finish. • L/W/H: 34 x 34 x 60 cm. 313 309 372 527 1

• L/W/H: 34 x 34 x 60 cm. 313 309 372 528 8

Protective Pieces for Bush Supports

Straight construction with dark green finish.

Right angle construction with dark green finish.

4 protective pieces to prevent damage to high bush supports or to cover edging that is already damaged. Attached at 3 points with very strong sticky tape (provided).

• L/H: 57 x 43 cm. 313 309 372 531 8

• L/W/H: 34 x 34 x 43 cm. 313 309 372 530 1

• L/W/D: 75 x 45 x 25 mm. 313 309 372 540 0

Low Bush

212

Fixed Angle Low Bush


Living Areas

Attaches to the wall with the connector

Connection • A connector allows you to combine Partitionettes with Activity Units and Nathan House Façades. It can also connect the door with the Activity Units (see page 216) to create an enclosed space.

Attach a partition to the wall or a Nathan House Façade

Combine a unit and a partition in a straight line or a Nathan House Façade

Combine a unit and a partition at an angle* or a Nathan House Façade

Support section

e:

Bush section

ntr g ce Fixin cm 8 . 7 1

re: ent ng c Fixi 39 cm

Fix ing 17 cen .8 c tre m :

*Only with the support section

Partitionette Connector Consists of a support section and a bush section. Allows activity units to be connected to partitions, and partitions to be attached to the wall. • Support in 18 mm varnished birch plywood. • Bush in 15 mm varnished painted birch plywood. • Overall dimensions: L/W/H: 39 x 27 x 50 cm. 313 309 372 388 8

213


• In 15 mm birch plywood.

Openwork Partition 68 cm 68 cm

Living Areas

Partitionettes

Panel with curved gaps to peek through. • W/H: 89 x 68 cm; W. gap: 4 cm. • Fixing centre: 70 cm. 313 309 372 487 8

68 cm

Activity Partition A mobile element (with a flower on one side and a butterfly on the other) to be moved up the zigzag slot before it spins back down by itself, and a game with 5 balls on a string. • W/H: 89 x 68 cm. • Fixing centre: 70 cm. 313 309 372 522 6

80 cm

Mirror Partition A large unbreakable Plexiglas mirror with inaccessible edges. Flower decorations on the reverse side. • W/H: 105 x 80 cm; L/H mirror: 74 x 57 cm. • Fixing centre: 89 cm. 313 309 372 484 7

80 cm

Window Partition 2 round windows. The largest is closed off with transparent Plexiglas. • W/H: 105 x 80 cm; Ø window: 24 x 8.5 cm. • Flower decoration on one side. • Fixing centre: 89 cm. 313 309 372 485 4

80 cm

Big Door • Highly resistant: solid wood spindle, door frame with braced uprights, can be locked shut by adults (elastic tie). • Anti-noise and anti-pinching system. • For optimum stability, we recommend doubling up the straight bush supports around the door. • W. base: 36 cm. • W/H: 114 x 80 cm. • L. opening: 59.5 cm. • Fixing centre: 103 cm. 313 309 372 526 4

214


NEW

80 cm

Detachable fabric

Living Areas

Partitionettes and Bush Supports - Clorofile

Passage Partition Allows children to represent a passageway between 2 spaces and play peek-a-boo. Can be combined with Actimousse® for Little Ones elements to create obstacle courses.

SEE ALSO Actimousse® for Little Ones

p. 231

1

The Adjustable Partition makes it possible to attach Manipano panels (see p. 218).

2

The Adjustable Partition has a centre distance adjustable from 70 to 85 cm to allow for numerous different space configurations.

72 cm

• Detachable fabric section washable at 30°C. • L/H: 105 x 80 cm. • L/H passageway: 50 x 60 cm. • Fixing centre: 89 cm. 313 309 372 580 6

Centre distance adjustable from 70 to 85 cm

Adjustable Partition Allows the configuration of each space to be adjusted. Centre distance adjustable from 70 to 85 cm. Partition decorated on both sides. One side allows for Manipano Activity Panels to be attached (see p. 218). • In 15 mm plywood. • L/H: 96 x 72 cm. • Centre distance adjustable from 70 to 85 cm. 313 309 372 577 6

Centre distance adjustable from 70 to 85 cm

Installation recommendations For greater stability and resistance to pushing from children, we recommend you double up the bush supports back to back.

To calculate the length of the assemblies, add up the centre distances, i.e. the distances between the upper attachment screws. Fixing centre Total length

SEE ALSO Partitionnettes Combination p. 221 Options

Example

From 346.8 to 361.8 cm

215


Living Areas

Activity Units - Clorofile • A range of units available in 3 different colours for creating living spaces: - 10 units, - 11 extras, - 1 connector with the Partitionettes and the Nathan House.

European standard EN 16121 : 2014

Non-domestic storage furniture Toys are readily available

Interchangeable backs can be attached to the front or back of the units

Strong play surfaces with raised edges to avoid toys being dropped

Plastic trays for organising activities

Technical information Plastic legs

Units with a Play Surface

• In 18 mm birch plywood. • Fastenings provided for connecting the units together.

2-Compartment Low Storage Unit

3-Compartment Low Storage Unit

With 1 simple back and 4 plastic legs.

With 2 simple backs and 5 plastic legs.

With 2 simple backs, 1 shelf with a fastening bolt to keep the plastic tray in place and 5 plastic legs.

• L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 50. 313 309 372 379 6 313 309 372 334 5 313 309 372 335 2

• L/W/H: 113.5 x 39 x 50. 313 309 372 381 9 313 309 372 338 3 313 309 372 339 0

• L/W/H: 113.5 x 39 x 50. 313 309 372 380 2 313 309 372 340 6 313 309 372 341 3

Low Activity Unit

Low Activity Unit on Casters With 2 simple backs, 1 shelf with a fastening bolt to keep the plastic tray in place and self-locking casters.

216

• L/W/H: 113.5 x 39 x 48. 313 309 372 387 1 313 309 372 342 0 313 309 372 343 7


Living Areas

High Storage Units • These units are also ideal for attaching mirror backs, magnetic backs and Manipano panels (see page 218).

2-Compartment High Storage Unit

4-Compartment High Storage Unit

3-Compartment Mixed Storage Unit

With 2 simple backs and 4 plastic legs.

With 2 simple backs and 4 plastic legs.

With 2 simple backs and 4 plastic legs.

• L/W/H: 39 x 39 x 86. 313 309 372 383 3 313 309 372 332 1 313 309 372 333 8

• L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 86. 313 309 372 382 6 313 309 372 344 4 313 309 372 345 1

• L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 86. 313 309 372 385 7 313 309 372 336 9 313 309 372 337 6

Original Units

High Storage Unit with Storage Unit on Casters With 2 simple backs, 1 large attached back and 1 box with casters.

Double-sided Unit

• L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 86. 313 309 372 384 0 313 309 372 346 313 309 372 347 5

• L/W/H: 76 x 39 x 86. 313 309 372 386 4 313 309 372 348 2 313 309 372 349 9

With 1 simple back and 4 plastic legs.

Storage Unit on Casters 4 self-locking casters. • L/W/H: 72 x 36 x 35 cm. 313 309 372 393 2 313 309 372 237 9 313 309 372 238 6

217


Living Areas

Develop Your Play Corners with Clorofile Extras! Backs and Manipano Activity Panels • All the Clorofile Activity Units shown on pages 216 to 219 can be supplemented with backs and Manipano Activity Panels.

Mirror Back • 10 mm melamine birch plywood. • 27 x 27 cm mirror surface. • L/W/H: 35.5 x 35.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 372 391 8 313 309 372 244 7 313 309 372 243 0

Magnetic Panel Back • 10 mm melamine birch plywood. • 27 x 27 cm magnetic surface. • L/W/H: 35.5 x 35.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 372 390 1 313 309 372 246 1 313 309 372 245 4

Simple Back - Set of 2 • 10 mm melamine birch plywood. • L/W/H: 35.5 x 35.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 372 350 5 313 309 372 242 3 313 309 372 241 6

NEW

Manipano - House A fun pictorial pathway for experiencing different motions and encouraging fine motor skills.

Manipano - Audio

Manipano - Visual

The 2 wheels turn to produce two different sounds.

Moving the handle makes two different visual effects appear.

Manipano - Tactile

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 194 2

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 197 3

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 196 6

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 198 0

Manipano - Gestural

Manipano Mounting Kit

Spiral path for experiencing circular movement.

218

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 199 7

3 different materials to discover.

This kit allows you to mount Manipano products on the wall or on Activity Units. 313 309 373 226 2

3-Compartment Low Storage Unit + 1 Orange Mirror Back + 1 Manipano Tactile


• The shelves can be adjusted to 3 different heights and used with all the Units in the range. • Shallow trays and deep trays are useful for storing games so that they are readily available. • Storage Units on Casters can accompany the High Storage Unit designed to go with them, or be used alone.

SEE ALSO Clorofile Storage Units

pp. 246-247

Living Areas

Shelves, Trays, Storage units on casters

Clorofile Casters Easy to install kit with easy adaptation to low units and the double-sided unit. • 4 self-locking pivoting casters. • Silent polypropylene pivoting casters with non-marking rubber strip (Ø: 50 mm). • Solid wood crosspieces, pre-drilled (screws provided). 313 309 372 079 5

Shelves Each shelf is provided with 4 locking pegs. • 10 mm birch plywood. • L/W/H: 36 x 35.5 x 1 cm. 313 309 372 389 5

3-Compartment Low Storage Unit + 3 Shelves + 1 Simple Blue Back + 5 blue plastic legs + plastic trays

Storage Unit on Casters 4 self-locking casters.

Deep Multicoloured Trays

Shallow Clear Trays

• Set of 3: 1 red, 1 green, 1 blue. 313 309 363 059 9

• Set of 3. 313 309 363 067 4

• L/W/H: 72 x 36 x 35 cm. 313 309 372 393 2 313 309 372 237 9 313 309 372 238 6

Connection • Allows activity units to be connected to partitions or the Nathan House façades to create lots of different layouts.

Combine a unit and a partition at an angle* or a Nathan House Façade

Combine a unit and a partition in a straight line or a Nathan House Façade

Attach a partition to the wall or a Nathan House Façade

Support section

Bush section

Fix ing 17. cent 8 c re: m

re: ent ng c Fixi 39 cm

re: ent ng c cm i x i F 17.8

*Only with the support section

Partitionette Connector Consists of a support section and a bush section. Allows activity units to be connected to partitions, and partitions to be attached to the wall. • Support in 18 mm varnished birch plywood. • Bush in 15 mm varnished painted birch plywood. • Overall dimensions: L/W/H: 39 x 27 x 50 cm. 313 309 372 388 8

Example configuration produced by combining 1 partition connector with activity units and 1 large door to create an enclosed space.

219


Living Areas

into your Living Spaces! • The activity units are modular and versatile. They combine with other elements: Clorofile Partitionettes, Nathan House Façades and Clorofile storage units.

SEE ALSO Activity Units

p. 216

SEE ALSO Partitionettes Nathan House

p. 212 p. 236

SEE ALSO Tables and Chairs

220

p. 222


Living Areas

6 examples of possible configurations Technical information Recommendations for installing other configurations: • Double up the straight bush supports attached to a door or stairwell. • Double up the straight bush supports on assemblies with just one side without corners.

Angled configuration L/W: 1.89 x 1.54 m

4-Unit Combination

Small Right Angle

1 2-Compartment Low Storage Unit + 1 Low Activity Unit + 1 2-Compartment High Storage Unit + 1 4-Compartment High Storage Unit.

L/W: 2.57 x 1.36 m 9 components: • 5 low straight bush supports • 1 fixed angle low bush

• 1 activity partition • 1 openwork partition • 1 mirror partition

Angled configuration L/W: 2.28 x 3 m

6-Unit Combination

Playpen

1 3-Compartment Low Storage Unit + 1 Low Activity Unit + 1 2-Compartment High Storage Unit + 1 4-Compartment High Storage Unit +1 3-Compartment Mixed Storage Unit + 1 Doublesided Storage Unit.

L/W: 2.49 x 2.15 m 17 components: • 3 high bush supports • 3 fixed angle high bush supports • 3 openwork partitions

• 1 big door • 2 light blue Comfort mats (150 x 100 cm) • 2 yellow Comfort mats (100 x 90 cm) • 1 large orange bolster (150 cm) • 2 small green bolsters (100 cm)

Seen from above

Mixed Set of Units and Partitions L/W: 2.88 x 3.70 m 18 components: 3-Compartment Mixed Storage Unit + 4-Compartment High Storage Unit + 3-Compartment Low Storage Unit + 1 Low Activity Unit + 4 Partitionette Connector + 1 Big Door + 2 Adjustable Partitions + 1 Openwork Partition + 1 Activity Partition + 1 Fixed Angle High Bush Support + 4 High Bush Supports.

Big Playpen L/W: 3.18 x 2.68 m L/W: 3.18 x 2.68 m 29 components: • 6 high bush supports • 4 fixed angle high bush supports • 5 openwork partitions • 1 activity partition

• 2 big doors • 1 mirror partition • 1 window partition • 5 light blue Comfort mats (100 x 150 cm) • 2 two-tone square cushions • 2 large orange bolsters (150 cm)

221


Living Areas

Tables and Chairs - Clorofile • Tables with adjustable heights from size 00 to size 1. • Two table shapes in three different colours allow for numerous configurations. • Stable, comfortable, robust chairs for children and adults.

Technical information • 18 mm thick melamine birch plywood. • Structure and legs in solid beech. • Pre-assembled seat and back support. • Rounded endings and edges. • Anti-noise plastic pads. • Detachable plastic legs and wooden end pieces to boost the tables (S00: 35 cm, S0: 40 cm and S1: 46 cm).

Determination of heights based on the NF-EN 1729-1 standard Size Average age of the children Height of the children Height of table tops Chairs, height of seat

S00 Less than 2 years Less than 80 cm 35.5 cm 18 cm

S0 2 years 80-95 cm 40 cm 21 cm

S1 3-4 years 93-116 cm 46 cm 26 cm

EN 1729 1-2

Classroom furniture

VARIOUS POSSIBLE CONFIGURATIONS: FOR 4 CHILDREN

FOR 6 CHILDREN

Rolling stool Robust, ergonomic stool for moving around at the same level as the children.

Adult chair Stackable. • Structure and feet in varnished solid wood. • H of seat: 35 cm; weight: 4.5 kg/chair. • Supplied pre-assembled. 313 309 372 352 9

222

• Structure and feet in varnished solid beech. • H of seat: 35 cm; width and depth of seat: 33 cm; weight: 4.4 kg. • Handle for moving the stool. • Supplied pre-assembled with 4 silent, nonmarking, self-locking casters. 313 309 371 174 8

FOR 8 CHILDREN


Table with height adjustable from 00 to size 1

Living Areas

POINT

Booster end piece

Plastic leg

Rectangular Table

Half-moon Table

Extremely strong, washable board surface. Legs are easily assembled by simply screwing them in. 4 booster legs.

Extremely strong, washable board surface. Legs are easily assembled by simply screwing them in. 4 booster legs.

• 18 mm thick melamine birch plywood. • Board: 80 x 60 cm; Board H: 35 / 40 cm.

• 18 mm thick melamine birch plywood. • Board: 120 x 60 cm; Board H: 35 / 40 cm.

Green

Green

313 309 372 394 9

313 309 372 397 0

Blue

Blue

313 309 371 171 7

313 309 371 172 4

Orange

Orange

313 309 371 170 0

Armchairs Size 00 Set of 2

313 309 371 173 1

Armrests to hold the child in the correct position.

Chairs Size 0 - Set of 2

Chairs Size 1 - Set of 2

Stackable.

Stackable.

• Structure and legs in solid varnished beech. • Seat H: 18 cm; Weight: 2.6 kg. • Ready-assembled. 313 309 372 396 3

• Structure and legs in solid varnished beech. • Seat H: 21 cm; Weight: 2.5 kg/chair. • Ready-assembled. 313 309 372 395 6

• Structure and feet in varnished solid beech. • H of seat: 26 cm; weight: 2.8 kg/chair. • Supplied pre-assembled. 313 309 372 358 1

223


Comfort Mats • 5 mats to provide bright, comfortable protection in partitioned or open spaces. • Double stitching on 4 sides provides good wear. • Colours and formats matching Clorofile partitions.

OM

W IT

P LI E S RD

C

Living Areas

Mats and Cushions

H STAND

A

Technical information

REGISTRATION No phthalates

• In 28 kg/m3 inaccessible density foam. • Coated fabric fireproof coating. • Non-slip underside. • Thickness: 4 cm.

100 cm m 0c

100 cm

5

90

cm

Comfort Mat 50 cm

Comfort Mat - 90 cm

• L/W: 100 x 50 cm.

• L/W: 100 x 90 cm.

Q Green 313 309 387 408 5

Q Yellow 313 309 387 409 2 NEW

Q Light Blue 313 309 387 414 6

100 100

cm

NEW

Q Light Blue 313 309 387 415 3

cm

180 cm

150 cm

Comfort Mat 180 cm A very comfortable, thick mat with double stitching on each edge to guarantee firmness. In 28 kg/m3 density foam with coated fabric - non-slip underside. • L/W: 180 x 100 cm.

Comfort Mat 150 cm

Q Navy blue 313 309 387 411 5

• L/W: 150 x 100 cm.

224

Q Light Blue 313 309 387 410 8

Q Light blue 313 309 387 416 0

NEW


Living Areas NEW

1/4 Circle Comfort Mat • L/W: 100 x 100 cm.

10

0

cm

100

10

0

cm

Q Light Blue 313 309 387 498 6

cm

cm

Q Green 313 309 387 497 9

C

150 cm

OM

W IT

P LI E S RD

100

H STAND

A

EN 71-2

Flammability

37

cm

Bolster - Large Model Orange with light green ends. • L/Ø: 150 x 22 cm. 313 309 372 878 4 100 cm

Bolster - Small Model

Two-tone Square Cushion

Light green with orange ends.

Light green sides and base, orange top.

• L/Ø: 100 x 22 cm. 313 309 372 879 1

• L/W/H: 37 x 37 x 18 cm. 313 309 372 880 7

225


Living Areas

Wall Panels

Foam padding, 2 cm thick.

6 MONTHS +

Sea World Wall Panel A large, padded panel to protect small children and create a soft corner with marine animals that can be attached with Velcro® anywhere on the panel! Includes a shellfish that opens and closes, a piece of seaweed for touching and a storage pocket. Specially designed for creating large backgrounds by juxtaposing several panels. Supplied with Velcro® attachments on all 4 sides and metal mounting eyelets for wall mounting with screws (screws not provided). • Panel in polyester fabric, quilted polyester padding. Animals in cotton velvet. Machine washable at 30°C. • L/W: 138 x 112 cm. • Thickness: 1.5 cm. • Supplied with 4 animals, the backs of which adhere to the panel. 313 309 345 429 4

POINT Practical! Can be attached to the wall using the metal eyelets or Velcro® strips provided.

Velcro Marine Animals Additional pack of 4 animals to attach with Velcro® on the Sea World Wall Panel, or on any other suitable surface. • Set of 4: goldfish (L. 17 cm), orange starfish (Ø 15 cm), green seahorse (L. 22 cm), orange crab (L. 22 cm). Adherent on the back (rough side). Thickness: 1.5 cm. In quilted cotton velvet. Machine washable at 40° C. 313 309 345 428 7

Area layout with 2 Sea World Wall Panels and 1 set of 2 Wave Mats.

Wave Mats - Set of 2 These two thick, comfortable mats are ideal for children to play on in playing and rest areas. They can be assembled using the self-fastening strips to form a semi-circle. • In soft, resistant coated fabric, light blue, 5 cm thick, anti-slip, M2 anti-fire treated, foam filled with a density of 24 kg/m3 which is inaccessible thanks to a hidden closing fastener. • Used to cover a quarter-circle area measuring 140 x 140 cm. 313 309 372 861 6

Wall-mounted Bar Wall Mirror A large oval mirror and 5 small round mirrors for infants to play and find their own image! A wooden frame with rounded corners surrounds the mirrors. This can also be attached with 5 small upper mirrors (or with small mirrors below for babies, or arranged vertically). Can be combined with the wall-mounted bar.

226

• In varnished birch wood, clear varnish; unbreakable Plexiglas mirror. • Attached at 2 points, wall screws not supplied - to be adapted according to material. • L/W/thickness: 95 x 76 x 1 cm. • Ø small mirrors: 8 cm. 313 309 372 542 4

A support bar to help babies stand up. On two levels, 8 cm apart, they help babies hoist themselves up to two heights and encourage them to move around. Attachable to the wall at the required height. Can be combined with the wall mirror. • In green epoxy lacquered metal. • Wall screws not supplied - to be adapted according to material. • Bar/wall space: 6 cm. • L: 103 cm. • Ø: 2 cm. 313 309 372 541 7


Living Areas

Manipano Activity Panels • 5 panels, 5 actions, 4 sensory objectives: touch, fine motor skills, sight and hearing. • These panels allow for experimentation and stimulate children’s imaginations. • The wall mounting kit is sold separately.

Manipano - Mounting Kit This kit allows you to mount Manipano products on the wall or on Activity Units. 313 309 373 226 2

Manipano - Visual Moving the handle makes two different visual effects appear.

Manipano - Tactile

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 196 6

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 198 0

Manipano - Audio

Manipano - Gestural

The 2 wheels turn to produce two different sounds.

Spiral path for experiencing circular movement.

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 197 3

• In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 199 7

3 different materials to discover.

NEW

Manipano - House A fun pictorial pathway for experiencing different motions and encouraging fine motor skills. • In varnished wood. • L/W/thickness: 39 x 39 x 1.8 cm. 313 309 375 194 2

227


Living Areas

Mini Actibaby • First motor-skills course for getting ready to walk in complete safety. • A variety of exploration activities from age 9 months: crawling, sliding, pulling themselves up, going through arches, etc. • The two modules can be attached together.

EN 71-1-2-3 NFS 54-300

Educational material for motor skills

Nathan Commitments Technical information

• All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests.

• In clear varnished and blue or orange lacquered plywood. • Wood thickness: 22 mm. • Accessible H course: 24 cm; accessible H activity podium: 16 cm.

• Furniture delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

Large space Configuration created using: 1 Route + 1 Activity Podium + 3 green comfort mats + 2 light blue comfort mats. • L/W/H: 400 x 150 x 83 cm.

1 Route

2 Comfort Mat blue

1 Activity Podium

SEE ALSO Comfort Mats Wave Mats Activity Panels Mini Actibaby

228

p. 224 p. 226 p. 234 p. 274


Living Areas Large play centre Configuration created using: 1 Route + 1 Activity Podium + 3 green comfort mats + 1 yellow comfort mat + 2 wave mats. • L/W/H: 250 x 250 x 83 cm; Diagonal: 290 cm.

Different heights for children to pull themselves up

Climbing and sliding in complete safety

Pushing balls through holes

A bar for children to pull themselves up on

Climbing Podium 3 steps to reach the platform and a gentle slope to slide down... or climb back up! With several openings for playing at looking through and being under the supervision of an adult. • L/W/H: 108 x 108 x 83 cm; highest point: 24 cm. • H/D of step: 8 x 29 cm. 313 309 373 216 3

108

cm

Activity Podium 2 steps, a threshold to step over, a window to go through and a large tray for playing or resting in, with a bar for children to pull themselves up. • L/W/H: 108 x 108 x 79 cm; highest point: 16 cm. • Dimensions of tray: 100 x 50 cm; depth: 16 cm without mat (sold separately). • Ø of holes: 6 and 8 cm. 313 309 373 217 0

Activity panels to mount on the uprights

m

8c

10

229


Living Areas

Actimousse® for Little Ones • Foam modules for assembly to create sensory routes for early years fun. Encourage children’s motor skills and sensory exploration. • Covered with thick, soft, easy-clean coated fabric.

NF EN 1021-1 and 1021-2

Ignitability of upholstered furniture

REACH

Phthalate-free products

POINT Detachable, interchangeable discs

Technical information

Various possible configurations

• Attached using a Velcro® strip. Makes it possible to keep the modules firmly attached together during play. Strong seams. • Firmness of foam: density of 24 kg/m³ or 38 kg/m³. • Safety: fire-resistant covers with no access to foam.

Sensory Routes Sensory Disc - Set of 2 1 velvet cotton disc and 1 plastic textured disc. For use on routes or on their own.

Straight Route

• Ø: 34 cm; thickness: 4 cm. 313 309 370 511 2

Supplement with 2 discs or round pouffes sold separately. Folds up easily into 3 parts. Non-slip underside. • L/W: 150 x 50 cm; thickness: 4 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 509 9

Mirror Disc - Set of 2 2 discs with mirrors in unbreakable plexiglas. For use on routes or on their own. • Ø: 34 cm; thickness: 4 cm. 313 309 370 515 0

Corner Route Supplement with 2 discs or round pouffes sold separately. Folds up easily into 3 parts. Non-slip underside.

230

• L/W: 100 x 100 cm; thickness: 4 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 510 5

Discovery Disc - Set of 2 2 yellow discs with 2 different interior compositions and densities. For use on routes or on their own. • Ø: 34 cm; thickness: 4 cm. 313 309 370 512 9


Living Areas POINT Movement routes can be combined with sensory routes

Movement Routes

Inclined Plane

Stair

Non-slip underside.

Non-slip underside.

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 505 1

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 4 to 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 503 7

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 7.5 to 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 506 8

Wave Platform

Brick

Non-slip underside.

For creating movement routes and varying activities.

For sitting on or playing at rolling over. Can also be used in Actimousse® for Little Ones routes, sold separately.

• L/W: 50 x 25 cm; H: 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 507 5

• Ø: 34 cm; H: 25 cm; foam density 38 kg/m³. 313 309 370 502 0

Platform Non-slip underside.

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 13 to 18 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 513 6

Round Pouffe

POINT

POINT

Easy, quick storage and space saving

2 arches fit together to create a tunnel or a ball pool.

Hill and Valley Arch • L/W: 70 x 25 cm; H: 60 cm; foam density 38 kg/m³. 313 309 370 508 2

Non-slip underside for the valley. • L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 4 to 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 504 4

231


Living Areas

Actibaby • A structure for motor activities adaptable to the smallest spaces. • Line, angle, or star-shaped, with or without ball pool, the Actibaby modular elements adapt to your project. • Both simple and entertaining, they allow children from 15 months to climb, slide, crawl and hide. • The activity panels enhance game and discovery possibilities (sold separately p. 234). • Supplied with assembly and care instructions.

Nathan Commitments • All items in this range are made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably managed forests. • Delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

Technical information • In natural varnished plywood and MDF board with a green, blue or pink finish. • Thick. wood: 22 mm. • L. stairs: 100 cm. • L. slide: 133 cm. • L. platform: 53 cm. • Accessible H.: 59 cm.

NFS 54-300 Educational material for motor skills

EN 71-1-2-3

Straight configuration

Angled configuration

Large Actibaby A stair unit, slide and square platform for connecting in straight or angled configurations. A large area accessed via arches and windows allows children to play underneath. • L/W/H in straight configuration: 286 x 53 x 129 cm. • L/W/H in right angle configuration: 153 x 186 x 129 cm. 313 309 398 016 8

POINT Long gently-sloping slide.

Small Actibaby A stair unit and slide with space formed of arches and windows underneath it.

232

• L/W/H: 233 x 53 x 113 cm. 313 309 398 017 5


Living Areas Maxi Actibaby Stairs, a slide ramp, a safe ladder and two platforms. This set provides a large area where 5 children can play together. • L/W/H: 339 x 239 x 129 cm. 313 309 398 018 2 Maxi Actibaby + T Configuration L/W/H: 339 x 153 x 129 cm

Possible configuration examples using different Actibaby elements

Large Actibaby + 1 Slide Ramp + 1 Safe Ladder L/W/H: 319 x 253 x 129 cm

Maxi Actibaby + 1 Platform L/W/H: 439 x 159 x 129 cm

SEE ALSO

1 Slide Ramp + 1 Safe Ladder + 2 Platforms L/W/H: 286 x 106 x 129 cm

Actibaby elements sold separately

p. 234

Protective Flooring

p.287

233


Living Areas

A c t i b a b y

Actibaby Elements

Actibaby Safe Ladder

Actibaby Stair Unit

7 alternate short and long copings for children to find their own climbing strategy. Small coping on the top.

5 steps with well rounded edges. 1 arch and 1 porthole below.

• L/W/H: 100 x 48 x 116 cm. 313 309 373 230 9

• L/W/H: 100 x 48 x 116 cm. 313 309 373 205 7

POINT Long gentlysloping slide.

Actibaby Platform Wooden slide curved to create a gentle slope. 1 arch and 1 porthole below.

To connect the various elements and create straight, right angle or other configurations. The 2 vertical panels can be fixed on any of the 4 sides. With 3 arches and 1 porthole below.

• L/W/H: 133 x 48 x 116 cm. 313 309 373 214 9

• L/W/H : 53 x 53 x 129 cm. 313 309 373 207 1

Actibaby Landing Mat

Actibaby Gate

A perfect fit with the dimensions of the Actibaby slide. Non-skid underside and bevelled corners. Supplied with a fastening system to connect the slide securely to the mat.

A foam pad that can be inserted between the side walls of the slide or stair unit to prevent children from accessing them if necessary. Must only be used to prevent children accessing the bottom of the structure.

Actibaby Slide Ramp

• L/W/D: 99 x 66 x 4 cm. • In 24 kg/m3 density foam, covered with M2 fire-resistant, texture-free, non-skid thermoplastic fabric. • Navy blue. 313 309 373 213 2

• L/H/W: 47 x 54 x 55 cm. • In 24 kg/m3 density foam covered with M2 fire-resistant thermoplastic fabric. • Light blue. 313 309 373 212 5

Activity Panels

Technical information

• 3 panels for exercising fine motor skills through play. • Attach to Actibaby structural elements or a wall (screws provided).

234

• Fastenings supplied for fixing onto Actibaby elements. • Plywood. • D.: 18 mm.

Activity Panel - The Wheel

Activity Panel - The Eyes

Activity Panel - The Cylinder

Turns endlessly. Good grip. Very rounded corners.

When you turn the handle, the eyes go cross-eyed! Anti-pinching system.

Its rotation speed produces varied visual effects. It can be placed horizontally or upright.

• Ø/thickness: 27 x 6.5 cm. 313 309 373 227 9

• L/W/D: 28.5 x 16.5 x 5 cm. 313 309 373 228 6

• L/W/D: 23 x 19 x 8 cm. 313 309 373 229 3


Living Areas

Ball pools

Adaptable Ball Pool

Pool and Slide Connectors

A pool that can be used on its own or connected to the Actibaby slide (connectors sold separately). One of the sides can be placed in a closed or half-open position using the reversible step. Powerful Velcro® tabs hold the parts in place. Supplied with assembly instructions.

Two foam pads to fix the pool in position around the slide, and a small blocking mat with adhesive strips for placing under the slide and pool to complete the join.

• In soft and durable 24 kg/m3 density foam covered with M2 fire-resistant thermoplastic fabric. Light blue and yellow. • Bottom mat is 4 cm thick with a non-skid underside. Navy blue. • Balls sold separately. • L/W/H pool closed: 168 x 100 x 44 cm. • L/W/H pool half-open: 182 x 100 x 44 cm (H. side of stair: 30 cm). 313 309 387 477 1

• In 24 kg/m3 density foam covered with M2 fire-resistant thermoplastic fabric. • Light blue. • Supplied with assembly instructions. • L/W/H: 11 x 11 x 39 cm. 313 309 373 215 6

1 Ball Pool + 2 sets of 500 Balls + 3-Piece Stair Module (sold separately) 3-Piece Stair Module

Ball Pool A large space made up of 4 foam sides and a floor carpet, held up by powerful Velcro straps. Straight high edges to avoid overturning. Can be dismantled for cleaning, carrying and storage. • L/W/H: 165 x 165 x 40 cm; edges in 4 colours. • L/W/D carpet: 135 x 135 x 3 cm, red; ideal number of balls: 1,000. • Sturdy foam: density 24 kg/m3. • High safety: non-slip covers, M2 fireproofing, foam inaccessible, hidden zipper. • High quality, easy-to-clean, smooth, soft and strong thermoplastic fabric cover. • Balls and stairs sold separately. 313 309 387 469 6

Ball Pool Balls Set of 500 balls. • Ø: 7 cm soft, strong plastic. • 4 assorted colours. 313 309 387 471 9

235


Communal Areas

Nathan House • A fun, original concept using modular façades combined together to create numerous play spaces. • The façades are stable when assembled at right angles. For arrangements in a straight line, the façades need to be fixed to the wall and supplemented with bush supports (see p. 212).

Roof open with 1 section

Semi-open assembly

Big House Set consisting of: 1 Garage Façade + 1 Façade with Flowers + 1 Façade with Windows +1 Entrance Façade + 1 Roof. The façades can be assembled to form a corner or in a straight line. • Footprint: Enclosed assembly: 149 x 146 cm; Height: 120 cm. Semi-open assembly: 129 x 243 cm; Height: 120 cm.

Closed façade assembly

Two façades are attached together, at right angles or as a straight line, using wooden attachments. Technical information • In thick (15 mm) colourless natural varnished plywood with designs screen-printed on 1 side. • Shock-resistant façades and unpainted edges. Assembly required. Assembly instructions provided. • Wooden connectors provided with each façade. • The flexible roof is easy for an adult to fold back during activities.

House and Shop Corner

236

Set consisting of: 1 shop counter façade and 1 façade with windows. • Footprint: 120 x 120 cm; H: 120 cm.


Communal Areas Corner assembly of façades with bush supports Assembly information • Two façades can be fixed together, at right angles or in a straight line, using the wooden fastening pieces provided, or using a Clorofile bush support.

Nathan Street Set consisting of: 1 Shop Counter Façade + 1 Windows Façade + 1 Entrance Façade + 1 Fixed Angle High Bush + 2 Low Bush Supports. The façades can be assembled at right angles or in a straight line.

• One façade can be fixed to a Clorofile partition using a bush support. • Configurations in a straight line must be fixed to the wall and stabilised with bush supports behind the façades. Fixing centre: 89 cm.

Roof closed with 2 sections

382 cm Straight line assembly with bush supports

• Footprint: Corner assembly: 257 x 111 cm; Height: 120 cm. Straight line assembly: 382 x 22 cm; Height: 120 cm.

To create a refuge

House Roof Comfort mat sold separately p. 224

Roof to be attached only between façades with a triangular top.

Windows Façade

• Plastic-coated fabric with attachment hooks. • 2 sections 77 x 99 cm, held by 4 horizontal bars. 313 309 372 055 9

• L/W/H: 100 x 21.5 x 88 cm; H of seat: 20 cm. 313 309 372 051 1

Shop Counter Façade

Entrance Façade

Façade with Flowers

Garage Façade

• L/W/H: 100 x 20 x 120 cm; H of counter: 48 cm. 313 309 372 050 4

• L/W/H: 100 x 23 x 120 cm; L of opening: 45 cm. 313 309 372 054 2

• L/W/H: 100 x 26.5 x 120 cm; H of window sill: 55 cm. 313 309 372 053 5

• L/W/H: 100 x 30 x 75 cm; L of opening: 35 cm. 313 309 372 052 8

237


Communal Areas

Reception Area Units with Compartments • A range of units with compartments and doors, and a changing unit, to be combined to create your reception area. • Each child has their own compartment with a door and a space with a plastic tray for easy access to their things. • The colourful trays with photo holders make it possible to identify the storage area of each child to encourage the independence of older children. • Birch-effect melamine structures with a thickness of 18 mm.

Nathan commitments • All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests. • Furniture delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

EN 16121 : 2014

Non-domestic storage furniture

POINT Large compartments

Assorted colourful trays and photo holders

Easy opening of compartments to encourage children’s independence

238

The same colour for the plastic tray and the photo holder for simplified identification

Units supplied fully equipped with assorted plastic trays and photo holders

Plastic legs

Photos can be quickly slotted into holders


Changing Unit with Compartments with Doors

85 cm

Unit with a 9 cm raised edge to secure the changing surface. Supplied with 4 colourful plastic trays and 4 assorted photo holders. Easy to open from the top of the compartments. Mat sold separately.

98 cm

• L/W/H: 85 x 64 x 98 cm. • L/W/H inside of compartment: 30 x 34.5 x 36.6 cm. • L/W/H inside of tray space: 18 x 34.5 x 17.5 cm. • H changing surface: 89 cm. 313 309 371 182 3

Changing Mat For changing in comfort. • L/W/D: 81 x 61 x 3.5 cm. • Covered with green coated fabric. • Foam density 28 kg/m3, non-slip underside. 313 309 371 181 6

64

Communal Areas

NEW

cm

89 cm

85 cm

4-Door Compartment Storage Unit This unit can support a top-mounted 4-door or 2-door storage unit. Supplied with 4 colourful plastic trays and 4 assorted photo holders. • L/W/H: 85 x 36.6 x 89 cm. • L/W/H inside of compartment: 30 x 34.5 x 36.6 cm. • L/W/H inside of tray space: 18 x 34.5 x 17.5 cm. 313 309 371 183 0

36

.6

cm

85 cm

77 cm

38.5 cm

85 cm

Top-Mounted 2-Door Storage Unit

Top-Mounted 4-Door Storage Unit This unit is mounted onto the 4-door compartment storage unit and can support a top-mounted 2-door storage unit. Fastenings provided. Supplied with 4 colourful plastic trays and 4 assorted photo holders.

This unit is mounted on top of the 4-door compartment storage unit and can support a top-mounted 4-door or 2-door storage unit. Fastenings provided. Supplied with 2 colourful plastic trays and 2 assorted photo holders.

• L/W/H: 85 x 36.6 x 77 cm. • L/W/H inside of compartment: 30 x 34.5 x 36.6 cm. • L/W/H inside of tray space: 18 x 34.5 x 17.5 cm. 313 309 371 184 7

• L/W/H: 85 x 36.6 x 38.5 cm. • L/W/H inside of compartment: 30 x 34.5 x 36.6 cm. • L/W/H inside of tray space: 18 x 34.5 x 17.5 cm. 313 309 371 180 9

COMBINATIONS POSSIBLE WITH TOP-MOUNTED UNITS: For 6 children

For 8 children

For 10 children (Maximum configuration)

239


Communal Areas

Changing Units • A complete solution: a wall-mounted or mobile cloakroom to fit your space. • The hooks and colourful trays with photo holders make it possible to identify the storage space available to each child easily and therefore promote the children’s independence. • Structure in birch-effect melamine, 18 mm thick, with rounded PVC edges.

Nathan Commitments • All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests. • Furniture delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

10 plastic trays with photo holders

Mobile Cloakroom

130 cm

100 cm

10 hooks

Two-sided compact mobile unit for 10 children. With 10 hooks and 10 colourful trays with photo holders to help children identify their individual storage space.

cm

240

74

• L/W/H: 100 x 74 x 130 cm. • Height of seat: 25 cm. • L/W/depth of toy box: 12 x 18 x 10 cm. • Structure in birch-effect melamine, 18 mm thick with rounded PVC edges. • Supplied with 10 very strong plastic hooks, 10 plastic trays (2 red, 2 orange, 2 green, 2 blue, 2 transparent) and 10 assorted photo holders. • 4 pivoting casters with brakes. • Supplied flat with assembly instructions. 313 309 371 167 0

Two-sided unit with pivoting casters


A r e a

Communal Areas

R e c e p t i o n

SEE ALSO The car

p. 166

100 cm

42 cm

43 cm

100 cm

35 cm

Wall-mounted Changing Unit A compact coat hook and storage solution for 5 children. With 5 hooks and 5 colourful trays with photo holders to help children identify their individual storage space. To attach to the wall at the desired height. • L/W/H: 100 x 35 x 42 cm. • Structure in birch-effect melamine, 18 mm thick with rounded PVC edges. • Robust metal fastening brackets (wall screws not included). • Supplied with 5 very strong plastic hooks, 5 plastic trays (1 red, 1 orange, 1 green, 1 blue, 1 transparent) and 5 assorted photo holders. • Supplied flat with assembly instructions. 313 309 371 168 7

Mobile Bench The bench moves easily with its 4 pivoting casters. It can also hold small plastic trays, sold separately p. 255. • L/W/H: 100 x 35 x 43 cm. • H of seat: 25 cm. • 4 pivoting casters, 2 with brakes. • Structure in birch-effect melamine, thickness of 18 mm with rounded PVC edging. • Supplied flat with 1 set of assembly instructions. 313 309 371 169 4

Small Transparent Trays Trays that can be customised with photo holders to identify the contents (sold separately). Their format allows them to be used with activity units, MobiNathan tray units and the mobile bench. • Washable solid plastic. • L/depth/H: 31 x 17.5 x 12 cm.

Plastic Photo Holders Set of 5 Clip onto the small plastic trays or attach to the wall: 1 blue, 1 orange, 1 green, 1 red and 1 transparent. • Washable opaque plastic. • L/W/D: 9.2 x 10.5 x 1 cm. • Ø photo frame: 6 cm. 313 309 363 071 1

Plastic Photo Holders White - Set of 5

Small Multicoloured Trays Set of 5

Q Small Blue Trays - Set of 3

313 309 363 090 2

313 309 363 086 5

Q Plastic Photo Holders Blue - Set of 3

Q Small Orange Trays - Set of 3

5 stackable trays (1 blue, 1 orange, 1 green, 1 red and 1 transparent).

313 309 363 088 9

313 309 363 075 9

Q Small Red Trays - Set of 3

313 309 363 084 1

Q Plastic Photo Holders Red - Set of 3 313 309 363 082 7

313 309 363 087 2

Q Plastic Photo Holders Green - Set of 3 313 309 363 083 4

Small Transparent Trays Set of 5

Q Small Green Trays - Set of 3

Q Plastic Photo Holders Orange - Set of 3

313 309 363 074 2

313 309 363 085 8

313 309 363 089 6

241


Communal Areas

Gathering Corner

POINT Non-slip underside.

Gathering Carpet A large colourful polyamide carpet adapted for school use. Sponges clean with soapy water. • L/W: 2 x 2 m. 313 309 380 056 5

POINT The patterns on 2 rugs fit together to form a circle.

Gathering Carpet - Spot Very soft rug. Easy to clean with a sponge and some soapy water. Non-slip underside. • 100% polyester velvet. • L/W: 130 x 190 cm. • Thickness: 8.1 mm; weight: 1.430 kg. 313 309 380 080 0

Multi-coloured Floor Cushions Comfortable foam and coated fabric seat. Cotton bag to store the 8 cushions, in the following colours: 2 yellow, 2 blue, 2 orange and 2 green. • Phthalate-free fabric coating, foam density 28 kg/m3, not accessible to children. • Ø: 34 cm; Thickness 5 cm. • Clean with a damp sponge. 313 309 372 903 3

242


Communal Areas

Rounded corners and edges coated in soft and durable PVC

POINT

• Beech-effect melamine. • L/W/H large bench: 122 x 32 x 34.5 cm. • L/W/H medium bench: 109 x 32 x 27.5 cm. • L/W/H small bench: 96 x 32 x 20.5 cm. 313 309 372 810 4

20.5 cm

A set of 3 truckle benches. Supplied with assembly instructions.

34.5 cm

TriBenches

27.5 cm

Takes up very little space.

34.5 cm

25 cm seat specially adapted for toddlers

Casters make this box easy to move about

Bench with Back Support A comfortable bench for 4 children with back support and armrests. Rounded edges. Underseat space for storage compartments, sold separately. Low maintenance, beech-effect melamine. Supplied with assembly instructions. • L/W/H: 125 x 37 x 53 cm. • H. back/D. seat: 25 x 31 cm. 313 309 372 900 2

2 rolling storage boxes sold separately

Low Storage Boxes on Casters • Supplied with assembly instructions. • In beech-imitation melamine. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 58 x 31 x 20.5 cm. • Set of 2. 313 309 372 899 9

Storage Box on Casters Indoor Bench The largest of the 3 Tri Benches is high enough to slide 3 storage boxes beneath. Supplied with assembly instructions. • Beech-effect melamine. • L/W/H: 122 x 32 x 34.5 cm. 313 309 372 754 1

For space-saving storage of all types of materials. Slides beneath the indoor bench. Supplied with assembly instructions. • Beech-effect melamine with rounded solid wood safety edging. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 34 x 34 x 25 cm. 313 309 372 789 3

Mobile Bench The bench moves easily with its 4 pivoting casters. It can also hold small plastic trays, sold separately p. 255. • L/W/H: 100 x 35 x 43 cm. • H of seat: 25 cm. • 4 pivoting casters, 2 with brakes. • Structure in birch-effect melamine, thickness of 18 mm with rounded PVC edging. • Supplied flat with 1 set of assembly instructions. 313 309 371 169 4

SEE ALSO Small plastic trays

p. 255

243


Communal Areas

Seats, Mattress and Cushions Cushions and Bolsters EN 71-2

• Thick and extremely soft, these bolsters and Flammability cushions are great for reclining, sitting or just relaxing. • The bolsters are soft enough to set at a right angle. • The colours match the foam seats.

100 cm

Technical information • Inner wadding not accessible, cotton velvet cover, removable for washing at 40°C.

37

150 cm

cm

Bolster - Small Model

Bolster - Large Model

Two-tone Square Cushion

Light green with orange ends.

Orange with light green ends.

Light green sides and base, orange top.

• L/Ø: 100 x 22 cm. 313 309 372 879 1

• L/Ø: 150 x 22 cm. 313 309 372 878 4

• L/W/H: 37 x 37 x 18 cm. 313 309 372 880 7

Floor Seats m

120 c

Mattress For furnishing rest areas or reading corners, a foam mattress covered with a removable double-sided cover: 1 side in pattern fabric, 1 padded side.

Comfortable mattress (Thickness: 10 cm)

• L/W/H: 120 x 60 x 10 cm. 313 309 372 838 8

Round Pouffe

244

Brick

For sitting on or playing at rolling over. Can also be used in sensory and movement routes to vary the activities.

Platform

• Ø: 34 cm; H: 25 cm; foam density 38 kg/m³. 313 309 370 502 0

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 505 1

Non-slip underside.

For creating movement routes and varying activities. • L/W: 50 x 25 cm; H: 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 507 5


W IT

5 shapes, 4 colours:

P LI E S

H STAND

A

• NF EN 1021-1 and 2

Flammability of upholstered seats

• To make comfortable and colourful corners for reading and relaxing. These seats fit in well with our book boxes (pp. 264-265).

• Directive 2005/84/EC No phthalates

Communal Areas

OM

RD

C

Foam Seats

Technical information • Seat height: 25 cm (Floor Cushion: 5 cm). • Soft and durable coated cloth cover. • Wash with moist sponge. • Foam density 28 kg/m3, not accessible to children.

A

B

C

D

Blue A

Floor Cushions

Yellow

E

Orange

Green

313 309 372 904 0

313 309 372 905 7

2 comfortable, space-saving floor cushions. • Ø: 34 cm; Thickness 5 cm.

B

Cube

313 309 372 864 7

313 309 372 814 2

313 309 372 885 2

313 309 372 882 1

313 309 372 862 3

313 309 372 854 8

313 309 372 883 8

313 309 372 884 5

313 309 372 863 0

313 309 372 855 5

313 309 372 865 4

313 309 372 856 2

For sitting, creating corners, using as a table, etc. • L/H/D: 40 x 40 x 25 cm.

C

Sofa

Seat long enough to accommodate 4 children comfortably. • L/H/D: 110 x 40 x 45 cm.

D

Low chair

Individual seat with slightly reclined back.

NEW

313 309 372 908 8

NEW

313 309 372 912 5

• L/H/D: 35 x 40 x 45 cm.

E

Quadrant

The quadrant can be used on its own, in a corner or assembled with two or four other elements. • L/W/H: 60 x 60 x 25 cm.

NEW

313 309 372 906 4

NEW

313 309 372 907 1

245


Storage Units

Storage Units - Clorofile • A range of units with doors and wall shelves for storage and keeping the materials for the day’s activities out of reach of the children. • Each element is offered in 3 shades to create colourful environments combined with Clorofile tables and activity units. • Structure in birch-effect melamine, 18 mm thick with rounded PVC edges. • Doors in 2 layer lacquered MDF with protective varnish.

Nathan Commitments • All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests. • Furniture delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

EN 16121 : 2014

Non-domestic storage furniture

POINT • Doors are opened and closed by the adult (without a key and with just one hand) • Large storage capacity with or without Nathan plastic trays • Plastic legs to facilitate cleaning

129 cm

76 cm

42 cm

Storage Unit with Doors 5 storage levels including 3 adjustable shelves. Only the adult can operate the keyless door locking system. Shelf format adaptable to use plastic trays sold separately p. 307. • L/W/H: 76 x 42 x 129 cm. • 4 plastic legs in colours to match the doors. • Unit is pre-drilled so that a Clorofile activity unit can be attached.

Storage Unit with Doors - Green 313 309 372 070 2

Storage Unit with Doors - Blue 313 309 372 071 9

246

Storage Unit with Doors - Orange 313 309 372 072 6

SEE ALSO The storage unit with doors connects easily to activity units p. 216


Storage Units 157 cm

100 cm

42 cm

Clorofile - Large Storage Unit with Doors 6 storage levels including 3 adjustable shelves. Only the adult can operate the keyless door locking system. Shelf format adapted to use the plastic trays sold separately p. 255. • L/W/H: 100 x 42 x 157 cm. • Doors in 2 layer lacquered MDF with protective varnish. • 6 plastic legs to match the colours of the doors.

Large Storage Unit with Doors - Green 313 309 372 073 3

Large Storage Unit with Doors - Blue 313 309 372 074 0

Large Storage Unit with Doors - Orange 313 309 372 075 7

Wall-mounted Shelf Wall-mounted shelf for mounting more than 1.10 m from the ground.

Wall-mounted Shelf - Green 313 309 372 076 4

SEE ALSO

31 cm

• L/W/H: 100 x 31 x 26.5 cm. • Metal fastening brackets; wall screws not included.

26

Plastic Trays .5

cm

p. 255

100 cm

Wall-mounted Shelf - Blue 313 309 372 077 1

Wall-mounted Shelf - Orange 313 309 372 078 8

247


Storage Units

Storage Units

Quality and Safety

Store and separate: Beech

Birch

• 2 wood colours, 3 storage methods, 4 tray colours. • 8 different height options: from 44 to 194 cm. • 3 back units for attachment to the rear of the units (height: 106 cm).

45 MobiNathan units to be mixed and matched for the most suitable storage solution.

Strengthening baseboard Non-slip pads Easy to maintain, in double-sided melamine wood particle board, thickness: 18 mm

Easy assembly

248

Attachment provided for storing back units (on large units)


• All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests. • Furniture delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

Storage Units

Nathan Commitments

Very hard wearing, 2 mm rounded PVC

edging Height-adjustable shelves, firmly

held in place Thick base for greater stability

MobiNathan Casters Improve mobility with the MobiNathan caster kit. Compatible with all the units in the MobiNathan range. Sturdy, quiet casters. Raised base 8 cm for easy cleaning

• 4 swivel casters, including 2 with brakes. • Polyamide swivel casters (Ø: 75 mm); quiet polyurethane tyres. • Load capacity up to 80 kg. • Pre-drilled solid timber crosspieces (fastenings provided). 313 309 372 578 3

249


Storage Units

Units with Shelves and Doors • Traditional furniture that can be adapted to all types of environment. • Available in beech and birch colours.

Beech

• Adjustable shelving (each 32 mm), set on screw-in pegs. • L/W: 100 x 41.5 cm.

Birch

POINT

100 cm

C

All units with doors come with a lock and 2 keys.

100 cm

Storage for 320 books 44 cm

G

A B

E

D

77 cm

77 cm

77 cm

106 cm

F

.5

41 cm

41

.5

A

cm

Beech

Birch

313 309 372 441 0

313 309 372 564 6

313 309 372 533 2

313 309 372 568 4

313 309 372 444 1

313 309 372 574 5

313 309 372 538 7

313 309 372 571 4

313 309 372 442 7

313 309 372 565 3

313 309 372 532 5

313 309 372 569 1

313 309 372 476 2

313 309 372 575 2

Large Shelving Unit

Affix to a wall or the rear of a wire wall rack. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm.

B

Medium Shelving Unit

3 shelves (2 of which are adjustable). • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 77 cm.

C

Top Shelving Unit

Can be attached to any MobiNathan storage unit, screws provided. Can also rest on the floor. 1 adjustable shelf. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 44 cm.

D

Column Shelving Unit

On casters, for practicality, as occasional furniture or to extend an existing unit. 2 adjustable shelves. • L/W/H: 35 x 41.5 x 77 cm.

E

Large Unit with Doors

4 shelves (3 of which are adjustable). • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm.

F

Medium Unit with Doors

3 shelves (2 of which are adjustable). • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 77 cm.

G

Top Unit with Doors

Can be attached to any MobiNathan storage unit, screws provided. Can also rest on the floor. 1 adjustable shelf. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 44 cm.

250


Storage Units

Units with Pigeonholes • Ideal for the individual storage needs of each child. • Available in beech and birch colours. • Shelves held in place by pegs in grooves, easilyadjustable height each 32 mm, non-screw pegs.

Beech

Birch

• L/W: 100 x 41.5 cm. • L. box: 31 cm; average box height: 8.7 cm. • Suitable for cardboard trays (sold separately, p. 256).

C

A

44 cm

100 cm

77 cm

106 cm

100 cm

B

A

Beech

Birch

313 309 372 435 9

313 309 372 561 5

313 309 372 535 6

313 309 372 566 0

313 309 372 536 3

313 309 372 573 8

Large Unit with Pigeonholes

27 shelves create 30 pigeonholes. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm.

B

Medium Unit with Pigeonholes

18 shelves create 21 pigeonholes. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 77 cm.

C

Top Unit with Pigeonholes

This top unit attaches to the top of storage units. 9 shelves create 12 pigeonholes. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 44 cm. 100 cm

Large Multishelf Storage Unit 6 shelves, of which 2 are tilting shelves for displaying books, 2 are fixed and 2 are adjustable.

2 tilting shelves 2 adjustable shelves

106 cm

• L/W/H: 100 x 33 x 106 cm. • Melamine.

NEW

106 cm

POINT Large storage capacity

Large Unit with Pigeonholes and Shelves

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 440 3 • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 563 9

100 cm

33

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • L. pigeonhole: 31 cm. • L. shelf: 63.5 cm.

cm

9 shelves create 10 pigeonholes, and 3 shelves (2 of which are adjustable).

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 584 4 • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 585 1

251


Storage Units

Units with Trays Beech Effect

Beech

• Perfect for storing bulky equipment, construction games and supplies. • Tray units foster independence in children. Kids can easily pull trays in and out on their runners. • Each unit comes with a large number of runners for swapping flat and deep trays around. • L/W: 100 x 41.5 cm.

Nathan trays are transparent and are available either coloured (red, green or blue) or clear. See tray dimensions, also available in resupply, page 255. These can also be slotted into the units when they have their lids on (sold separately page 255).

100 cm

Large Unit with 30 Clear Trays

106 cm

Comes with 30 shallow trays. Contains 30 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 436 6

Large Unit with 30 Multicoloured Trays Comes with 30 shallow trays: 10 red, 10 green, 10 blue. Contains 30 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 472 4

Large Unit with 20 Clear Trays Comes with 10 shallow trays and 10 deep trays. Contains 30 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 438 0

Large Unit with 20 Multicoloured Trays Comes with 10 shallow trays and 10 deep trays: 6 red, 6 green, 8 blue. Contains 30 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 474 8

Large Unit with 15 Clear Trays Comes with 15 deep trays. Contains 30 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners. • L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 437 3

Large Unit with 15 Multicoloured Trays Comes with 15 deep trays: 5 red, 5 green, 5 blue. Contains 30 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

252

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 473 1


Storage Units 106 cm

35 cm

Large Column Unit with Clear Trays

Large Column Unit with Multicoloured Trays

On casters, for practicality, as occasional furniture or to extend an existing unit. Comes with 9 trays: 8 shallow and 1 deep. Contains 10 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

On casters, for practicality, as occasional furniture or to extend an existing unit. Comes with 9 trays: 3 shallow red, 3 shallow green, 2 shallow and 1 deep blue. Contains 10 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

• Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 35 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 439 7

• Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 35 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 479 3

77 cm

100 cm

Medium Unit with 12 Clear Trays

Medium Unit with 12 Multicoloured Trays

Comes with 9 deep trays and 3 shallow trays. Contains 21 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

Comes with 9 deep trays and 3 shallow trays: 4 red, 4 green, 4 blue. Contains 21 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 77 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 534 9

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 77 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 539 4

Top Units with Trays • Supplied with beech-coloured boxes, without birch-coloured boxes (sold separately p.255). • 12 pairs of white PVC runners are pre-assembled, capable of holding up to 12 flat trays. • Recommended maximum of 3 top units on top of one another.

44 cm

100 cm

Top Unit with Clear Trays

Top Unit with Multicoloured Trays

Comes with 9 trays, including 3 deep and 6 shallow.

Comes with 9 trays, including 3 deep and 6 shallow: 3 red, 3 green, 3 blue.

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 44 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 475 5

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 44 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 491 5

MobiNathan Casters Improve mobility with the MobiNathan caster kit (see p.249). 313 309 372 578 3

253


Storage Units

U n i t s

w i t h

Tr a y s

Birch

Birch Effect • Mix and match your tray units to suit your purposes. • 4 unit sizes, 4 colours and 2 tray depths, with or without lids. • Each unit comes with a large number of runners for swapping flat and deep trays around. • L/W: 100 x 41.5 cm. • Tray space length: 31 cm; distance between 2 runner positions: 9.5 cm. • Runner thickness: 1 cm.

Mix and match your tray units to suit your purposes! (Trays sold separately p. 255)

1 - Choose your unit size

Large Column Unit for Trays Contains 10 pairs of white PVC premounted runners. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 35 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 570 7

Top Storage Unit for Trays Large Storage Unit for Trays

Medium Storage Unit for Trays

Contains 30 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

Contains 21 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

Can be attached to any MobiNathan storage unit screws provided. Can also rest on the floor. Contains 12 pairs of white PVC pre-mounted runners.

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm. • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 562 2

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 77 cm. • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 567 7

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 44 cm. • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 572 1

2 - Choose trays page 255: Examples of possible configurations:

Technical information • 1 deep tray = 2 shallow trays

• Order your Nathan trays on page 255.

Medium Unit with Trays Large Unit with Trays

254

4 sets of 3 shallow multicoloured trays + 3 sets of 3 deep multicoloured trays

1 set of 3 shallow clear trays + 1 set of 3 deep green trays + 2 sets of 3 deep blue trays

Large Column Unit with Trays 2 sets of 3 shallow clear trays + 1 set of 3 deep clear trays


• Robust, washable, transparent and stackable with or without lids, Nathan boxes fit inside Clorofile and MobiNathan storage and painting units or can be used on their own. • The lid fits both models.

Deep Transparent Trays Q Deep Blue Trays

• L/W/H: 31 x 37.5 x 15 cm.

Storage Units

Plastic Trays

• Set of 3. 313 309 363 062 9

Q Deep Green Trays • Set of 3. 313 309 363 061 2

Deep Clear Trays

Deep Multicoloured Trays

Q Deep Red Trays

• Set of 3. 313 309 363 068 1

• Set of 3: 1 red, 1 green, 1 blue. 313 309 363 059 9

• Set of 3. 313 309 363 066 7

Shallow Transparent Trays

Photo Holders

• L/W/H: 31 x 37.5 x 7.5 cm.

Shallow Clear Trays

Shallow Multicoloured Trays

• Set of 3. 313 309 363 067 4

• Set of 3: 1 red, 1 green, 1 blue. 313 309 363 058 2

Lids Fit both shallow and deep trays.

Plastic Photo Holders - Set of 5 Clip onto the small plastic trays or attach to the wall: 1 blue, 1 orange, 1 green, 1 red and 1 transparent.

Lids for Clear Trays

Lids for Multicoloured Trays

• Set of 3. 313 309 363 069 8

• Set of 3: 1 red, 1 green, 1 blue. 313 309 363 060 5

Small Transparent Trays Trays that can be customised with photo holders to identify the contents (sold separately). Their format allows them to be used with activity units, MobiNathan tray units and the mobile bench.

• Washable opaque plastic. • L/W/D: 9.2 x 10.5 x 1 cm. • Ø photo frame: 6 cm. 313 309 363 071 1

Q Plastic Photo Holders White -

Set of 5 313 309 363 090 2

• Washable solid plastic. • L/depth/H: 31 x 17.5 x 12 cm.

Q Plastic Photo Holders Blue -

Set of 3 313 309 363 084 1

Q Small Blue Trays - Set of 3 313 309 363 086 5

Small Multicoloured Trays Set of 5

Q Small Red Trays - Set of 3

5 stackable trays (1 blue, 1 orange, 1 green, 1 red and 1 transparent).

313 309 363 087 2

313 309 363 075 9

Q Small Green Trays - Set of 3 313 309 363 085 8

Q Plastic Photo Holders Red -

Set of 3 313 309 363 082 7

Q Plastic Photo Holders Green Set of 3 313 309 363 083 4

Small Transparent Trays Set of 5

Q Small Orange Trays - Set of 3

Q Plastic Photo Holders Orange Set of 3

313 309 363 074 2

313 309 363 088 9

313 309 363 089 6

255


Storage Units

Storage Boxes and Trays Transparent Trays

POINT • With lid • Stackable

Transparent Trays - Large model - Set of 3

Transparent Trays - Set of 3

Stackable, supplied with lids. 55 litre capacity.

In clear plastic.

• Strong plastic. • L/W/H: 55 x 40 x 32 cm. 313 309 363 076 6

• L/W/H: 35.5 x 22 x 16.5 cm. 313 309 363 011 7

Storage Boxes Large model • L/W/H: 20 x 12 x 8 cm. • Set of 4. 313 309 363 032 2

Medium model • L/W/H: 20 x 12 x 4 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 363 031 5

Small model • L/W/H: 12 x 6.5 x 4 cm. • Set of 12. 313 309 363 030 8

Cardboard Trays - Set of 12 Designed for storage in modular and pigeonhole units. Assortment of 4 colours.

256

• L/W/H: 35 x 25 x 7.8 cm. • Delivered flat, pre-scored. 313 309 363 033 9

Maxi Storage Buckets Set of 3 Plastic Baskets - Set of 5 Red plastic baskets may be used with Modular Range. • L/W/H: 35 x 24.5 x 13 cm. 313 309 387 446 7

Large-volume transparent buckets (12 litres). Easy to transport using their rope handles. Soft, rounded edges. • Hard plastic; nylon rope handles. • H/Ø: 22 x 34 cm. 313 309 363 077 3


Storage Units

Back Units

106 cm

• A simple, practical concept to optimise space, utilising the back of units to create play areas. • They attach to the back of large-size MobiNathan units (H: 106 cm). • They can also be wall-mounted for use without other units. Screws provided.

Wood and Wire Display Unit Red epoxy lacquered metal wire display unit, 4 levels, and a wooden shelving unit. • L/W/H: 100 x 24.5 x 106 cm • Structure in beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 445 8

Attachment provided for storing back units (on large units p. 250 to 254).

33 cm Can also be used as a whiteboard for writing with dry-erase or water-based markers. New removable plastic tray, practical for storing painting accessories.

Magnetic Panel Back Unit

1 sloped wooden panel, 1 shelving unit (profile 22 cm), 1 red removable plastic paint tray, 4 plastic paper clips.

A white metal panel affixed to chipboard, ideal for organising assembly corners. Supplied with a baseboard and storage shelf. May be fixed to the wall (screws provided) or against a MobiNathan unit (p. 250-254).

• L/D/H: 100 x 24.5 x 106 cm. • H. tray: 33 cm from the ground. • Beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 447 2

• L/W/H: 100 x 24.5 x 106 cm. • H. panel: 73 cm. • Beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 448 9

Easel Back Unit

Affix to a wall

257


Metal Board Board for writing on with markers that can be erased with or without water, as well as for displaying magnetic objects. Includes 1 tray and 2 hooks for horizontal hanging.

1m

Storage Units

Display Boards

60 cm

Giant Wall Pouch

75 cm

Large pouch with 10 transparent strips. Comes with 30 ruled labels in cut-out cardboard to associate words with pictures.

90 cm

Large Model

• W/H pouch: 100 x 75 cm. • H. strip: 5 cm. • L/W label: 8 x 7.5 cm. 313 309 363 038 4

• L/W: 90 x 60 cm. Reinforced corners. 313 309 387 143 5

20 magnetic label holders

MAGNETIC

PIECES

MAGNETIC

PIECES

Magnetic Storage Pocket

Adhesive Magnetic Rubber

Pocket is attached to a metal surface and used to store small items. In transparent plastic with a gusset for easy access.

2-sided strips: magnetic/adhesive. For affixing any kind of material on metal surfaces.

Magnetic Label Holders

• Magnetic pocket in transparent plastic. • L/W: 24 x 20 cm. 313 309 388 064 2

• Strip L/W: 100 x 2 cm. • Set of 3 strips. 313 309 379 014 9

• 20 magnetic label holders. • L/W: 8 x 5 cm. 313 309 379 069 9

20 label holders to customise for the activities carried out with the children.

Can be easily affixed on all paper surfaces

22 mm

Tidy-Pouches - Set of 2

Magnetic Counters Plastic counters in assorted colours, shaped for easy grip. Strongly magnetised for affixing any kind of document to a metal surface.

258

• Ø: 22 mm. • Set of 10. 313 309 379 004 0

Wall-Tac Plastic adhesive for tacking cards, pictures and posters to clean dry surfaces. • 3 strips of 100 g. 313 309 339 041 7

Supple, colourful pouches that can be attached with Velcro® to their flat backing support and affixed to the wall horizontally, vertically or diagonally. The pouches are readily customisable and ideal for storing cuddly toys, shoes, letters, etc. • Made of cotton and Velcro® and supplied in sets of 2 supports with 8 pouches in assorted colours. • Total L/W with backing: 112 cm. • Ø pouch: 21 cm. 313 309 372 517 2


Library Furniture

Exploring the world of books

Library Furniture suitable for any area. • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

Nathan Commitments

The MobiNathan range is available in 2 colours Beech

• All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests.

Birch

• Furniture delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

Solid, secure units • Rounded edges • Height-adjustable inner storage

Practical, functional furniture

Pull-out book boxes: space-savers

Raised base (8 cm) for easy cleaning

Various arrangements to save space different combinations of boxes and chairs.

Several heights available

• Easy assembly • Easy to clean In melamine - thickness: 1.8 cm, compartment shelving thickness: 1 cm.

Double-sided units that can be transformed into 2 wall units.

259


Library Furniture

Double-sided Library Furniture • 1 display side and 1 shelving side, assembled back-to-back. • Enables space separation. • 3 sizes. • Available in beech and birch colours. • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

Beech

Birch

Double-sided Tilted Shelving Unit Display side: tilted shelves in white melamine, with red beading for book support. Shelving side: height of central shelving can be adjusted; top shelf can be tilted.

Removable shelf to display books

• Storage for approx. 200 books • Tilted side displays approx. 25 books or 12 magazines

260

120 cm

80 cm

Front/ Back

m

90 cm

Front/ Back • Storage for approx. 400 books • Tilted side displays approx. 25 books or 40 magazines

Small Model

Maxi Model

• Three-level shelf or display unit. • L/W/H: 90 x 40 x 80 cm.

• Four-level shelf or display unit. • L/W/H: 120 x 48 x 120 cm.

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 451 9

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 450 2

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 546 2

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 543 1

120 c


• 4 sides open for access in small groups. • Perfect for storing and displaying large albums.

4 sides

91 cm

91 cm

Library Furniture

4-Sided Library Furniture

24 cm 50

cm

Double-sided Unit with Shelves 6 fixed shelves each with a depth of 24 cm. • L/W/H: 91 x 50 x 91 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 443 4 119 cm

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 552 3

57

cm

Plastic casters ABS

• Storage for 250 books • Presentation space for 12 books

POINTS 106 cm

• Casters for easy movement. • Wire display units on each side, for classification exercises: 12 books.

• Storage for 320 books • Presentation space for 20 books

Front/ Back

Book Display and Storage Unit Medium-sized Model

Book Tower

Comprising a shelf unit and the back of a bookcase, this intermediatesized version differs from the other two with its red metal display unit. The two parts are very easily fixed together using the 4 screws provided.

• Metal display unit in epoxy lacquered red. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 57 x 57 x 119 cm.

• Beech-effect melamine and metal wire in epoxy lacquered red. • L/W/H: 100 x 65 x 106 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 399 4

12-shelf unit creating 12 half-moon display compartments.

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 465 6 • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 553 0

261


Library Furniture

Display and Shelving Units • In melamine wood or wire to display books of all sizes at different heights, according to the children’s age. • Large display and storage capacity. • The display units can be wall-mounted or attached to the back of a MobiNathan unit of the same size (screws provided). Beech Birch • Available in beech and birch colours.

Removable shelf to display books

120 cm

2

Storage for 200 books

Small Shelving Unit • L/W/H: 90 x 25 x 80 cm.

262

41

.5

cm

80 cm

106 cm

m 5c

Removable shelf to display books

3 adjustable Shelves

Storage for 320 books

Large Shelving Unit

33

cm

Storage for 400 books

Maxi Shelving Unit

Affix to a wall or the rear of a wire wall rack.

Multi-compartment bookcase for storing up to 400 books. Rounded corners.

• L/W/H: 100 x 41.5 x 106 cm.

• L/W/H: 123 x 33 x 120 cm.

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 453 3

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 441 0

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 452 6

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 548 6

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 564 6

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 545 5


15

cm

Presentation space for 12 books

Display Unit - Small Model

Library Furniture

120 cm

80 cm

Raised edge to hold books

Mini-magazine box Presentation space for 25 books or 45 magazines

15

cm

Display Unit - Maxi Model

Unit comprises 3 inclined levels. Rounded corners. Raised edge along each shelf to hold books in place. Wall-mounted or attached to the back of a small model shelving unit (screws provided).

Unit comprises 4 inclined levels, including 1 magazine rack and 3 compartments. Rounded corners. Raised edge along each shelf to hold books in place. Wall-mounted or attached to the back of a large model shelving unit (screws provided).

• L/W/H: 90 x 15 x 80 cm.

• L/W/H: 123 x 15 x 120 cm.

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 455 7

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 454 0

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 547 9

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 544 8

Wire Wall Racks

106 cm

• Storage for 80 books • Presentation space for approx. 20 books

Wood and Wire Display Unit Red epoxy lacquered metal wire display unit, 4 levels, and a wooden shelving unit. • L/W/H: 100 x 24.5 x 106 cm • Structure in beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 445 8

Metal Wall Racks Space saving wire rack that fits to the wall. • Red epoxy metallic wire frame.

85 cm

Presentation space for 15 books

80 cm

Vertical Wall Rack

Horizontal Wall Rack

Wall-mounted rack that holds 12 to 15 books. 6 racks for album-sized books.

Wall-mounted rack that holds about 15 album-sized books in 3 rows.

• L/H: 43 x 85 cm. 313 309 372 807 4

• L/H: 80 x 43 cm. 313 309 372 776 3

263


Library Furniture

Book Boxes: Individual or Grouped Units • Pull-out boxes: ideal space-savers! • Solid, stable book boxes easily accessible by all.

• Can be combined wonderfully with foam seating. • Available in beech and birch colours.

Examples of possible configurations

4 Cubes + 2 Book Boxes

2 Sofas + 4 Book Boxes

1 Quadrant + 1 3-Compartment Book Box + 2 Book Boxes

3 Low Chairs + 2 Book Boxes

3-Compartment Book Box Storage for 170 books

The bottom shelf can be used for additional storage or removed to accommodate 3 single boxes. The inside compartments can be adjusted. • L/W/H: 100 x 42 x 70 cm. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 460 1 • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 556 1

Set of 3 caster-mounted boxes sold separately

1-Compartment Book Box Caster-mounted box for use on its own or under high units: box with 3 compartments, box with 4 compartments, book box with stand, two-sided bookcase. • L/W/H: 30 x 40 x 34 cm. • Plastic casters ABS. • Per unit.

Removable Shelf

• Per unit. • In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 456 4 • In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 555 4

• Set of 3.

264

Storage for 30 books

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 457 1 Plastic casters ABS


Library Furniture Adjustable compartment width for 3 and 4 compartment boxes

Plastic casters ABS

Storage for 120 books

Storage for 120 books

High 4-Compartment Book Box A large capacity storage box for books with space underneath for storing a low book box with 4 compartments or two single boxes. The vertical compartments can be adjusted. • L/W/H: 70 x 60 x 70 cm.

Low 4-Compartment Book Box A large square caster-mounted box, with rounded sides and 4 pigeonholes. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 60 x 60 x 34 cm.

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 459 5

• In beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 458 8

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 557 8

• In birch-effect melamine. 313 309 372 558 5

Storage for 80 books

Wire grille aids visibility of contents

4-Compartment Metal Box Trolley Large-format box for big books

This very light, caster-mounted wire box is easy to move around the classroom. Big books can be stored on the bottom shelf. Plastic casters ABS

• Plastic casters ABS. • Red epoxy metal tube frame. • L/W/H: 55 x 55 x 55 cm. 313 309 372 462 5

SEE ALSO Seats

pp. 244-245

265


Activity Equipment

Artistic Activities Easels and Units for Painting • A choice of furniture and complementary accessories to facilitate daily setting up of artistic activities. • Furniture that is robust, functional and easy to clean. • Furniture supplied with assembly instructions.

POINT • Large storage capacity • Drying racks

8 clips for paper

EASEL FOR 4

Mobile Easel Easel on casters for 4 children, with storage spaces and drying spaces to optimise use of space in class.

16 clips for holding the paper in place

52 cm

• L/D/H: 129 x 60 x 112 cm. • Supplied with 4 red trays per easel, 8 clips for paper, 4 drying racks and 3 clear plastic trays (2 flat, 1 deep). • 5 swivel casters in ABS, including 2 with brakes. • Structure in 18 mm beech effect melamine with rounded PVC edges; drying racks in red epoxy lacquered metal. 313 309 372 576 9

4 very strong 4 racks for drying paintings removable trays

3 plastic trays

POINT

Hooks for hanging 10 smocks

• Boards adjustable to 2 different heights. • For 6 to 8 children.

187 cm

EASEL FOR 6

Group Easel An easel for 6 children. Boards can be set high or low according to the height of the children. A shelf between the legs at the same height as the boards can be used for storing paint and paper. Comes with 6 red plastic trays, 16 paper-holding clips and 4 hooks for hanging smocks.

266

6 new durable detachable trays

Adjustable in height

• Total H.: 126 cm. • Distance between legs on floor: 79 cm. • L/W board: 187 x 75 cm. • H. from floor: 30 or 48 cm. • Red epoxy finish frame, beech-effect melamine boards. 313 309 372 417 5


EASEL FOR 3

Wall-Mounted Easel

Minimum H: 25 cm

This sloping painting board on a metal frame is easily fixed to the wall with the screws provided. 3 plastic trays for brushes and paint pots run along the bottom with a wooden shelf underneath for storing large containers of paint. Room for 3 children to paint at the same time. Comes with 8 clips to hang the paper. • L/W: 187 x 75 cm. • Red epoxy frame, beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 418 2

Activity Equipment

Fixes onto wall

Comes with 8 clips

187 cm Comes with 1 shelf

POINTS Clips for holding the paper in place

200 cm

•Stable structure, does not need to be wall-mounted. • Can be used as a partition to separate activities.

Comes with 3 new durable detachable trays

Transparent plastic containers sold separately p.255.

EASEL FOR 3 This dual function easel is made up of sloping panels designed for 3 children at a time to work on painting activities. Includes a storage space equipped with 3 shelves and 15 pairs of runners to house plastic containers (not provided). It can store a large quantity of material of widely differing heights. The unit comes with 3 red plastic detachable containers for pots and paintbrushes, plus 8 clips for holding the paper in place.

48 cm

Compact Easel

• L/D/H: 200 x 32 x 122 cm. • Beech-effect melamine. • Designed to house containers of L/W: 37.5 x 31 cm and of H.: 7.5 or 15 cm (or more). • Space between the runners: 10 cm. 313 309 372 431 1

POINTS

Integrated storage space to store a large amount of materials

Wall-mounted version for 2 children

• 3 different heights. • 2 types of attachment.

Comes with 2 new durable detachable trays

High Position

Back-to-back version for 4 children

EASEL FOR 2/4

• Against a wall

• Against another easel

Lean-to Wall Easel

25 cm

13 cm

• L.: 125 cm; H. panel: 73 cm; total adjustable H: 86, 98 or 110 cm. • W. base: 28 cm (wall version) or 50 cm (with a second easel). 313 309 372 515 8

40 cm

A painting board for 2 children. Can be fixed to a wall or supported by a second board to create an easel for 4 children. 3 different adjustable heights. Beech-effect melamine boards. Supplied with fastenings.

267


55 cm

Activity Equipment

The easel comes with 2 new durable detachable trays.

Activity Side Table Mobile trolley for storage in class, with plastic storage trays and shelves for storing paper up to format (50 x 65 cm) and rollers. Large work surface with a lip.

EASEL FOR 2

Double-sided Easel An easel for 2 children which conveniently folds away. The stand is solid beech and the boards are easy-to-clean hardboard. • L/H board: 65 x 60 cm; H. easel: 120 cm. 313 309 373 138 8

• L/W/H: 72 x 52 x 72 cm. • 4 swivel casters in ABS, including 2 with brakes. • Supplied with 3 clear plastic trays (2 flat, 1 deep). • Structure in 18 mm beech effect melamine with rounded PVC edges; lip in red lacquered MDF. 313 309 372 911 8

To be attached to a wall

New removable plastic tray, practical for storing painting accessories.

EASEL FOR 2

Easel Back Unit 1 sloped wooden panel, 1 shelving unit (profile 22 cm), 1 red removable plastic paint tray, 4 plastic paper clips. • L/D/H: 100 x 24.5 x 106 cm. • H. tray: 33 cm from the ground. • Beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 447 2

Painting Trolley Specially designed for storing all painting materials, with 6 shallow or deep trays for brushes, paint pots and bottles, and 2 side-racks for hanging rags or smocks. Caster-mounted to move easily from place to place. • Red epoxy finish frame. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H unit: 68.5 x 40 x 70 cm. • L/W/H compartments: 37 x 31 x 7.5 / 15 cm. 313 309 372 902 6

Easel Extras Red Painting Trays • Set of 2 red trays and 4 paper clips. • L/l/H : 62 x 11 x 8 cm. 313 309 372 007 8

Green Painting Trays

268

• Set of 2 green trays and 4 paper clips. • L/l/H : 62 x 11 x 8 cm. 313 309 372 008 5

Deep Clear Trays

Shallow Clear Trays

• Set of 3. 313 309 363 068 1

• Set of 3. 313 309 363 067 4


A c t i v i t i e s

Paper and Picture Storage POINT • Space-saving: folds away after use. • Can be positioned at the required height.

112 cm

Large drying space

Activity Equipment

A r t i s t i c

Picture Dryer

Movable Picture Dryer

Dries up to 30 pictures at the same time. This wooden and metal wire unit can be fixed on the wall at any height and folds away after use.Wire holders.

Picture dryer on casters with 8 drying racks: 8 formats (65 x 50 cm) or 16 A3 formats or 32 A4 formats. Large space for drying 3D creations. Rounded edges.

• With red epoxy finish frame. • L/W/H in use: 50 x 45 x 112 cm. • L/W/H folded away: 50 x 7 x 112 cm. For 65 x 50 cm pictures. • Wall-mounting screws provided. 313 309 372 737 4

• L/W/H: 60 x 56 x 72 cm. • 4 ABS swivel casters. • Structure in 18 mm beech effect melamine with rounded PVC edges; lip in red lacquered MDF. • Racks in red epoxy lacquered metal. 313 309 372 910 1

Picture Filing Trolley Sturdy, stable and convenient to use, this caster-mounted unit is the perfect height for children and wide enough for easy access to picture folders. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 60 x 51.5 x 70 cm. 313 309 372 716 9

Paper Storage Unit with Drawers This unit provides a large storage capacity with 12 drawers and 2 adjustable shelves. It can store paper up to format (65 x 50 cm) as well as rolls. • L/W/H: 100 x 55 x 106 cm. • Structure in 18 mm beech effect melamine with rounded PVC edges. • Drawers in 8 mm beech effect melamine with MDF reinforcement (L/W: 68 x 52 cm). 313 309 372 398 7 Increase your storage capacity by attaching a MobiNathan unit top extension (see pages 250-254).

106 cm

Base raised by 8 cm to allow for cleaning

MobiNathan Casters Improve mobility with the MobiNathan caster kit (see p. 249). 313 309 372 578 3

100 cm

55

cm

MobiNathan caster kit sold separately

269


Activity Equipment

A r t i s t i c

Activity Table • • • •

A c t i v i t i e s

For modelling, building and playing in general. Highly practical for organising any messy activity. Playing materials tidy away in the plastic boxes beneath the table. Also transforms into a normal table: removable wooden lids.

TABLE FOR 4/6

Multi-activity Table Wide surface and rounded corners. Activity surfaces on 3 sides and boxes for activity materials. The fourth side, the box side, offers other play possibilities. • Comes with 6 transparent plastic boxes: 4 shallow and 2 deep, with 2 wooden lids. • L/W/H: 120 x 76 x 58 cm. • L. play surface: 28 cm. • Beech-effect melamine. 313 309 372 449 6

Set of 2 Multi-Activity Tables back-to-back

Create a smooth work surface using the lids.

POINTS • For 4 to 6 children. • Placed one against the other, two tables provide a work area for 8 children.

58 cm

Children can use the boxes and lids without guidance.

TABLE FOR 2/4

Little Ones’ Activity Table Complete with 4 transparent boxes and wooden lids to transform into a normal table. 2 of the casters are lockable.

48 cm

• Comes with 4 transparent plastic boxes: 2 shallow (1 red, 1 blue) and 2 deep (1 red, 1 blue), 2 plastic box lids and 2 wooden lids. • Plastic casters ABS. • L/W/H: 107 x 57 x 48 cm. • Beech-effect melamine, red and blue lacquered wooden lids. 313 309 372 477 9

POINTS • For 2 to 4 children. • Switch boxes in a flash to switch activity.

270


POINT Casters for easse of movement.

Adjustable in height

3 YEARS +

Computer Unit on Wheels This computer unit, caster-mounted and fitted with a safety brake, can be moved easily around the classroom or from one room to another. Designed so that children are seated at the recommended distance from the screen, it adjusts to 4 different heights for perfect comfort.

Activity Equipment

Computer Corner

• Red MDF and beech-effect melamine. • Plastic casters ABS. • Overall height: 85 cm. • H. possible table top: 54/57/60/63 cm. • W/D table top: 75.5 x 72 cm. 313 309 371 401 5

POINT Ideal for 2 children.

5 YEARS +

Double Computer Unit This unit is specially designed for the computer area of the classroom or a separate multimedia centre. Two children can work at the same time at the recommended distance from the screen. The keyboard can be stowed away under the monitor shelf. • Beech-effect melamine. • Overall height: 82.5 cm. • H/W/D table top: 62 x 80 x 80 cm. 313 309 371 400 8

OUR SUGGESTION 1 Computer Unit on Wheels + 1 Central Processing Unit Stand

Central Processing Unit Stand Caster-mounted, big enough to allow the CPU to be installed vertically with no danger of overheating thanks to a gap at the back. Goes perfectly with the computer units. • Beech-effect melamine. • Plastic casters ABS. • 2 casters have brakes. • L/W/H: 54 x 27 x 38 cm. 313 309 371 402 2

OUR SUGGESTION 1 Double Computer Unit + Central Processing Unit Stand

271


272


To discover... Physical Activities Actibaby

P.275 N EW

P

hysical education prompts children to develop their motor capabilities and discover what their bodies can do by taking part in the activities assigned. All of our material is adaptable and modular, designed for individual or group activities that can be organised indoors or outdoors: structures for developing motor skills, balancing games, balls, tricycles, products for physical education, etc. Children are introduced to taking controlled risks, helping them to acquire selfawareness and an understanding of their own fears and emotions.

Adventure Course Units Mini Actibaby

p. 274

Actibaby

p. 275

Actimousse® for Little Ones ®

Actimousse®

P.278

p. 276

Actimousse

p. 278

Actigym®

p. 280

Balance

p. 283

Gymkit®

p. 284

Indoor Mats

p. 286

Balance, Coordination and Agility Agility Games

p. 288

Balls and Accessories

p. 290

Sensory Routes

p. 292

Indoor and Outdoor Equipment Essentials

p. 293

Cycles

p. 295

Concentration Games and Yoga

P.289 273


Adventure Course Units

Mini Actibaby • First motor-skill course for getting ready to walk in complete safety. • A variety of exploration activities from age 9 months: crawling, sliding, pulling themselves up, going through arches, etc. • The two modules can be attached together.

Nathan Commitments • All furniture in this range is made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably-managed forests. • Furniture delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

EN 71-1-2-3 NFS 54-300

Educational material for motor skills

Technical information • In clear varnished and blue or orange lacquered plywood. • Wood thickness: 22 mm. • Accessible H course: 24 cm; accessible H activity podium: 16 cm.

SEE ALSO Mini Actibaby

pp. 228-229

Plethora of possible layouts W/l: 400 x 150 cm

108

274

108

cm

cm

Climbing Podium

Activity Podium

3 steps to reach the platform and a gentle slope to slide down... or climb back up! With several openings for playing at looking through and being under the supervision of an adult.

2 steps, a threshold to step over, a window to go through and a large tray for playing or resting in, with a bar for children to pull themselves up.

• L/W/H: 108 x 108 x 83 cm; highest point: 24 cm. • H/D of step: 8 x 29 cm. 313 309 373 216 3

• L/W/H: 108 x 108 x 79 cm; highest point: 16 cm. • Dimensions of tray: 100 x 50 cm; depth: 16 cm without mat (sold separately). • Ø of holes: 6 and 8 cm. 313 309 373 217 0


Technical information • In natural varnished plywood and MDF board with a green, blue or pink finish. • Thick. wood: 22 mm. • L. stairs: 100 cm. • L. slide: 133 cm. • L. platform: 53 cm. • Accessible H.: 59 cm.

• A structure for motor activities adaptable to the smallest spaces. • Line, angle, or star-shaped, with or without ball pool, the Actibaby modular elements adapt to your project. • Both simple and entertaining, they allow children from 15 months to climb, slide, crawl and hide. • The activity panels enhance game and discovery possibilities (sold separately p. 234). • Supplied with assembly and care instructions.

Nathan Commitments • All items in this range are made using timber from FSC-certified, sustainably managed forests. • Delivered flat with assembly instructions to reduce transport and its environmental impact.

Adventure Course Units

Actibaby

NFS 54-300

Educational material for motor skills

EN 71-1-2-3

Maxi Actibaby Stairs, a slide ramp, a safe ladder and two platforms. This set provides a large area where 5 children can play together. • L/W/H: 339 x 239 x 129 cm. 313 309 398 018 2

Maxi Actibaby + T Configuration L/W/H: 339 x 153 x 129 cm

SEE ALSO Actibaby

pp. 232-233

Straight configuration

Angled configuration

Large Actibaby A stair unit, slide and square platform for connecting in straight or angled configurations. A large area accessed via arches and windows allows children to play underneath. • L/W/H in straight configuration: 286 x 53 x 129 cm. • L/W/H in right angle configuration: 153 x 186 x 129 cm. 313 309 398 016 8

Small Actibaby A stair unit and slide with space formed of arches and windows underneath it. • L/W/H: 233 x 53 x 113 cm. 313 309 398 017 5

275


Adventure Course Units

Actimousse® for Little Ones • Foam modules for assembly to create sensory routes for early years fun. Encourage children’s motor-skills and sensory exploration. • Covered with thick, soft, easy-clean coated fabric.

NF EN 1021-1 and 1021-2

Ignitability of upholstered furniture

REACH Technical information • Attached using a Velcro® strip. Makes it possible to keep the modules firmly attached together during play. Strong seams. • Firmness of foam: density of 24 kg/m³ or 38 kg/m³. • Safety: fire-resistant covers with no access to foam.

Phthalate-free products

POINT Detachable, interchangeable discs

Various possible configurations

Sensory Routes Sensory Disc - Set of 2 1 velvet cotton disc and 1 plastic textured disc. For use on routes or on their own. • Ø: 34 cm; thickness: 4 cm. 313 309 370 511 2

Straight Route Supplement with 2 discs or round pouffes sold separately. Folds up easily into 3 parts. Non-slip underside. • L/W: 150 x 50 cm; thickness: 4 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 509 9

Mirror Disc - Set of 2 2 discs with mirrors in unbreakable plexiglas. For use on routes or on their own. • Ø: 34 cm; thickness: 4 cm. 313 309 370 515 0

Corner Route

276

Discovery Disc - Set of 2

Supplement with 2 discs or round pouffes sold separately. Folds up easily into 3 parts. Non-slip underside.

2 yellow discs with 2 different interior compositions and densities. For use on routes or on their own.

• L/W: 100 x 100 cm; thickness: 4 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 510 5

• Ø: 34 cm; thickness: 4 cm. 313 309 370 512 9


Adventure Course Units

POINT Movement routes can be combined with sensory routes

Movement Routes

Round Pouffe For sitting on or playing at rolling over. Can also be used in Actimousse® for Little Ones routes, sold separately. • Ø: 34 cm; H: 25 cm; foam density 38 kg/m³. 313 309 370 502 0

Platform

Inclined Plane

Wave Platform

Non-slip underside.

Non-slip underside.

Non-slip underside.

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 505 1

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 4 to 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 503 7

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 13 to 18 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 513 6

POINT Easy, quick storage and space saving

Hill and Valley

Brick

Non-slip underside for the valley.

For creating movement routes and varying activities.

Stair

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 4 to 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 504 4

• L/W: 50 x 25 cm; H: 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 507 5

• L/W: 50 x 50 cm; H: 7.5 to 15 cm; foam density 24 kg/m³. 313 309 370 506 8

Non-slip underside.

POINT 2 arches fit together to create a tunnel or a ball pool.

SEE ALSO Actimousse® for Little Ones pp. 230-231

Arch • L/W: 70 x 25 cm; H: 60 cm; foam density 38 kg/m³. 313 309 370 508 2

277


Adventure Course Units

Actimousse®

Technical information

2 YEARS + • Foam modules for creating variable fun-filled activity courses. • NEW available in 2 colours.

Concealed zip fastener

• Velcro attachment. • For safe and easy installation: courses may be modified during activities. • For longer-lasting play: zip fasteners allow air release saving strain on stitching. • Foam density: 24 kg/m3. • Total safety: anti-skid covers, M2 fireproofing, zip cover makes foam inaccessible. • High quality, easy to clean, hardwearing, soft and smooth thermoplastic cover.

REACH

No phthalates

Anti-skid underside

Multi-positional Modules

3-Piece Stair Module

Small Wave

3 rectangular sections of decreasing sizes joined together by strong Velcro®.

2 small waves on a shallow ramp.

Large Wave

• L/W/H: 75 x 50 x 28 cm.

3 large waves on a steep ramp.

• L/W/H: 95 x 50 x 37.5 cm.

• L/W/H: 76 x 50 x 50 cm.

Bicolour

Bicolour

313 309 387 465 8

Bicolour

313 309 387 463 4 NEW

Blue 313 309 387 486 3

313 309 387 464 1

Green

Green

313 309 387 487 0

NEW

313 309 387 488 7

Adaptable Springboard 2 steady ramps and 1 base for use as a double trampoline, or at an angle or double height.

Small Springboard

• Total L/W: 174 x 50 cm. • L/W/H right angle: 116 x 108 x 28 cm. • L/W/H height position: 174 x 50 x 50 cm.

1 right-angle, gentle slope. • L/W/H: 58 x 50 x 28 cm.

Bicolour

Bicolour

313 309 387 461 0

Orange

278

313 309 387 489 4

313 309 387 462 7 NEW

Blue Springboard position

Double-height position 50 cm

313 309 387 493 1

NEW


Balancing element on one side, rounded part on the other - can fill in the space of a half wheel. Perfect for moving along a route. • L/W/H: 47 x 23 x 28 cm.

Half-Wheel Used on its own, this helps for work with instability or moving from above to below. With two combined, they form a complete wheel to move through or to nestle inside, held together by strong Velcro® strips.

Bicolour

Bicolour

313 309 387 479 5

Yellow

313 309 387 480 1 NEW

313 309 387 495 5

• L/W/H: 100 x 50 x 28 cm.

Green

Adventure Course Units

Half-Circle Seesaw

NEW

313 309 387 490 0

Tunnel Supports A tunnel, one way up, a beam support, the other.

Beam Low support

High support

• H. tunnel: 32 cm. • L/W/H: 58 x 28 x 39 cm.

• H. tunnel: 32 cm. • L/W/H: 58 x 28 x 62 cm.

Bicolour

Raspberry

• L/W/H : 116 x 28 x 32 cm.

Bicolour

Bicolour

313 309 387 466 5

313 309 387 491 7

Curved one side and flat the other. Can be placed on the ground or on 2 tunnel supports.

313 309 387 468 9

313 309 387 467 2 NEW

Raspberry 313 309 387 492 4

NEW

Orange

NEW

313 309 387 494 8

Ball Pool 3-Piece Stair Module

1 Ball Pool + 2 sets of 500 Balls + 3-Piece Stair Module (sold separately)

A large space made up of 4 foam sides and a floor carpet, held up by powerful Velcro straps. Straight high edges to avoid overturning. Can be dismantled for cleaning, carrying and storage. • L/W/H: 165 x 165 x 40 cm; edges in 4 colours. • L/W/D carpet: 135 x 135 x 3 cm, red; ideal number of balls: 1,000. • Sturdy foam: density 24 kg/m3. • High safety: non-slip covers, M2 fireproofing, foam inaccessible, hidden zipper. • High quality, easy-to-clean, smooth, soft and strong thermoplastic fabric cover. • Balls and stairs sold separately. 313 309 387 469 6

Ball Pool Balls Set of 500 balls. • Ø: 7 cm soft, strong plastic. • 4 assorted colours. 313 309 387 471 9

279


OM

W IT

P LI E S RD

C

Adventure Course Units

Actigym®

H STAND

A

• Structure and protective flooring complies with safety standard NFS 54-300 for Educational material for motor skills. • To be used for educational activities supervised by a qualified adult. 2 YEARS + • Actigym is a structure for advanced motor skills made up of modular elements. It makes it possible to make plenty of progressive courses to encourage children to take risks (climb, jump, balance...).

• The solid beech elements are easy to set up and offer great stability and excellent serviceable life. • Supplied with 1 teacher’s leaflet proposing different uses and assembly instructions.

Installation Units

Polybase Design: Claude Imhoff

2 sides with 4 rungs, one side with 3 rungs. • L/W/H: 117 x 84 x 102 cm. • Weight: 18 kg. • Made of solid wood. 313 309 373 190 6

Tower 4 sides: 5 rungs, 6 rungs, climbing wall, inclined “parrot ladder”. The two sides with rungs are adjacent, enabling corner climbing. • L/W/H: 160 x 160 x 163 cm. • L/W at top: 80 x 80 cm; Weight: 50 kg. • Made of solid wood, climbing wall in plywood. 313 309 387 423 8

280


Adventure Course Units

POINT Frame easy to change, even during a session.

SEE ALSO Protective Flooring p. 287

Small Bridge Podium Spacious platform for clambering up and down or round the corner. • L/W/H: 74 x 74 x 59 cm. • L/W platform: 64 x 64 cm. • Ø bars: 34 mm. • Plain varnished solid wood and blue lacquered plywood. 313 309 373 204 0

Designed for the smallest infants (from the age of 2). The Small Bridge makes it possible to design low courses. • In thick, solid wood and plywood with a blue finish. • L/W/H: 120 x 67 x 59 cm. • H/W under the arch: 43 x 38 cm. • Rung Ø: 34 mm. 313 309 373 218 7

281


Adventure Course Units

A c t i g y m®

Connecting Elements • Elements to be used with the Tower and/or Polybase and/or Podium. • They fit onto the rungs of the structural elements with specially adapted elastic straps supplied with each element. • Each element comes with a teacher’s leaflet. • Ready-assembled.

All connecting elements are easy to install using the elastic straps.

Dogon Ladder Suspended Bridge

Ladder

Rope ladder fitted onto 2 parallel bars.

Ladder with 17 rungs.

• L/W: 220 x 48 cm. • Comes with 4 elastic straps. • Made of solid wood and rope.

• L/W: 220 x 48 cm. • Rung spacing: 8.5 cm. • Made of solid wood and rope.

313 309 373 192 0

313 309 373 173 9

The ladder is reversible and can be used as a standard beam.

5 footholds hollowed into a beam, for climbing with hands and feet. The ladder affixes to a supporting structure, Tower, Podium, or Polybase, and rests on the ground. • L/W/D: 125 x 8 x 8 cm. • Solid wood, rounded edges and corners. 313 309 373 210 1

Balancing Beam

Two fixed bars.

Slide Ramp

A small beam for setting between 2 supporting bars to help children develop balance. Can be affixed between Tower or Polybase structures.

• L/W: 220 x 48 cm. • Made of solid wood.

• L/W: 220 x 48 cm. • Made of solid wood and plywood.

• L/W: 175 x 48 cm. • Solid wood and rope.

313 309 373 179 1

313 309 373 172 2

313 309 373 208 8

Parallel Bars

Double-sided

Elastic Cords Reversible Climbing Surface 10 wide wooden pieces with rounded edges. A small sliding area on the back.

282

• In solid wood and in beech plywood. • L/W/thickness: 140 x 46 x 6 cm. 313 309 373 219 4

Highly resistant elastic cords for attaching connecting elements to the Actigym® structure. With handles for an easy grip. • Thick.: 7 mm. • Set of 4. 313 309 373 211 8


Adventure Course Units

Balance Wooden Balances • 2 complementary seesaws to add diversity to adventure courses. • Reversible elements: 2 usable sides. • Low height for safety.

WI

TH S TAND

RD

C

P LI E S

OM

A

NFS 54-300 Educational Material for Motor Skills.

Front/ Back Front/ Back

2 YEARS + 2 YEARS +

Double-sided Balancer A rocking board on a short axis with two different heights depending on the side used, for learning to balance in two stages. • In plywood, D: 2 cm, colourless or blue varnished wood. • L/W/H: 115 x 40 x 35 cm. • Max. angles: 9 and 19°. 313 309 373 195 1

Double-sided Basculo Bridge A progressive balancing element on a long axis for balancing practice. A flat surface on one side and rungs on the other. • In solid wood and colourless or blue varnished plywood. • L/W/H: 115 x 36 x 20 cm. • Ø rungs: 3.8 cm. • Max. angle: 19°. 313 309 373 193 7

Tunnels 2 YEARS + • Indoor/outdoor tunnels. • A washable, fireproof tarpaulin provides a safe covering over the coil frame. • Blue and yellow with transparent centre section.

Short See-through Tunnel • L/Ø: 1.80 m x 60 cm. 313 309 373 080 0

Supplied in a round, nylon bag for easy carrying and storage.

Long See-through Tunnel • L/Ø: 3 m x 60 cm. 313 309 373 081 7

283


Adventure Course Units

® 2 YEARS + • Modular system for creating highly adaptable activity courses for a wide variety of workshops. • Adaptable, for all levels, from the ages of 2 to 6. • Easy to store.

Throw

Clamber over and crawl under

Basic Gymkit® 3 Beams + 8 Blocks + 12 Rods (70 and 100 cm) + 16 Clips. 313 309 389 251 5

284

Follow a course, jump

Climb through


Clips

Blocks

A wide, stable platform for creating intersections and obstacles as well as varying heights for movement and stabilising supports for jumping. Stacks on 3 Blocks. Possibilities for attaching: - 3 Beams, on top and underneath; - on each tip: 1 pole Ø 2.5 cm; - in the centre Gymkit®: 1 Hoop clip.

Clips for fixing rods to rods and rods to flat-section hoops (4 clips of each type). These clips have two pre-set positions (parallel and perpendicular).

These plastic blocks are used for holding the 2- or 2.5-cm gym rods horizontally or vertically. They slot together to create a variety of different heights, act as struts for Gymkit® Beams and are ballasted for stability.

• Strong plastic elements. • Set of 8.

• H/Ø: 12 x 16 cm; Total ballasted weight: 1 kg. • Set of 4.

• Green plastic, covered surface. • L/W/D: 55 x 55 x 5.8 cm. • Weight: 1.6 kg.

313 309 387 434 4

313 309 371 425 1

313 309 389 252 2

Adventure Course Units

Platform

The connecting rod is easily inserted to attach blocks and beams.

Connecting Rods Easy-to-assemble rods that insert in the central hole of a beam to reinforce the connection between Blocks and Beams similar to Gymkit Rods. The rods fit in the top and are removed underneath by lifting the beam. No assembly recommendations for blocks and platforms.

Beams These plastic beams with anti-skid surface snap onto Gymkit Blocks and slot together. They can be used as balancing beams, steps or a bench.

• Blue plastic; L/Ø: 9.8/14.6 x 2.5 cm. • Set of 8.

• L/W/D: 100 x 16 x 5.8 cm. • Weight: 1.6 kg. • Set of 3.

313 309 371 403 9

313 309 371 426 8

Rods

Hoops

Hard plastic rods with protective tips. Can be used with Gymkit Beams, Blocks and Clips. Assortment of 4 colours.

Flat, hard-wearing plastic hoops. Specially designed to fit Gymkit Blocks and Clips. Assortment of 4 colours.

• Set of 4. • Ø: 2.5 cm; L.: 70 cm.

• Set of 4. • Ø/D: 35 x 0.72 cm.

313 309 387 429 0

313 309 373 000 8

• Ø: 2.5 cm; L.: 1 m.

• Ø/D: 50 x 0.72 cm.

313 309 387 430 6

313 309 373 001 5

• Ø: 2.5 cm; L.: 1.50 m.

• Ø/D: 65 x 0.72 cm.

313 309 387 431 3

313 309 373 002 2

Quick to install

285


Adventure Course Units

• Strong, comfortable mats for low and floor-level motor activities.

Exercise mats POINT Mats are edgedd and have a film covering on bo both sides to prevent contact with the foam.

Attachment eyelet

2 colours: blue and green

Folding Gym Mat Floor Mats Foam mats for floor activities made of fully-edged, closed-cell foam. Covered on both sides with a film preventing any contact with the foam. Washable, lightweight and easy-to-store. Reinforced eyelets. • L/W/D: 100 x 50 x 0.8 cm. • Set of 2.

Polyethylene foam mat folds into 4 and is covered on both sides and fully enclosed to prevent any contact with the foam. One side is non-skid. Easy to store, this mat is comfortable, hard-wearing and washable. For floor activities. Colour: blue. • L/W/D: 140 x 50 x 0.8 cm. 313 309 387 456 6

313 309 387 453 5

4-Colour Mat One side composed of 4 brightly coloured squares (red, green, blue and yellow), the other side is only blue. Strong stitching. • L/W/D: 125 x 125 x 2 cm. 125 cm m 5c

12

POINTS • Density 28 kg/m /m3. • Smooth S th easy-to-clean thermoplastic polymer cover. • Zip cover fastener for air-release, saving strain on stitching. • Zip cover makes foam inaccessible. • Anti-skid, M2 fireproof cover.

Primary colours 313 309 387 470 2

Bright colours

NEW

313 309 387 485 6

190 cm 140

cm

Large Activity Mat Large, rectangular activity surface for movement and play. Blue on both surfaces. • L/W/D: 190 x 140 x 3 cm. 313 309 387 401 6

286


150 cm

Adventure Course Units

100 cm

Comfort Mat 150 cm • L/W: 150 x 100 cm. 313 309 387 410 8

Thick 4 cm

Comfort Mat 180 cm

100 cm

180 cm

A very comfortable, thick mat with double stitching on each edge to guarantee firmness. In 28 kg/m3 density foam with coated fabric - non-slip underside. • L/W: 180 x 100 cm.

Navy blue 313 309 387 411 5

Light blue

NEW

313 309 387 416 0

Thick 4 cm

Landing mats Landing Mat

• L/W/D: 200 x 100 x 10 cm; weight: 7.5 kg. • Foam PE 20 mm. 30 kg/m3 (shock-absorbing) + foam PU 80 mm open-cell foam density 25 kg/m3 (comfortable covering).

P LI E S

OM

WI

TH S TAND

RD

C

200 cm

100 cm

Thick mat, sewn on 6 sides with dual-resilience foam for soft landings (soft foam) and guaranteed anti-jarring (firm foam). The edges lined with a Velcro® strip enable several mats to be attached together. One side is antiskid. Decompression vents make the foam inaccessible and enable a soft, shock-absorbent landing. Colour: blue. Guarantees a maximum landing height of 60 cm.

A

NF EN 12503-1-4-5-6 Thick 10 cm

313 309 387 457 3

Gym mats: cushioning, non-slip surface

60 cm

Lengthways, ideal for developing motor skills, extending apparatus and protecting against falls (max. fall height 60 cm). Also adds to Actimousse units - attaches with self-fastening strips adhering on 4 sides or for holding several mats in place. Non-slip underside. In 24 kg/m3 density foam, covered with M2 fire-resistant thermoplastic non-slip fabric, sliding closure without stopping piece for movement of air.

185 cm

Small Landing Mat

• L/W/D: 185 x 60 x 6 cm.

Green Thick 6 cm

313 309 387 400 9

Light green

NEW

313 309 387 496 2

Modular Floor Covering 16 tiles + 16 edge tiles, total play area: 3.6 x 3.6 m (13 m2 approx.). 313 309 387 454 2

NFS 54-300

Square Protective Flooring

Educational Material for Motor Skills Easy to assemble

Protective Flooring

4 slabs and 8 kerbs. Ideal for creating a safe play area measuring 1.80 x 1.80 m (3.2 m2 approx.).

High-density, low thickness foam for effective protection against bumps. Floor sections that slot together to create a modular indoor floor covering. This set of sections and edges enables you to create a protective floor covering compliant with the NFS 54-300 standard: no contact with the foam and guaranteed protection for falls of up to 1.65 metres. For P.E. areas featuring jumps higher than 60 cm, you are advised to install an additional landing mat.

313 309 373 014 5

• L/W section: 90 x 90 cm; D.: 16 mm. • PE (polyethylene) Foam - density 72 kg/m3 - HD textile-feel film on two sides. • Edges: 87.5 x 4.5 cm; D.: 16 mm; PE protective film.

• Set of 4 edge tiles.

Replacement Edge Tiles Each set of protective floor tiles must be enclosed by edge tiles (Standard NFS 54-300). 313 309 387 458 0

287


Balance, Coordination and Agility

Agility Games • 3 fun workshops for organising activities in small autonomous groups: body movements, dexterity games, motor skills. • Large-scale games for communicating and learning to respect rules.

Knowing and naming the parts of the body

Coordinating movement with other children

Expression through mime

18 character counters

1 canvas carrying bag

1 plastic game mat (140 x 210 cm)

1 foam dice, with a clear plastic pocket on each side for inserting a card

4 YEARS +

15 Body Discovery Games A fun and educational game for organising motor skills focused on body knowledge and control. 15 games of increasing difficulty and variations, based on: recognition of the different parts of the body; relaxation; dissociation; coordination; memorisation of short sequences; expression through gestures. The games encourage the children to communicate so that they all succeed in winning all the team’s points and the trophy! • L/W mat: 140 x 210 cm. • Comes in canvas bag.

54 illustrated cards

1 weighted bag

1 teacher’s leaflet

313 309 371 118 2

Play Mat -Targets In extra strong reinforced PVC. Good floor holding. Can be used both indoors and outdoors. Can be washed by rinsing thoroughly.10 colourful targets in different diameters, numbered 1 to 5; 1 reference point for orientation.

288

• L/W: 183 x 118 cm. • Weight: 872 g. 313 309 373 034 3


Balance, Coordination and Agility

35 double-sided instruction cards

1 poster: 14 breathing exercises

4 YEARS +

Concentration Games and Yoga Gilles Diederichs

84 motor activities to master movement and concentration. Children practise slowly breaking down a movement, becoming conscious of their body and mastering their breath. A development plan and instruction photo cards allow for 70 varied, fun motor activities to be carried out throughout the school year. A poster shows 14 breathing exercises for relaxation. • L/W of poster : 58 x 42 cm. • L/W of instruction card: 29 x 21 cm. • The case contains: 1 development plan, 1 poster, 35 double-sided instruction cards and 1 teacher’s leaflet. 313 309 391 274 9 1 development plan: 70 motor activities

1 foam dice

25 instruction cards

25 instruction cards

3 YEARS +

Gymdice with Cards An enjoyable way of organising large movement games with instructions: each card describes a way of moving and the number of steps to take. The cards are grouped into families of 6: move in pairs, vary jumps, move like an animal, dice number cards and a joker. The dice can also be used to invent other games. • Dice size: 15 x 15 cm. • Includes a foam dice covered with coated fabric with transparent PVC pockets, 25 illustrated instruction cards, 1 set of instructions. 313 309 371 161 8

Move like an animal: - crab; - duck; - bear, etc.

Move in pairs: - back to back; - foot to foot; - by leapfrogging, etc.

Vary jumps: - hop; - feet together; - heel to bottom, etc.

289


Balance, Coordination and Agility

Ball Trolley A lightweight trolley for storing and transporting balls and balloons.Solid metal frame, caster-mounted. Delivered flat. • L/W/H: 98 x 50 x 52.5 cm; weight: 8 kg. • Delivered flat with assembly instructions. 313 309 372 774 9

NEW

Weight Balls - Set of 3 Weighted balls for comparing different weights and encouraging fine motor skills. Texture pleasant to the touch and easy to grip. • Soft, thick red plastic. • Supplied inflated. • Ø: 6.5 cm; weight: 30, 50 and 70 g. 313 309 380 074 9

Ball Bag Light, flexible bag in highly resistant knitted fabric, with a zipper, 2 handles and an adjustable shoulder strap. Can hold 15 to 20 balls. Yellow. • L/W/H: 76 x 31 x 31 cm. 313 309 380 067 1

15-cm Coated Sponge Ball Small Foam Balls 8 very light yellow balls. • Ø: 7 cm; weight: 15g. 313 309 380 443 3

Foam Balls Yellow-coloured. • Ø: 21 cm; weight: 260 g. • Set of 4. 313 309 380 437 2

With an easy-grip plastic covering that avoids bursting the sponge. Resumes its shape after squashing. • Ø: 15 cm; weight: 90 g. • Set of 2: 1 red, 1 orange. 313 309 373 023 7

Soft Balls Mini Balls Ball Pool Balls Set of 500 balls.

290

• Ø: 7 cm soft, strong plastic. • 4 assorted colours. 313 309 387 471 9

Small, easy-to-grip plastic balls. Assortment of 4 colours. • Ø: 14 cm; weight: 55 g. • Comes inflated. • Set of 12. 313 309 380 463 1

Malleable balls filled with soft foam for the development of gripping and contact with textures. The balls can be squashed and resume their shape readily afterwards. • Ø: 16 cm. • Set of 2. 313 309 380 025 1


4 plastic balls in 4 different colours, flexible and very pleasant to the touch, each offering a different tactile stimulation. Supplied inflated.

Sensorial Ball 2 balls in flexible plastic with soft spikes. In translucent blue and red. • Ø: 17 cm; weight: 90 g. • Set of 2. 313 309 373 020 6

• PVC. • Ø: 14 cm. • Weight: 120 g. • Set of 4. 313 309 380 072 5

Football • Ø: 22 cm, weight: 200 g. • Comes deflated. Inflatable with bicycle pump and inflation valve (not included). 313 309 380 495 2

Rhythmic Balls Re-inflatable balls with extra bounce. Assortment of 4 colours.

Plastic Balls Basketball • Ø: 22 cm, weight: 200 g. • Comes deflated. Inflatable with bicycle pump and inflation valve (not included). 313 309 380 482 2

Re-inflatable red balls. Come inflated. • Ø: 22 cm; weight: 140 g. • Comes inflated. Re-inflatable with bicycle pump and inflation valve (not included). • Set of 4. 313 309 380 442 6

Balance, Coordination and Agility

Large Sensory Balls

• Ø: 20 cm; weight: 280 g. • Comes inflated. Re-inflatable with bicycle pump and inflation valve (not included). • Set of 4. 313 309 380 453 2

Hop Ball 3 YEARS +

A heavy-duty vinyl ball fitted with a flexible, easy-to-hold plastic handle.

Big Blue Ball

• Ø: 45 cm; weight: 730 g. • Comes deflated with inflation valve.

• Ø: 85 cm; weight: 2 kg. • Comes deflated with stopper.

313 309 312 017 5

313 309 380 451 8

Parachute Perfect for loads of activities - physical fun, coordination and cooperation. Comes with 12 reinforced, hard-wearing handles and 12 supports. Can be used inside and outside. • Nylon fabric. • Comes in a nylon bag for ease of movement and storage. • Ø: 3.50 m. 313 309 380 070 1

Find out more about this product: www.nathan.fr/parachute/

291


Balance, Coordination and Agility

Sensory Routes Tactile Paths • Innovative and stimulating, two sets to create paths that help with balance and sensory discovery. The thick surfaces stimulate the arches of the feet. • In highly resistant, anti-slip plastic, 100% recyclable. Supplied with a storage bag to facilitate transport.

Tactile Path - Waves 8 hump-back elements, easy to clip together to vary the paths: in a circle, in a straight line, in an S-shape, etc. Striped and spotted surfaces. • L/W/H: 68 x 18 x 11 cm. 313 309 373 012 1

Tactile Path - Stepping Stones

Wave and Rock Connectors To interconnect one rock and one to three waves. Each rock requires 3 connectors to be properly balanced. Suitable for the 3 rock sizes.

6 blocks in 3 different sizes that can be stacked and slightly inclined to vary the slopes, even when stacked. Striped, spotted and circled surfaces.

• In hard grey plastic. • L/W/H: 18 x 7 x 4 cm. • Set of 6. 313 309 373 029 9

Feet and Hands 24 foot and handprints: 4 shapes in 6 different colours (right and left feet, right and left hands). For indicating the direction of motor activity exercises. Strong, flexible plastic. • L. hand: 19 cm. • L. foot: 22.5 cm. • Set of 24. 313 309 312 036 6

• Ø/Thick: 27 x 8 cm / 35 x 14 cm / 40 x 13 cm. 313 309 373 013 8

Motor-Skills Sections Tiles in 3 shapes – circle, square and triangle – to create paths and games on the floor. 6 different colours for each shape: red, green, blue, yellow, orange and purple. Excellent grip on the floor and for children’s feet. • In highly resistant and flexible plastic, 3 mm thick. • Side triangle: 28 cm; side square: 23 cm. • Ø circle: 23 cm. • Set of 18. 313 309 371 164 9

Stepping Stones Set of 8 plastic pieces on which children can walk, jump, run... The four colours can be arranged for balancing games. Equipped with anti-skid rubber pads. Assortment of 4 colours.

292

• L/W/H: 24.5 x 24.5 x 4 cm. • Set of 8. 313 309 312 029 8


Hoops Lightweight plastic hoops with internal joint, available in two sizes. Assortment of 4 colours.

• Ø: 36 cm. 313 309 373 224 8

• Ø: 50 cm.

Coloured Ropes

313 309 373 220 0

Sturdy, weather-proof ropes. Assortment of 4 colours.

• Ø: 60 cm.

• L/Ø: 2 m x 8 mm. Set of 4.

313 309 373 221 7

313 309 387 187 9

Bowling Game Agility game with 10 plastic pins in 5 different colours, and 2 bowling balls. The pins can be weighted. • Supplied with a storage bag. • H/Ø pin: 28 x 5.5 cm; weight: 70 g. • Ø ball: 10.8 cm; weight: 75 g. 313 309 373 096 1

Indoor and Outdoor Equipment

Essentials

Gymnastics Ribbons Jump Ropes In polypropylene. Light plastic handles. 3 assorted colours. • L: 1.85 m. Set of 8. 313 309 312 044 1

4 ribbons, 4 different colours. Swivelmounted. Removable for hand washing. • Satin • Ribbon L/W: 180 x 5 cm. • Handle L: 58 cm. 313 309 373 222 4

Weighted Bags Balancing bags made of sturdy cloth. Assortment of 4 colours. New plastic microbead filling.

Coloured Scarves

Scarves

4 soft strong scarves for juggling, dance, gymnastics and rhythmic exercises.

Triangular cotton scarves in 4 assorted colours.

• L/W: 65 x 65 cm. Set of 4.

• L/W: 63 x 43 cm. Set of 12.

• L/W bag: 18 x 10 cm. • Weight:110 g. Set of 8.

313 309 380 050 3

313 309 380 438 9

313 309 312 003 8

Multi-use Cones 4 light plastic cones. They can be used with the Gymkit® poles and hoops (see p. 284) to create varied routes. • 4 different colours. • H: 30 cm. • Base L: 24 cm. 313 309 373 097 8

Stilts Sports-style Bibs 16 bibs in 4 colours: red, green, blue, yellow. In highly resistant plain weave nylon, with elastic side bands. • Size: 3 - 6 years; W/H: 30 x 25 cm. Set of 16. 313 309 380 491 4

3 pairs of cylinder-shaped plastic stilts, lightweight and stable for practising balance. Assortment of 3 colours. • H/Ø stilt: 12.5 x 10.5 cm. • L. string : 60 cm. • 3 pairs. 313 309 312 002 1

293


Indoor and Outdoor Equipment

E s s e n t i a l s

NEW POINT Catching the fish fis is easy thanks to the sshape of the notch and the hook

Line Fishing Fishing game to play individually or cooperatively. 2 fishing rods and 30 lightweight fish in 4 different colours, numbered 1 to 30 on both sides. For use both indoors and out. • Plastic. • L/Ø fishing rod: 50.5 x 2.2 cm; L line + hook: 25.5 cm. • L fish: 11 cm • Supplied in a storage bag with a handle. 313 309 373 038 1

Racing Steering Wheel

3 YEARS + 2 targets in printed, adhesive fabric. The child aims and throws weighted projectiles that adhere to the targets. The hang-up targets can be personalised using felt-tip pens or pencils.

Original, fun toy. It develops hand/eye coordination and balance, and stimulates the imagination.

• Target Ø: 38 cm. • L. projectile: 15 cm. • Set of 2 targets and 6 projectiles. 313 309 373 017 6

• In plastic; rubber wheel. • H: 63 cm; Ø steering wheel: 18 cm. • Weight: 0.55 kg. 313 309 372 644 5

Target game

Four-wheeled Toddler Ride-on Stable, lightweight ride-on toy suitable for small children. 4 wheels and handlebars for steering.

294

• Hard plastic. • L/W: 52 x 29 cm. • Seat height: 23 cm; L of wheel: 7 cm. • Weight: 2 kg. 313 309 372 661 2

Three-Seat See-Saw Fitted with 2 handles for balancing 2 or 3 children. • Plastic, very hard wearing. • L/W/H: 1.20 x 40 cm x 56 cm. • Seat H.: 23 cm. 313 309 372 551 6


Very strong rubber handles

• Range designed for intensive shared use. • Only the handlebars and saddle of the carrier require assembly. • Supplied with assembly instructions.

Frame in reinforced steel with anti-rust treatment

Saddle length ensures seating adapted to each child

Handlebar locking system designed to prevent pinched fingers

Rubber reinforcement to protect the rear bar from wear

GUARANTEE for the frame Self-lubricating nylon bearings

Solid tyre in reinforced rubber

Strong pedals, protected fastening system

Solid rim designed to prevent pinched fingers

Indoor and Outdoor Equipment

Cycles

2 YEARS +

Small Tricycle • Metal. • L: 69 cm; W: 50 cm; H of handlebars: 53 cm; H of saddle: 30 cm. 313 309 372 663 6

3 YEARS +

Medium Tricycle • Metal. • L: 77 cm; W: 54 cm; H of handlebars: 63 cm; H of saddle: 36 cm. 313 309 372 664 3

Rear brake

3 YEARS +

Scooter • Metal. • L: 94 cm; H of handlebars: 70 cm. • L of platform: 29 cm. • Ø wheel: 20 cm. 313 309 372 666 7

4 YEARS +

Large Tricycle • Metal. • L: 92 cm; W: 62 cm; H of handlebars: 69 cm; H of saddle: 41 cm. 313 309 372 665 0

3 YEARS +

Carrier • Metal. • L: 110 cm; W: 59 cm; H of handlebars: 63 cm; H of saddle: 36 cm. 313 309 372 668 1

295


Index 1, 2, 3 - Happy Families Games .......................33, 84 1, 2, 3 - I Can Count..................33, 81 1, 2, 3 - Sizes............................45, 80 1/4 Circle Comfort Mat................225 15 Body Discovery Games............288 16 Little Frogs ................................87 3D Cut-outs .......................... 124-125 3D Quadrimemo - Vehicles ............72 3D Quadrimemo - Animals ............72 4-Colour Mat................................286 4-Door Compartment Storage Unit.................................239 5 Senses Games (The) ....... 19, 67, 74

A A Walk in the Woods ......................87 A, B, C (Puzzle) .............................101 Abacolor ............................... 102, 140 Abacus............................................49 Abacus Sets ............................. 36-37 Acromaths Activity Cards...............42 Acromaths Material .......................42 Acromaths Sets........................41, 43 Actibaby.........................232-234, 275 Actidolls .......................................108 Actigym® .............................. 280-282 Actimousse® ................................278 Actimousse® for Little Ones ............. 230-231, 276-277 Activity House - Peek-a-boo .........97 Activity Podium .................... 229, 274 Activity Side Table ........................268 Activity Units - Clorofile ...... 216-219 Adaptable Ball Pool .....................235 Adhesive Magnetic Rubber ..........258 Affixing .........................................207 Agility Games ...............................288 All Clean! (Puzzles) .....................129 Alphabet Magnatab ........................25 Alphabet Simplis ............................25 Anilacing ......................................106 Animages .......................................16 Animal Lacing ..............................106 Animal Race (The) ..........................81 Animal Sounds Lotto .....................76 Apple Hammer Toy.........................96 Armchairs ....................................223 Art and Animals (Puzzle) ............132 Arts and Crafts .................... 186-209 Attendance Board ..........................60 Audio Flashcards - Animals ......8, 76 Audio Flashcards Everyday Sounds ........................8, 77

B

296

Babybeads............................ 106, 208 Babycolour ...................................121 Babyconnect.................................115 Babyshapes ..................................121 Babytactile ...................................121 Back Units Mobinathan................257 Balance ........................................283 Balanced Diet .......................... 62-63 Ball Bag........................................290 Ball Pool ............................... 235, 279 Ball Trolley ...................................290 Balls and Accessories ......... 290-291 Bambouchi ...................................117 Bambouchicolour.........................117 Base 10...........................................48 Basket .....................93, 152, 154, 162 Batibriques...................................113 Bead Frame House ........................97 Beads and Accessories ................208 Bear Musical Mobile ......................92 Bed ................................156-158, 162 Bedding ........................................157 Bench ................................... 150, 243 Big Blue Ball ................................291 Bingo ........................................32, 81 Birthday Tea Party .........................86 Board Games ........................... 86-89 Bob Gets Dressed ........................110

New products are in bold Body Discovery Puzzles ...............126 Bolsters ................................ 225, 244 Bolt Tree.......................................104 Bon Appétit! .............................63, 89 Book Boxes .......................... 264-265 Book Display and Storage Unit ....261 Book Tower ..................................261 Bowling Game ..............................293 Broaden vocabulary ................ 14-17 Buckets ........................................177 Buffet............................................151 Bunk Beds ....................................158 Bush Supports - Clorofile ............213

C Cabochons .................................. 195 Capital Letter Stamps ............ 25, 205 Capital Letter Stickers .................183 Car (Play corner) ..........................166 Card Games ............................. 82-85 Card Holders ..................................85 Cardboard Trays ...........................256 Carrier..........................................295 Castle ...........................................167 Central Processing Unit Stand ....271 Chain Links ..................................105 Chairs - Clorofile..........................223 Changing Matress .......................239 Changing Table ............................157 Changing Unit ..............................158 Changing Unit with Compartments with Doors ...................................239 Chronological Sequences ..............12 Classification Sets .............. 34-35,61 Clay ..............................................206 Clics..............................................116 Climbing Podium ................. 229, 274 Clocks.............................................59 Clorofile ............... 212-223, 246-247 Clothes Dryer ...............................163 Clown (The) ....................................97 Colour Game (The) .........................87 Colour Lengths ..............................47 Coloured Stickers........................182 Colouring-in Stickers...................183 Combination Kitchen Unit............151 Comfort Mats ................224-225, 287 Comforter Cushion ........................92 Compact Kitchen..........................148 Computer Unit on Wheels ...........271 Concentration Games and Yoga...289 Constructamagnet .......................114 Construction Games ............ 112-119 Cooker .................................. 145, 147 Cooking Utensil Set .....................152 Cookware .....................................152 Coulisso........................................116 Counting Box Sets.................... 28-29 Counting Games ........... 32-33, 80-81 Counting Stickers ........................183 Counting, Sorting, Measuring Material ................................... 48-49 Cow-Shed .....................................168 Cushion ........................................225 Cutlery ..........................................152 Cut-outs - My Wardrobe ..............126 Cut-outs - Size Sequencing .........123 Cut-outs in Stages .......................122 Cut-up Magnetic Fruits................153 Cycles ...........................................295

D Decorating Kits .................... 188-189 Dice ................................................48 Ding-Dong Ball ..............................92 Dining Set .....................................152 Discolud .........................................79 Discolud - Colours & Shapes ........79 Discovering Lengths ......................46 Discovering Writing................. 23-25 Disguises......................................165 Dishwasher ..................................147 Doctor’s Case ...............................159 Doll House....................................167

Doll’s Cradle .................................158 Dolls and Accessories ......... 160-162 Dolls’ Clothing Range..................161 Domino - Numbers ........................70 Double Computer Unit .................271 Double-sided Balancer ................283 Double-sided Basculo Bridge ......283 Dresser.........................................149 Dressing Table ..................... 157, 159 Dressing-up Unit..........................165 Dry Goods .....................................153

E Early Discoveries .................... 92-97 Easel Back Unit.................... 257, 268 Easels and Units for Painting .......................... 266-268 Educards .................................. 84-85 Educational Games ................. 66-89 Equiliwood......................................58 Euro Coins ......................................48 Everyday Life Lotto ........................69 Everyday Safety ..............................18 Expression Games ..................19, 75 Extra Letters ..................................25 Extra Number Boxes......................27

F Fabric Supports ...........................189 Fairy Tales (Puzzles) ............ 129-130 Fairy Tales Set ..................................7 Farandole .....................................141 Farm .............................................168 Farm Magnets ..............................111 Feet and Hands ............................292 Figurines ......................................169 Fine Board Markers .......................24 Fine Motor Skills ................... 98-111 Finger Puppets for Nursery Rhymes.....................164 Fingercards - Numbers ................83 Fingercards Spatial Awareness ..................50, 82 Fingertip Letters ............................24 Fingertip Numbers ........................24 First Acromaths Set .......................41 First Numbers Set .........................26 Fish...............................................153 Flexible Animal Bricks .................112 Flexible Train Bricks ....................112 Floor Cushions .............................242 Floor Mats ....................................286 Floor Seats ...................................244 Flower Puzzle...............................101 Foam Seats ..................................245 Foam Stamps ...............................205 Food Games ....................... 18, 62, 74 Four-wheeled Toddler Ride-on....294 Fridge ...........................................147 From Pictures to Words ...................6 Fruit Basket .................................153 Full Kitchen Unit ..........................148

G Garage Station ..................... 167, 173 Garden Tools ................................177 Gathering Carpet .........................242 Gathering Corner ................. 242-243 Gearwheel Cards .........................119 Geoblocks.......................................58 Geocolor ................................. 57, 139 Geometrix............................... 57, 139 Geometry ..................56-58, 101, 139 Geomosaic ...................................138 Geoplans ........................................56 Geo-Shapes..................................101 Geo-Wood .....................................101 Giant Bricks .................................113 Giant Wall Pouch ..........................258 Graphic Slates........................ 24, 198 Graphic Stencils Capital Letters.........................23, 99 Graphics Training Activity Cards....24

Grids - Quadriludi Table .................33 Gym Mat .......................................286 Gymdice with Cards .....................289 Gymkit® ................................ 284-285

H Hand Puppets...............................164 Helmets........................................165 Hen Run .........................................86 High Chair ....................................162 Hoops ................................... 285, 293 Hop Ball .......................................291 Hospital (Puzzle) .........................132 Hourglasses ...................................59 Housekeeping Set ........................163

I I Sort Out My Waste........................61 Image Sequences..................... 11-13 Image Sequences Sands of Time ..........................13, 59 Images for Building On ....................5 Instruments .................................180 Iron ...............................................163 Ironing Table ................................163

J K Jigsaws and Puzzles ........... 120-135 Jobs (Educards) .............................85 Key Teething Rattle ........................92 Kitchen Sink-Plus ........................147 Kitchen Table ............... 145, 149, 150

L Lace-up Shapes ...........................107 Lacing .................................. 106-109 Lacing Set - Fairy Tales ....... 107, 141 Lake Monster (The) ........................88 Landing Mat .................................287 Language Game................. 20, 21, 74 Large Images - Living Together ......5 Large Multishelf Storage Unit ....250 Laundry Unit ................................163 Learning Language ................... 4-22 Let’s Eat! ......................................110 Lexico .......................................22, 85 Library Furniture ................. 258-265 Lids for Trays ...............................255 Line Fishing .................................294 Lisa Gets Dressed ........................110 Listening Sets ............................ 8-10 Listening to Stories ..........................9 Little Ones’ Activity Table .............270 Logic Blocks ...................................56 Logic Puzzles ......................... 44, 135 Logical Identification .....................44 Logicoloredo ..................................38 Lotto - Colours ...............................70 Lotto - From 1 to 10 .......................70 Lotto - Objects ...............................70 Low Storage Boxes on Casters ....243

M Magnetic Activities ............... 110-111 Magnetic Animals ........................115 Magnetic Blocks...........................114 Magnetic Board and Letters ..........25 Magnetic Board and Pieces .........111 Magnetic Characters ...................115 Magnetic Counters.......................258 Magnetic Cursive Letters...............25 Magnetic Erasable Whiteboards ........................... 25, 111 Magnetic Fishing ...........................81 Magnetic Floral Frame ..................98 Magnetic Label Holders......... 32, 258 Magnetic Maze - Numbers ............98 Magnetic Number Line ..................32 Magnetic Panel Back Unit ...........257 Magnetic Shapes..........................111 Magnetic Storage Pocket .49, 111, 258


Magnetico.....................................114 Magnifying Glasses ........................62 Magnifying Jars..............................62 Making up Fairy Tales ......................6 Manipano........................................94 Manipano Activity Panels House ........................... 100, 220, 227 Manipuloo.....................................102 Markers ........................................198 Markers and Felt-tips .......... 198-199 Market Fruit .................................153 Market Stall .................................154 Market Vegetables .......................153 Matriochkas .................................123 Mats and Cushions .............. 224-225 Mattress .......................................244 Maxi Actibaby ....................... 233, 275 Maxi Dice ........................................48 Maxi Fishes ..................................105 Maxi Laces ...................................209 Maxi Stacking Cups........................96 Maxi Storage Buckets ..................256 Maxi Tongs ........................... 105, 152 Maxibolts ......................................104 Maxibricks ....................................112 Maxi-Chains .................................105 Maxicoloredo® ..............................136 Maxidomino - Animals ..................71 Maxigeocoloredo® ........................137 Maxilotto - Clothing.......................69 Maxilotto Animals ..........................68 Maxilotto Colours ...........................68 Maxilotto Food..........................63, 68 Maxi-magnifying Glass ..................62 Maximemo Food ......................63, 71 Maxi-Sticker Shapes ...................182 Measuring Cups .............................49 Meat .............................................153 Memo - Farm .................................70 Metal Board..................................258 Metal Wall Racks .........................263 Metallophone ...............................180 Microwave Oven ...........................147 Mini Actibaby ........................ 229, 274 Mini Bricks ...................................116 Mini Stacking Tower .....................101 Mini-patterns and Maxi-beads Set 39 Mirror ...........................................159 Mobile Bench ....................... 241, 243 Mobile Cloakroom ........................240 Mobilo...........................................119 MobiNathan ........................ 248-265 MobiNathan Casters ............ 249, 269 Modelling ............................. 206-207 Modular Kitchen .................. 146-147 Mosaicolor....................................138 Mosaics and Tiling ............... 136-139 Motor-Skills Sections ..................292 Movable Picture Dryer .................269 Movement Routes ................ 231, 277 Multi-activity Table.......................270 Multicoloured Animals (Puzzle) .134 Multicubes .....................................48 Multidice.........................................48 Multi-Level Garage ......................172 Multi-Sided Shape Sorter ............101 Multi-use Cones...........................293 Muscle Car .....................................96 Mushroom Stamps ......................207 Musical Bear ..................................92 Musical Instruments Audio Games .................... 10, 77, 181 Musikit..........................................181 My 1st Safari ..................................86 My First Sound Situations Lotto 9, 78 My First Tool Kit ...........................118 My First Workbench .....................104

N Nathan House ...............155, 236-237 Nature Activities ............................93 Nature and Environment .. 61-62, 75

Nature Games ..........................62, 75 Nature Mat ...................................169 Nest Baby Cushion.........................93 Nesting Actibaskets ....................109 Noise-Making Fabric Rattles .........92 Number Box Set.............................27

O Opposites Lotto ..............................69 Organicolor ............................ 58, 139 Organicubes ...................................55 Overalls ........................................201

P Painting and Accessories.... 200-205 Painting Trays ..............................268 Painting Trolley ............................268 Paper and Cardboard ...................197 Paper Storage Unit with Drawers 269 Parachute .....................................288 Partitionette Connector ....... 215, 218 Partitionettes - Clorofile..... 214-215 Passage Partition ........................215 Patterns and Beads Set .................40 Peek-a-boo Structure ....................95 Pencils..........................................199 Petipano .......................................110 Photo Boxes ............................. 14-15 Photo Sequence Set .......................13 Picture Dryer................................269 Picture Filing Trolley ....................269 Pingrip..........................................113 Piolino ............................................80 Place Mats ...................................152 Plastanat ......................................206 Plastic Baskets ............................256 Plastic Laces ................................209 Plastic Photo Holders .......... 241, 255 Plastic Shape Box .................. 96, 101 Plastic Shape Tracer Set ...............56 Plastic Trays.................................255 Plastic Vehicles ............................174 Play Basins ..................................152 Play Boat (Play corner) ................166 Play Food and Grocer........... 153-154 Play Mat - Targets ........................294 Playing Table ...............................171 Playing Table on Casters ............170 Ploum Chronological Series ..........12 Poly-M® ........................................115 Pools ............................................235 Portable Listening Unit ................181 Portrait Games...............................80 Primo Maxicoloredo® ...................136 Protective Flooring ......................287 Pull Along.......................................95 Puppet Theatre............................164 Puppets of the World ..............4, 164 Pushchair .....................................162 Puzzle Storage Rack ....................122 Puzzle Tray ...................................101 Puzzles................................. 126-135 Pyjamas .......................................160

Q Quadriludi Table - Numbers ..........33 Quadriludi Table - Shapes .............45 Quadriludi Table - Spatial Awareness......................................51 Quadrimemo - Animals .................73 Quadrimemo - Everyday life ..........73 Quadrimemo Shapes and Colours .......................73 Quantissimo - Counting Games.....84 Questions-Answers Set .................22

R Race Track ...................................173 Racing Steering Wheel ................294 Rain Sticks ...................................180 Reception Area .................... 239-241 Red Bedroom ....................... 158-159 Rhythmic Balls .............................291 Ribbons ........................................293 Right Order of Pictures (The) .........11 Ritmo ..............................................38 Rituals ............................................60 Road Mat ......................................172

Roller Animals ...............................96 Rolling Stool.................................222 Ropes ...........................................293 Russian Dolls ...............................108

S Savannah Fun...............................110 Say it in Words ...............................21 Scale ...............................................49 Scales and Cash Register ............152 Scarves .........................................293 Scenario - Chronological Sequences ......................................13 Scooter ........................................295 Screw-on Ladybird .......................104 Sea World Wall Panel ..................226 Seats, Mattress and Cushions ....................... 244-245 Seesaw Stamps Animal Skins........................ 203, 207 See-through Tunnel .....................283 Self-correction Games ............ 82-83 Sensory Baby Beads ....................106 Sensory Balls ...............................290 Sensory Book .................................92 Sensory Games ........................ 66-67 Sensory Routes .................... 230, 276 Service Station .............................172 Shop .............................................154 Shop Counter ...............................155 Shopping Trolley ..........................154 Sink ...................................... 145, 147 Slide Cubes ....................................48 Soft Animals.................................170 Solids .............................................56 Sorting Abacus ...............................36 Sorting Animals .............................49 Sorting Beads ................................37 Sorting Boxes .................................48 Sorting for the Planet ..............62, 89 Sorting Set - Animals ....................35 Sorting Set - Materials .................61 Sorting Sets ....................... 34-35, 61 Sorting Vehicles .............................49 Sound Discovery Blocks.................71 Sound Lotto of Everyday Sounds ...76 Sound Situations Lotto ............10, 78 Spare Cover....................................93 Spatial Awareness Sets .................54 Stepping Stones ...........................292 Stereo Headphones .....................181 Stereo Multi-Headphone Adapter 181 Stickers ................................ 182-184 Stilts .............................................293 Stools .................... 145, 149-150, 156 Storage Box on Casters ...............243 Storage Boxes ..............................256 Storage Unit for Sorting...............145 Storage Unit with Doors...............246 Storage Units ........ 145, 156, 246-247 Storage Units - Clorofile ...... 246-247 Structuro ........................................55

T Table (Pretend play) .....145, 150-156, ............................................. 222-223 Tables and Chairs Clorofile ................................ 222-223 Tactibeads ....................................105 Tactidominos ..................................66 Tactile Imps ..................................109 Tactile Path ..................................292 Tactilo® ...........................................66 Tactiloto ..........................................67 Tactiludi Animals ...........................66 Tales to Tell ......................................7 Tambourines ................................180 Tangrams .......................................56 Target Game .................................294 Technico Junior® ..........................118 Theatre and Puppets ...................164 Thermometer .................................59 Things to Decorate ..................... 186Three-Seat See-Saw ....................294 Tidy-Pouches ...............................258 Time Awareness ...................... 59-60 Toddler Trolley .............................162 Tokens ............................................48 Top-Mounted 2-Door Storage Unit.................................239

Top-Mounted 4-Door Storage Unit.................................239 Topology Sets ........................... 52-53 Topoprimo ................................ 20-51 Toporama .......................................50 Tracing Stencils ....................... 23-99 Traditional Bedroom ....................157 Traditional Kitchen............... 150-151 Traffico ...........................................88 Train Set .......................................175 Trays .............................................241 Treasure Hunt ...............................89 TriBenches ...................................243 Tricycle ........................................295 Triolo ............................................103 Tropical Fruit ................................153 Trucks ..........................................174 Tubulo...........................................115 Tunnels.........................................283

U V Ulysses the Puppet ..................4, 164 Units with Shelves and Doors............................. 250-251 Units with Trays................... 252-254 Uppercase Letters .........................25 Vanity Table ..................................159 Vehicles ........................................174 Vitamin (Pretend Play) ..145-146, 156

W Z Wall Grid.......................................148 Wall Mirror ...................................226 Wall Panels ..................................226 Wall-mounted Bar .......................226 Wall-mounted Changing Unit ......241 Wall-mounted Maxicoloredo®......137 Wall-mounted Shelf .....................247 Wall-Tac .......................................258 Wardrobe ......................................159 Washing Machine ......... 145, 147, 156 Water and Sand Equipment . 176-177 Wave and Rock Connectors .........292 Wave Mats ....................................226 Weather for Children ............. 60, 111 Weight Balls .......................... 49, 290 Weighted Bags .............................293 Whiteboard Markers ......................24 Wolf Game (The).............................88 Wood and Wire Display Unit.........263 Wooden Babygym...........................93 Wooden Construction Set .... 104, 118 Wooden Maze .................................98 Wooden Puzzles .................. 126-135 Wooden Train Set .........................175 Wooden Vehicles ..........................173 Word Family Game (The) ................22 Words in Photos .............................17 Workbench ...................................163 Writing Aid .....................................25 Zen Bed .......................................162 Zen Cooker ...................................148 Zen Highchair...............................162 Zigomaths (The) .............................30 Zigomaths Set 1 .............................31 Zigomaths Set 2 .............................31 Zippered Pockets ...........................49 Zoom - The Animal Kingdom .........16 Zoom - The Plant Kingdom ...........16

297


NEW

Expression Games 1-6 CHILDREN

3 YEARS +

• 4 games in 1 for discovering facial expressions and thinking about what they mean!

30 PHOTOS

6

COUNTERS

6

CARD BOARDS

Front / Back

« TO DISCOVER p.19 & p.75

Head Office Nathan - Learning Materials Department 25, Avenue Pierre de Coubertin - 75211 Paris Cedex 13 - France Phone: 00 33 (0) 1 45 87 52 11 - Fax: 00 33 (0) 1 45 87 51 97 E-mail: export@nathan.fr www.nathan.fr/learningmaterials


Issuu converts static files into: digital portfolios, online yearbooks, online catalogs, digital photo albums and more. Sign up and create your flipbook.